- 2018

Faculty of Business and Economics
Postgraduate - Units

ACC5903 - Accounting for business

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Greg van Mourik (First semester)
Dr Karen Zhang (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Mr Greg van Mourik (First semester)
Dr Karen Zhang (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (Evening)
  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (Evening)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

ACF5903, AFX9003 AND students enrolled in any of the following courses are prohibited: 0790, 0826, 3843, 4402, 0503, 3850, 4401, B6011, B6015

Synopsis

This unit examines the use of both financial and management accounting information for decision making. Whilst emphasising interpretation by users of accounting information, the unit will also provide students with an introduction and understanding of the preparation, presentation, and interpretation of financial statements. Similarly, the unit will provide an introduction to the preparation and presentation of various forms of management accounting information and aspects of management control. The unit will also provide an introduction to business structures and the governance and regulatory arrangements in respect of financial reporting that pertain to them.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the merits, and regulatory and financial reporting implications of various forms of business structure
  2. informed by an introductory understanding of the accounting process and the presentation of financial statements, critically use financial accounting information to make decisions about financial and other aspects of business performance
  3. in the decision making context, apply management accounting techniques relating to full and relevant costing, cost volume profit analysis, budgeting, capital management and accounting for sustainability
  4. demonstrate the application of judgement, problem solving, critical thinking and analytical skills.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 45% + Examination: 55%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACF5001 - Research project in accounting

12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Dean Hanlon

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ACX4000

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B6002.

Synopsis

Students conduct and report on a research project that addresses an important issue in business. The research is likely to have practical as well as theoretical outcomes and implications. The research project is completed under the supervision of academic staff from the Department of Accounting.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop the ability to conduct and manage a planned study within a set time frame
  2. demonstrate the ability to ask and answer critical questions that have accounting and policy significance at a professional standard
  3. critically analyse the literature relevant to the field of study
  4. devise and undertake empirical analysis using a range of techniques appropriate to the area of study
  5. communicate research findings in a formal report following the relevant stylistic conventions.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 288 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average six/eight hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACF5080 - Management control systems

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Aldonio Ferreira (First semester)
Associate Professor Ralph Kober (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (Evening)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ACF5955

Prohibitions

AFF5080

Synopsis

This unit examines key issues in management accounting, focusing on the relationship between management control systems, behavioural implications, and strategy. Topics include the design and evaluation of management control systems, especially behavioural implications, control typologies, and linkages to corporate governance, ethical issues and value creation. Management control issues in not-for-profit organisations will also be examined.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify and appraise the key issues in management control systems, including technical and behavioural aspects
  2. demonstrate an understanding of fundamental issues in business strategy and of the enabling role of management control systems in driving value creation
  3. apply a control typology to recommend management control systems suitable for organisations facing different contexts
  4. understand and appraise the linkages between contemporary corporate governance and ethical issues and management control systems
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving, and communication skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with management control systems and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by ACF5080.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACF5100 - Strategic management accounting

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Christo Karunananthan

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (Evening)
  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ACF5955

Prohibitions

AFF5100, ACC5100

Synopsis

In today's business environment the accountant engages with the organisation's senior managers and contributes to strategy formulation and implementation. This unit focuses on the concepts and techniques of business strategy formulation and how management accounting information systems act as a corporate control system providing information for strategic decisions.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate how management accounting systems can be designed to support strategy
  2. critically evaluate strategic management accounting concepts and techniques
  3. apply management accounting techniques to strategic business decisions
  4. analyse and make recommendations regarding the design of performance measurement systems and strategic management accounting systems
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with advanced strategic management accounting and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by ACF5100.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACF5120 - Forensic accounting and fraud examination

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Mukesh Garg (First semester)
Associate Professor Chen Chen (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (Evening)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ACF5957

Prohibitions

AFF5120, AFX5120, ACF5120, AFF5130

Synopsis

This unit covers theoretical and practical issues relevant to forensic accounting and fraud examination. Forensic accounting is the application of investigative and analytical skills to resolve financial issues in a manner that meets standards required by courts of law. Fraud examination is the process used to resolve allegations of fraud through the accumulation of evidence, including the investigation of systems and internal controls, and the detection of fraud circumstances. The unit examines the investigative process as well as an array of tools and techniques used to investigate financial forensic issues and fraud. Topics include: methods and techniques used by forensic accountants to collect, analyse and report relevant information for supporting cases to be presented in court; the nature, prevention, detection and investigation of different types of fraud, including: financial statement fraud, fraud against the organisation, consumer fraud, and e-commerce fraud.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine the nature of fraud and critically evaluate and apply theories and techniques to prevent, detect and investigate different types of fraud, including financial statement fraud, fraud against organisations, consumer fraud, and fraud in e-commerce
  2. demonstrate the application of knowledge and skills that forensic accountants and fraud examiners are expected to possess. These include: investigative techniques, knowledge of auditing, ethics, criminology, accounting, law, and information technology, and communication skills
  3. develop an ability to work independently and to lead and participate in teams from diverse cultural and social backgrounds by completing both independent and group assessable tasks
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with forensic accounting and fraud examination and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by ACF5120.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACF5130 - Financial statement analysis and business valuation

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Anthony Ng (First semester)
Dr Sandip Dhole (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (Evening)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed ACF5953 or be enrolled in course B6014 and have passed ACF5903, ECF5953 and ETF5900.

There are no prerequisites for students enrolled in course B6002 or B6015.

Prohibitions

ACC5130, AFF5090, AFF5130

Synopsis

The focus of this unit is on the process of business valuation. Topics include capital markets issues, evaluation of industry profitability, accounting analysis including evaluation of earnings management techniques, preparation of pro-forma statements, forecasting, bankruptcy analysis, and business valuation techniques.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. compare and contrast approaches to business valuation
  2. apply economic, industry and business analysis in the valuation process
  3. evaluate an entity's accounting information and perform fundamental and financial analysis using a contemporary approach
  4. apply prospective analysis including forecasting and valuation to a merger and acquisition case
  5. develop capabilities to work effectively in a group; and/or demonstrate effective individual research skills to produce a professional quality business document to solve a valuation problem; and/or deliver a professional quality presentation; and/or develop oral communication skills and demonstrate independent thinking through contributions to class discussions; and demonstrate in individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of an comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by this unit.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACF5150 - Financial reporting issues

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Mehdi Khedmati (First semester)
Dr Janto Haman (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (Evening)
  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ACF5956

Prohibitions

ACC5150, AFF5150

Synopsis

The extent to which accounting theories provide a basis for determining the content of external financial reports and resolving accounting controversies. The subject will provide students with the opportunity to further develop skills of analysis, evaluation and synthesis in the areas of financial accounting and reporting and in the process create an awareness of some current developments in accounting regulation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. acquire advanced knowledge and skills in understanding research articles
  2. synthesise academic literature related to financial reporting issues like voluntary disclosure and earnings management
  3. appraise and apply a methodology relating to capital markets research in accounting
  4. develop capabilities to work effectively in a group; and/or demonstrate effective individual research skills to produce a professional quality business document that reports on the findings of an empirical research project; and/or deliver a professional quality presentation; and/or develop oral communication skills and demonstrate independent thinking through contributions to class discussions; and demonstrate in individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of an comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by this unit.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACF5268 - Accounting for healthcare managers

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Robyn Dyt

Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

This unit introduces basic accounting principles for non-accountants. The information requirements of two main groups are examined - external users such as owners or investors; and internal users such as managers. The structure, meaning, analysis and interpretation of financial statements are explored, together with key measures of assessing financial performance. Financial issues confronting healthcare managers, such as budgeting, cost management and performance measurement are also introduced.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate an understanding of key accounting principles, terms and language
  2. apply financial accounting principles in the preparation of key financial statements incorporating the balance sheet, the income statement and the statement of cash flows
  3. analyse and interpret the information contained in basic financial statements and be able to draw conclusions about financial performance, financial position, liquidity and risk of firms in the healthcare sector
  4. demonstrate skills in building, analysing and using a budget and
  5. apply the principles of management control systems to financial issues in healthcare.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACF5320 - Business analytics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Kristian Rotaru (First semester)
Associate Professor Ly Fie Sugianto (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Kristian Rotaru (First semester)
Associate Professor Ly Fie Sugianto (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

ETC2480Not offered in 2018, ETF2480, ETW2480, AFX5320

Synopsis

Business analytics and their applications to financial and management decision making will be explored for a range of business situations including: investment; planning; cash flow management; capital budgeting; contract awards; and risk analysis. Analytics covered include: problem structuring; multiple criteria decision making; optimisation; simulation; and data mining. Upon completion of this unit, students are expected to competently use selected analytics, to provide management interpretation of the solutions and to formulate business analyst's recommendations. The unit utilises advanced computer modelling tools available in Microsoft Excel and other modelling software packages.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. appraise the role of business analytics in organisations, the decision making life cycle in business and financial management, model building techniques, model solving techniques, interpretation of results from business models and cutting edge business analytics tools
  2. propose modelling and simulation as effective business and financial decision making procedure, evaluate the risks and benefits of interactive computer-supported business decision making
  3. formulate business problem, choose theoretical framework and decide appropriate decision modelling techniques for given business management situations, assess the limitations of models and the appropriateness of modelling environments
  4. integrate critical thinking, problem solving and communication skills in the assessment of individual summative tasks and/or group tasks dealing with business analytics topics covered in ACF5320.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACF5330 - Integrated systems for business enterprises

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Daisy Seng (First semester)
Dr Dennis Fehrenbacher (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Daisy Seng (First semester)
Dr Dennis Fehrenbacher (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (Evening)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ACF5904

Prohibitions

BUS5700, FIT5101, AFX5330

Synopsis

The objective of this unit is to introduce students to the business aspects of integrated enterprise systems. Enterprise systems are configurable business information systems that integrate information across multiple enterprise functions and business units, support key enterprise processes, and provide an enterprise wide view of business performance. Topics include systems and technology background, business processes and process reengineering, integration of core financial and logistics processes, enterprise wide reporting, and techniques for assessing enterprise productivity and enterprise dynamics. A well-known integrated enterprise system will be extensively used in this unit.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. discuss the characteristics of enterprise systems and evaluate their contribution to the global marketplace
  2. discuss and assess the design and operation of business processes in an integrated system as they support decision making
  3. critically analyse the factors that have contributed to world-wide adoption of enterprise systems and the types of benefits obtained
  4. demonstrate practical skills by using a popular enterprise system and employing it to solve problems
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with integrated systems for business enterprises and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by ACF5330.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACF5350 - Applied contemporary accounting

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Paul Thambar (First semester)
Associate Professor Ralph Kober (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (Evening)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed ACF5100 and two of ACF5120, ACF5130 or ACF5150.

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B6002.

Synopsis

This capstone unit requires students to synthesize, analyse, evaluate and apply prior knowledge and skills gained throughout the Master of Accounting in a manner that is designed to enhance their ability to transition to a chosen career path. The unit adopts a thematic approach that examines how external and regulatory factors, decision making processes, and stakeholder expectations interact to drive contemporary organisational success. Collectively, these three interrelated pillars of knowledge provide a comprehensive framework for those aspiring for challenging accounting and finance positions. Content is delivered in a weekly seminar format and draws upon selected case studies that cover topics including strategy, corporate governance, financial reporting and performance management. Given the integrative nature of the unit, assessment is primarily based on a combination of individual and group case study analysis.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse, synthesize and evaluate the effect of accounting policies, regulatory requirements and other external factors on organisational performance
  2. analyse, synthesize and evaluate drivers of sustainable competitive advantage and value creation in various organisational and industry settings, including their impact on stakeholder satisfaction
  3. analyse, synthesize and evaluate contemporary performance management systems (PMS) and the role played by PMS in strategy formulation and decision making
  4. demonstrate written and presentation skills at a level required for a senior career in accounting and business
  5. demonstrate research and analytical skills to solve complex accounting and business problems and ethical dilemmas
  6. demonstrate a capacity to work independently and lead and participate in teams.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACF5510 - Integrated accounting

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Ly Fie Sugianto (First semester)
Professor Cameron Truong (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Ly Fie Sugianto (First semester)
Professor Cameron Truong (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (Evening)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed ACF5955 and one of ACF5904 or ACF5958.

Co-requisites

ACF5956, ACF5957

Synopsis

Accounting is concerned with the provision, analysis and communication of information to stakeholders. Accountants record, summarise, classify, interpret and communicate both financial and non-financial information. In this capstone unit, students will consolidate their previous learning gained throughout the Master of Professional Accounting course and apply their skills and knowledge directly in a team-based environment. The unit aims to prepare students for an accounting and finance career path. Using a virtual integrated business environment, the unit showcases a thematic approach that allows the interaction of regulatory, economic, social, ethical and global perspectives.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically evaluate the effect, direct or indirect, of accounting issues, practices and policies on organisational performance
  2. analyse and evaluate drivers of sustainable competitive advantage and value creation in various organisational settings, including their impact on stakeholder satisfaction
  3. appraise the role played by contemporary performance management systems (PMS) in strategy formulation and decision making
  4. enhance your ability to report, interpret and communicate accounting advice and ideas through written and oral presentation
  5. enhance your capacity to work independently, as well as lead, collaborate and participate in teams.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACF5903 - Accounting for business

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Greg Van Mourik (First semester)
Dr Karen Zhang (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Mr Greg van Mourik (First semester)
Dr Karen Zhang (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (Evening)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

AFX9003, MBA9004 and students enrolled in any of the following courses are prohibited: 0503, B6002.

Synopsis

This unit examines the use of both financial and management accounting information for decision making. Whilst emphasising interpretation by users of accounting information, the unit will also provide students with an introduction and understanding of the preparation, presentation, and interpretation of financial statements. Similarly, the unit will provide an introduction to the preparation and presentation of various forms of management accounting information and aspects of management control. The unit will also provide an introduction to business structures and the governance and regulatory arrangements in respect of financial reporting that pertain to them.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the merits, and regulatory and financial reporting implications of various forms of business structure
  2. informed by an introductory understanding of the accounting process and the presentation of financial statements, critically use financial accounting information to make decisions about financial and other aspects of business performance
  3. in the decision making context, apply management accounting techniques relating to full and relevant costing, cost volume profit analysis, budgeting, capital management and accounting for sustainability
  4. demonstrate the application of judgement, problem solving, critical thinking and analytical skills.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 45% + Examination: 55%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACF5904 - Accounting information systems

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Andrzej Ceglowski

Coordinator(s)

Dr Andrzej Ceglowski

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (Evening)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

If students are enrolled in course B6002 there are no prerequisites.

Students enrolled in all other courses must have passed ACF5950.

Prohibitions

AFF2851, AFC2851, AFX9520, AFX9521, AFX9580 and ACF5958

Synopsis

Because most accounting systems are computerised, accountants must understand software and information systems to turn data into financial information and to develop and evaluate controls. This unit builds an understanding of the way accounting information systems work so that students may use, analyse and contribute to the design of accounting information systems and subsystems. Accordingly, the unit provides students with an understanding of critical information technologies that drive information systems; core business processes that allow an organisation to operate efficiently and effectively; common documentation tools used to diagram and assess business processes and databases; and internal control concepts that can be applied to mitigate risks.

Outcomes

The learning objectives associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the use of information systems for business and analyse and make recommendations on the utilisation and design of such systems
  2. interpret business process documentation including flowcharts and data flow diagrams
  3. communicate with database professionals about the design of databases
  4. critique computerised and manual business processes in terms of their exposure to risk, and suggest internal controls that address the risks
  5. apply critical thinking and problem solving to activities dealing with accounting information systems.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACF5950 - Introductory accounting

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Dr John Webster (First semester)
Ms Jin Zhang (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Dr John Webster (First semester)
Ms Jin Zhang (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (Evening)
  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (Evening)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

ACG5971 and students enrolled in any of the following courses are prohibited: 0503 or B6002.

Synopsis

This unit provides students with an introduction to accounting and an understanding of the preparation, presentation and interpretation of financial statements. In particular, emphasis is placed on accounting processes, practices and policies that enable the financial performance and financial position of an entity, as displayed by the balance sheet, income statement and statement of cash flows, to be measured, analysed and interpreted.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse and record accounting transactions and events, and produce financial statements consistent with the accounting conceptual framework and accounting standards
  2. appraise the relative merits of accrual and cash accounting
  3. prepare special journals as they relate to cash and the periodic and perpetual inventory recording systems
  4. critically evaluate an entity's financial position and performance
  5. demonstrate effective individual technical skills to construct accounting records and financial statements for a unique business; and demonstrate in individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by the unit.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACF5953 - Financial accounting

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Wei Lu (First semester)
Dr Jerry Lin (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (Evening)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students enrolled in course B6011 or B6015 must have passed ACF5950.

There are no prerequisites for students enrolled in course B6002.

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B6002, B6011 or B6015.

Prohibitions

AFF9601, AFG9073, AFX4601, AFX9530

Synopsis

An overview of the Australian financial reporting and regulatory framework for reporting entities, including an analysis of the relevant significant accounting standards, benchmarking against the conceptual framework, professional reporting requirements and stock exchange requirements. Financial reporting for corporate groups (including the impact of control, joint control and significant influence) and selected issues in financial reporting are also explored and benchmarked against the conceptual framework.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe and compare the regulatory requirements, domestic and international, associated with the preparation of general purpose financial statement for companies
  2. apply and critique the accounting rules for entities' investments in other entities, and apply these rules to prepare consolidated financial statements
  3. analyse a number of measurement and financial reporting issues and their possible resolution, including: accounting for income tax, post-acquisition accounting for assets, and business combinations
  4. develop capabilities to work effectively in a group to produce professional quality research reports; effective individual technical skills to construct consolidated financial statements; and demonstrate in individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by the unit.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACF5955 - Management accounting

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Zhiyun Gong (First semester)
Dr Anna Stamatelatos (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Zhiyun Gong (First semester)
Dr Anna Stamatelatos (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (Evening)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

If students are enrolled in course B6002 there are no prerequisites. For students enrolled in all other courses the prerequisite is ACF5950.

Prohibitions

AFF9611, AFG9072, ACG5972, AFX5611, AFX9550

Synopsis

This unit aims to develop students' understanding of the concepts and techniques of management accounting, and skills in the use of management accounting techniques to communicate decision-useful information to management. The unit content includes costing terminology, cost accumulation and recording systems, costing methods for both manufacturing and service-based organisations, how management accounting information informs key product decisions such as pricing and product mix, and the design of budget systems.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. apply management accounting principles and techniques to service and manufacturing industry cases
  2. compare, contrast and demonstrate various costing models
  3. design budgets and explain the behavioural aspects of different budgeting styles
  4. examine cost-volume-profit analyses, divisional performance evaluation measures
  5. develop capabilities to work effectively in a group; and/or demonstrate effective individual research skills to solve management accounting problems and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by ACF5955.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACF5956 - Advanced financial accounting

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Dean Hanlon (First Semester)
Ms Lorena Mitrione (Second Semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (Evening)
  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students enrolled in course B6011 or B6015 must have passed ACF5953.

There are no prerequisites for students enrolled in course B6002.

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B6002, B6011 or B6015.

Prohibitions

AFF9631, AFG9040, ACG5940, AFX5631, AFX9560

Synopsis

This unit is one of the final core units in the Master of Professional Accounting, and builds on knowledge and skills gained in earlier units in financial accounting. One of its primary purposes is to introduce students to theories currently being used to assist in understanding the role of financial accounting and reporting in the decision making process of both preparers and users of information. These theories include positive accounting theory, capital markets and systems theories. It also addresses how regulation might influence the production of accounting information.

The unit addresses a number of contemporary accounting topics, from both a practical and theoretical perspective. These include intangible assets, social and environmental reporting, financial instruments and foreign currency transactions.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. apply a range of theories of accounting to explain financial accounting and reporting practices and appreciate the judgments, estimations and assumptions influencing accounting numbers
  2. critically assess and appreciate changing influences in standard setting; the compliance regime in capital markets and impacts of regulatory requirements on financial reporting practices
  3. assess the role of financial accounting in sustainable development and corporate social and environmental performance reporting
  4. analyse a range of financial reporting issues, including intangible assets, financial instruments and foreign currency transactions, from both a practical and theoretical perspective; and demonstrate effective individual research skills to produce professional quality business documents to solve financial accounting problems; and demonstrate in individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by this unit.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACF5957 - Auditing and assurance

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Joey Huang (First semester)
Dr Damien Lambert (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Joey Huang (First semester)
Dr Damien Lambert (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (Evening)
  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students enrolled in course B6011 or B6015 must have passed ACF5953.

There are no prerequisites for students enrolled in course B6002.

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B6002, B6011 or B6015.

Prohibitions

AFG9041, ACG5941, AFF9621, AFX5621, AFX9570

Synopsis

Topics include nature and objectives of auditing; auditing standards; audit reporting; audit expectation gap and legal liability; professional ethics and quality control; audit evidence; audit planning, strategic business risk analysis, materiality, analytical review procedures and audit risk model; study and evaluation of internal control and model; assessing control risk CIS audit techniques, test of transactions and tests of balances, completing the audit and post audit responsibilities; internal auditing and performance auditing, other assurance services and current issues in auditing.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain and debate the role, limitations and demand for audits in modern corporate society, and give examples of the professional, ethical and legal obligations, and the standards and principles applicable to the audit profession
  2. distinguish between the different types and levels of assurance services provided by professional practitioners, including auditors, and describe the assurance framework
  3. examine the auditor's role in corporate governance with particular emphasis on assessment of internal controls and the detection and reporting of fraud and error
  4. identify, distinguish between and apply the key evidence gathering procedures used by auditors when planning, testing, completing the audit and forming an audit opinion
  5. demonstrate an ability to work independently and to lead and participate in teams from diverse cultural and social backgrounds in independent and group assessable tasks
  6. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and / or group activities dealing with auditing and assurance and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by ACF5957.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACM5903 - Accounting for business

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Ananda Samudhram

Coordinator(s)

Dr Ananda Samudhram

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (Evening)

Prohibitions

ACF5903

Synopsis

This unit is an introduction to basic concepts in accounting and finance and the application of these concepts for decision-making by a wide range of potential users (e.g., shareholders, investment analysts, lenders, managers, etc). This unit is appropriate for those students who wish to specialise in accounting and finance, and whose primary interest lies elsewhere in the field of business. This unit will provide a clear understanding of the accounting process and the language of accounting to enable communication with an accounting professional, understand the relevance of accounting information for informed decision-making by a wide range of potential users, and have the ability to analyse and interpret accounting information.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate an understanding of various forms of business organisations
  2. apply financial and management accounting principles in the preparation of financial statements
  3. measure and interpret basic concepts and principles of accounting and financial management in making investment decisions
  4. develop the ability to work effectively in a team; demonstrate the development of skills in critical analysis and problem solving.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACX4000 - Research methods

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Matthew Hall

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B3701 or B6002.

Prohibitions

AFX4000

Synopsis

Introduction to a broad range of research methodology and testing procedures used in accounting research. This unit comprises an analysis of the science of research, an examination of the key elements of research in accounting, general research methodology, data issues, ethical issues, the development of research questions, hypothesis development, and the design and application of a variety of different research methods used in accounting research.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the major steps in the development of a research project in accounting
  2. illustrate the key strengths and weaknesses of different accounting research designs and methods
  3. design and apply qualitative and quantitative data analysis techniques and interpret the output
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills in individual and/or group activities.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACX4018 - Honours research thesis

24 points, SCA Band 3, 0.500 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Dean Hanlon

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

AFX4000 or ACX4000

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B3701.

Prohibitions

AFX4018

Synopsis

Students conduct a critical review of the literature relevant to their study; derive appropriate hypotheses for testing; devise an empirical test of the hypotheses showing regard to practical problems of conducting research, ethical considerations, and principles of scientific method; conduct a planned study and manage any problems arising in the data collection; select and conduct an appropriate analysis of the data; and write a report on the project, showing due regard to relevant stylistic conventions.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. implement a research proposal
  2. recognise practical problems of conducting scientific research and propose solutions
  3. complete a research dissertation
  4. develop the ability to conduct and manage a planned study
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills in individual and/or group activities dealing with a research dissertation.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 432 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average seven/eight hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACX4040 - Issues in accounting information systems

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Carla Wilkin

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B3701 or B6002.

Prohibitions

AFX4040

Synopsis

The objective of this unit is to provide students with a broad introduction to the contemporary themes in research into Accounting Information Systems. The unit covers issues of research and practice in the following areas: frameworks and ontologies in information systems; decision making; process modelling; behavioural aspects concerned with the design and implementation of systems; and data management issues. Upon completion of this unit, students are expected to be able to evaluate critically the design and conduct of research, and to design their own research into issues of relevance to the accounting information systems field.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop an understanding of key philosophical issues in Accounting Information Systems research, particularly the ontological foundations of the discipline
  2. articulate solutions to significant research problems using key paradigms in the Accounting Information Systems discipline
  3. critique research relating to the design and use of accounting and business information systems
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with issues in accounting information systems and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by ACX4040.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACX4050 - Issues in auditing and assurance

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Robyn Moroney

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B3701 or B6002.

Prohibitions

AFX4050

Synopsis

This unit considers both theoretical and professional issues relevant to the various participants to the audit process. The unit provides students with an overview of the nature of assurance and regulation of the audit profession, the economics of auditing, and the behavioural dimensions of auditing. Topics also include future directions for assurance services, fraud, internal control and corporate governance issues.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. evaluate and contrast research paradigms in auditing and assurance research
  2. describe and evaluate the range of methods of decision making in auditing
  3. critically evaluate empirical research and identify major research questions in auditing and assurance including audit quality, internal control, fraud and corporate governance
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills in individual and/or group activities dealing with issues in auditing and assurance and demonstrate in individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by ACX4050.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACX4070 - Issues in financial accounting

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Dean Hanlon

Coordinator(s)

Dr Dean Hanlon

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B3701 or B6002.

Prohibitions

AFX4070

Synopsis

This unit provides an overview of research in financial accounting, including consideration of the major theoretical foundations of the financial accounting discipline and the variety of research methods employed to investigate financial accounting topics. Research related to a variety of contemporary issues in financial accounting research is examined, including the determinants and consequences of accounting policy choice and financial reporting quality.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. evaluate and contrast research paradigms and relevant theories in financial accounting research
  2. evaluate and contrast different research methods used in financial accounting research
  3. critically evaluate empirical research and develop an ability to identify major research questions in financial accounting research
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills in individual and/or group activities dealing with issues in financial accounting research and demonstrate in individual summative assessment tasks, acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by ACX4070.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACX4090 - Issues in management accounting

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Matthew Hall

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B3701 or B6002.

Prohibitions

AFX4090

Synopsis

The unit provides an overview of research in management accounting, including consideration of the major theoretical foundations of the management accounting discipline and the variety of research methods employed to investigate management accounting topics. Research related to a variety of management accounting practices is examined including budgeting, performance measurement, incentives, and formal and informal methods of control.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. discuss research paradigms and relevant theories as they relate to management accounting research
  2. evaluate and contrast research paradigms and different research methods used in management accounting research
  3. critically evaluate empirical research and develop an ability to identify major research questions in management accounting research
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills in individual and/or group activities dealing with issues in management accounting research.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACX4150 - Empirical research in analysis of financial statements

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Vic Naiker (Semester 1)
Professor Farshid Navissi (Semester 2)

Not offered in 2018

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B3701.

Prohibitions

AFX4150

Synopsis

This unit examines the association between financial reporting information and capital markets. Specific areas of focus include accounting-based valuation models, discussions of pricing of information risk in the context of the capital asset pricing models, expected cost of equity capital, implied cost of equity capital, cost of debt, and application of cost of capital to auditing.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe accounting-based valuation methods and apply these methods to listed companies
  2. critically evaluate the role of information risk in securities pricing
  3. critically evaluate empirical research in cost of equity capital
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills in individual and/or group activities dealing with the analysis of financial statements.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACX4190 - Behavioural research in accounting

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Robyn Moroney

Not offered in 2018

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B3701.

Prohibitions

AFX4190

Synopsis

This unit considers both theoretical and professional issues relevant to the various subdisciplines of accounting. The unit provides students with an overview of behavioural research in each of the following areas: management accounting and accounting information systems, financial accounting and auditing. Students are also provided with an appreciation of some of the issues involved in the most commonly applied research methods in behavioural accounting research.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically evaluate empirical research and identify major research questions in behavioural research in accounting
  2. critically evaluate recent developments in behavioural research and implications for accounting researchers/practitioners
  3. illustrate the key strengths and weaknesses in commonly applied research methods in behavioural research
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills in individual and/or group activities dealing with issues in behavioural accounting and demonstrate in individual assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by ACX4190.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACX5951 - International study program in accounting

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Wei Lu

Coordinator(s)

Dr Wei Lu

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Summer semester A 2018 (On-campus block of classes)

Prerequisites

Students must be granted permission by the Chief Examiner to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions

AFF9551

Synopsis

This unit centres on both a conceptual and practical approach to International Accounting Issues with emphasis on international standard setting and compliance as viewed by regulators and private sector preparers of accounts. Students gain a practical understanding of these issues in an international context through the overseas visitation program which forms an integral part of this unit.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop an understanding the history of accounting standard setting in various countries and the international convergence of accounting standards
  2. develop a practical understanding and appreciation of cultural differences within the area of international accounting through an overseas visitation program
  3. develop a set of academic skills which include the ability to work independently, evaluate academic papers in terms of the application of theories to understand and explain differences in financial reporting, search the web and to submit assignments on time
  4. develop excellent oral and written communication skills to be able to analyse case studies and to lead/participate in groups from diverse cultural and social backgrounds.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BEH4001 - Business and economics exchange unit

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Unit guides

Offered

Overseas

Synopsis

This unit is used by the Faculty to enrol students undertaking outbound exchange studies at a host institution. Students will not be able to enrol in this unit via WES. The faculty will manage the enrolment of students undertaking an outbound exchange program to ensure fees and credit are processed accurately.


BEH4002 - Business and economics exchange unit

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Unit guides

Offered

Overseas

Synopsis

This unit is used by the Faculty to enrol students undertaking outbound exchange studies at a host institution. Students will not be able to enrol in this unit via WES. The faculty will manage the enrolment of students undertaking an outbound exchange program to ensure fees and credit are processed accurately.


BEH4003 - Business and economics exchange unit

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Unit guides

Offered

Overseas

Synopsis

This unit is used by the Faculty to enrol students undertaking outbound exchange studies at a host institution. Students will not be able to enrol in this unit via WES. The faculty will manage the enrolment of students undertaking an outbound exchange program to ensure fees and credit are processed accurately.


BEH4004 - Business and economics exchange unit

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Unit guides

Offered

Overseas

Synopsis

This unit is used by the Faculty to enrol students undertaking outbound exchange studies at a host institution. Students will not be able to enrol in this unit via WES. The faculty will manage the enrolment of students undertaking an outbound exchange program to ensure fees and credit are processed accurately.


BEH5001 - Business and economics exchange unit

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Unit guides

Offered

Overseas

Sri Lanka

  • Summer semester B 2018 (On-campus)

Synopsis

This unit is used by the Faculty to enrol students undertaking outbound exchange studies at a host institution. Students will not be able to enrol in this unit via WES. The faculty will manage the enrolment of students undertaking an outbound exchange program to ensure fees and credit are processed accurately.


BEH5002 - Business and economics exchange unit

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Unit guides

Offered

Overseas

Synopsis

This unit is used by the Faculty to enrol students undertaking outbound exchange studies at a host institution. Students will not be able to enrol in this unit via WES. The faculty will manage the enrolment of students undertaking an outbound exchange program to ensure fees and credit are processed accurately.


BEH5003 - Business and economics exchange unit

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Unit guides

Offered

Overseas

Synopsis

This unit is used by the Faculty to enrol students undertaking outbound exchange studies at a host institution. Students will not be able to enrol in this unit via WES. The faculty will manage the enrolment of students undertaking an outbound exchange program to ensure fees and credit are processed accurately.


BEH5004 - Business and economics exchange unit

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Unit guides

Offered

Overseas

Synopsis

This unit is used by the Faculty to enrol students undertaking outbound exchange studies at a host institution. Students will not be able to enrol in this unit via WES. The faculty will manage the enrolment of students undertaking an outbound exchange program to ensure fees and credit are processed accurately.


BEH5901 - Business and economics exchange unit

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Summer semester A 2018 (On-campus block of classes)

Overseas

Prohibitions

BEH9001

Synopsis

This unit is used by the Faculty to enrol students undertaking outbound exchange studies at a host institution. Students will not be able to enrol in this unit via WES. The faculty will manage the enrolment of students undertaking an outbound exchange program to ensure fees and credit are processed accurately.


BEH5902 - Business and economics exchange unit

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Summer semester A 2018 (On-campus block of classes)

Overseas

Prohibitions

BEH9002

Synopsis

This unit is used by the Faculty to enrol students undertaking outbound exchange studies at a host institution. Students will not be able to enrol in this unit via WES. The faculty will manage the enrolment of students undertaking an outbound exchange program to ensure fees and credit are processed accurately.


BEH5903 - Business and economics exchange unit

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Unit guides

Offered

Overseas

Prohibitions

BEH9003

Synopsis

This unit is used by the Faculty to enrol students undertaking outbound exchange studies at a host institution. Students will not be able to enrol in this unit via WES. The faculty will manage the enrolment of students undertaking an outbound exchange program to ensure fees and credit are processed accurately.


BEH5904 - Business and economics exchange unit

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Unit guides

Offered

Overseas

Prohibitions

BEH9004

Synopsis

This unit is used by the Faculty to enrol students undertaking outbound exchange studies at a host institution. Students will not be able to enrol in this unit via WES. The faculty will manage the enrolment of students undertaking an outbound exchange program to ensure fees and credit are processed accurately.


BEW4000 - Research methodology 1

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Vimala Kunchamboo (First semester)
Ms Juliana French (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Vimala Kunchamboo (First semester)
Ms Juliana French (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B3702, B5003 or 4414.

Synopsis

This unit aims to develop students' understanding of qualitative research, with specific focus on qualitative research philosophy, qualitative research design and qualitative research methods. This unit explores topics such as: paradigmatic approaches to research; research design; negotiation of access to research sites/participants; researcher ethics; methods of qualitative data collection such as observation, interviews, focus groups and non-intrusive data collection; methods of data analysis; issues of qualitative research validity; and qualitative writing.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the characteristics and usefulness of qualitative research
  2. develop a sounds research design
  3. understand various matters associated with the conduct of qualitative research such as gaining access and managing ethical issues
  4. differentiate between qualitative methods of data collection and determine when each is most appropriate
  5. analyse qualitative data using a number of different analytical techniques
  6. develop an understanding of different ways in which qualitative data can be written, as well as practical skills in qualitative writing.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BEW4010 - Research methodology 2

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Prabahkaran Narayanan

Coordinator(s)

Dr Prabahkaran Narayanan

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B3702, B5003 or 4414.

Prohibitions

ETW2111, ETX2111, ETX2121Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

An in-depth introduction to quantitative research methods. This subject is one of two that together supply the research methodology skills and knowledge necessary for students to complete an independent research project at the honours level. It provides a comprehensive coverage of quantitative research methodologies. Topics include: survey studies/correlational field studies; forms of regression; analysis of variances; discriminant analysis; factor analysis; non-parametric statistics.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. gain comprehensive business-related research skills, including an extensive grounding in a range of quantitative research methodologies
  2. gain the necessary quantitative skills to undertake independent research
  3. develop effective report writing and communication skills
  4. have the ability to comment critically on research publications.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BEW4020 - Directed studies 1

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Chong Yit Sean

Coordinator(s)

Dr Chong Yit Sean

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B3702, B5003 or 4414.

Synopsis

Under the guidance of an academic supervisor, this subject allows a student to independently gain in-depth discipline knowledge in a selected area of business and commerce as a foundation to the completion of an honours project. The student will complete a prescribed list of readings, undertake further independent literature studies, and complete other learning activities and assessments considered appropriate for the selected field of study.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse the literature in order to develop subject matter expertise beyond the specific focus of the Honours project
  2. synthesise the literature to inform the student's research topic of choice
  3. critically evaluate academic literature and present in written and/or oral form key arguments related to the research project.

Assessment

Assessment will be through a combination of assignments, examinations, and written reports appropriate to the selected area of study and associated activities.

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BEW4030 - Directed studies 2

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Chong Yit Sean

Coordinator(s)

Dr Chong Yit Sean

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B3702, B5003 or 4414.

Synopsis

Under the guidance of an academic supervisor, this subject allows a student to independently gain in-depth discipline knowledge in a selected area of business and commerce as a foundation to the completion of an honours research project. The student will complete a prescribed list of readings, undertake further independent literature studies, and complete other learning activities and assessments considered appropriate for the selected field of study.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are:

  1. to analyse the literature to determine the research methodology appropriate for the chosen research project
  2. to synthesise the literature to inform the students' research method design and implementation
  3. to critically evaluate the literature and present in written and/or oral form key arguments related to the selection of methods for the research project.

Assessment

Assignments, examinations and written reports appropriate to the selected area of study and associated activities

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BEW4100 - Research project and report

24 points, SCA Band 3, 0.500 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Chong Yit Sean

Coordinator(s)

Dr Chong Yit Sean

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

BEW4000

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B3702, B5003 or 4414.

Synopsis

Students work under the guidance of a supervisor to plan, carry out, and report on an original research project that addresses a significant issues in business; this research project is likely to have substantial practical outcomes or implications; as well, it is hoped that students and supervisors will publish the work in an appropriate journal.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify a business or economics-related issue in the research literature which has either not been adequately researched previously or which requires replication
  2. critically review relevant academic and business research which relates to the identified issue
  3. develop a specific research proposal which has a potential contribution to the business, professional and public policy communities
  4. conduct, analyse, discuss and communicate research outcomes in written and oral form in a professional manner.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload equals 576 hours per semester

See also Unit timetable information


BEX4130 - Asset liability management

0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

To be advised.

Coordinator(s)

To be advised.

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Synopsis

Unit BEX4130 covers the subject material required for Actuaries Institute subject Part IIB Investment and Asset Modelling. The unit gives an introduction into the investment background for Australian financial institutions, especially those offering insurance and related financial products. It then addresses issues in asset liability management. The student is introduced to the characteristics and behaviour of various investment types and the understanding of the relationship between risk and return. Valuation methods for investment types are addressed. Economic and financial theories relevant to investment are studied. The techniques of setting investment objectives for different investment funds are covered. More detailed issues in relation to asset liability management are then addressed, including how investment policy for assets may assist in managing liabilities for financial institutions.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. be able to describe and critically discuss the characteristics and behaviour of different Investment types under different economic conditions, understanding the relationship between risk and return and recognising risk factors which includes issuer default, counterparty failure, systemic liquidity, the collapse of speculative bubbles, shocks to the economic system and cyclical/structural changes
  2. develop an understanding of the methods used for valuation of the common forms of debt, equity, property and derivative securities. In particular students should be aware of the valuation methods and principles, data requirements and sources and the implicit assumptions and limitations of these models
  3. develop an understanding of the application and limitations of the major economic and financial theories relevant to investment, and be able to critically evaluate these theories including the efficient market hypothesis, the capital asset pricing model, multi-factor pricing models and theories from behavioural finance
  4. define appropriate investment objectives based on the liability profile of a fund
  5. specify appropriate investment constraints, based on the liability profile of a fund
  6. identify the characteristics of different types of asset models
  7. critically evaluate the appropriateness of an asset model for a given context
  8. derive consistent asset assumptions for asset models, taking into account historical data, prevailing industry expectations, contemporary investment literature, and other practical considerations such as tax
  9. apply asset assumptions, and the linkages contained within asset models, to real world situations
  10. describe and critically evaluate different approaches to asset allocation.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BEX4650 - Microeconomics

0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Chongwoo Choe

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Synopsis


BEX4670 - Economic development

0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Pushkar Maitra

Coordinator(s)

Professor Pushkar Maitra

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Synopsis


BEX4690 - International trade

0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Christis Tombazos

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Christis Tombazos

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Synopsis

Topics include the gains and costs of trading internationally; static and dynamic welfare effects of protection; the political economy of international trade policy; optimum policies in the presence of market power, uncertainty, and other market imperfections; trade policy instruments; strategies for trade liberalisation including regional trade agreements.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. be able to analyse the effects of international trade on real income and its distribution in various market structures
  2. have a sound understanding of the allocation and welfare effects of commercial policies
  3. possess the skills necessary to evaluate critically contemporary innovations in Australia's trade policies.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BEX5001 - Industry placement

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Paul Collier (MBA)
Dr Ian Walker (all other teaching periods)

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Paul Collier (MBA)
Dr Ian Walker (all other teaching periods)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • MBA Teaching Period 1 2018 (On-campus)
  • MBA Teaching Period 2 2018 (On-campus)
  • MBA Teaching Period 4 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester A 2018 (Off-campus Day)
  • Summer semester B 2018 (On-campus)
  • Winter semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must be granted permission by the Chief Examiner to undertake this unit.

Synopsis

This unit comprises of a community or industry based project. Students will gain skills relevant to their area of business and an increased insight into the business professions.

Outcomes

The learning objective of this unit is to enable the students to undertake, and reflect upon, an industry or organisational learning activity of relevance to their studies.

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BEX5002 - Commercialisation project A

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Buzz Palmer

Coordinator(s)

Professor Buzz Palmer

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester B 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

MGF5011, BFF5904, LAW5388Not offered in 2018 and students must be enrolled in course B6005 and completing the Commercialisation specialisation

Synopsis

This unit is designed to provide students with the opportunity to put theory into practice in a business environment.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop a deeper understanding of the difference between theory and practice
  2. apply theory and ethical values to practice in a supervised environment
  3. evaluate personal learning and personal development in a complex business environment
  4. apply research skills and provide innovative solutions to complex business problems
  5. communicate effectively and perceptively in a business environment.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

The contact hours will be spent engaged in supervised industry-based learning activities as part of their placement. This includes time required to attend regular meetings on campus with their academic supervisor.

See also Unit timetable information

Off-campus attendance requirements

The contact hours will be spent engaged in supervised industry-based learning activities as part of their placement. This includes time required to attend regular meetings on campus with their academic supervisor.


BEX5003 - Commercialisation project B

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Buzz Palmer

Coordinator(s)

Professor Buzz Palmer (First semester)
Professor David Gilbert (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester B 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

MGF5011, BFF5904, LAW5388Not offered in 2018 and students must be enrolled in course B6005 and completing the Commercialisation specialisation

Synopsis

This unit is designed to provide students with the opportunity to put theory into practice in a business environment.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop a deeper understanding of the difference between theory and practice
  2. apply theory and ethical values to practice in a supervised environment
  3. evaluate personal learning and personal development in a complex business environment
  4. apply research skills and provide innovative solutions to complex business problems
  5. communicate effectively and perceptively in a business environment.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

The contact hours will be spent engaged in supervised industry-based learning activities as part of their placement. This includes time required to attend regular meetings on campus with their academic supervisor.

See also Unit timetable information

Off-campus attendance requirements

The contact hours will be spent engaged in supervised industry-based learning activities as part of their placement. This includes time required to attend regular meetings on campus with their academic supervisor.


BEX5006 - Industry project

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Paul Collier (MBA)
Dr Ian Walker (all other teaching periods)

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Paul Collier (MBA)
Dr Ian Walker (all other teaching periods)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • MBA Teaching Period 3 2018 (On-campus)
  • MBA Teaching Period 4 2018 (On-campus)
  • MBA Teaching Period 5 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester A 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester B 2018 (On-campus)
  • Winter semester 2018 (On-campus)

Clayton

  • Summer semester A 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Permission required

Synopsis

This unit is designed to provide students with the opportunity to put theory into practice in a business environment.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. compare and contrast theory and practice
  2. apply theory to practice in a supervised environment
  3. evaluate personal learning and personal development in a complex business environment
  4. analyse complex business problems and to prepare and present innovative solutions.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising independent study under industry and academic supervision.

See also Unit timetable information

Off-campus attendance requirements

As agreed with industry and/or academic supervisor.


BEX5010 - Qualitative business research methods

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Cameron Truong

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

Co-requisites

BEX5000 and Students must be enrolled in course code 4408 Master of Philosophy before undertaking this unit.

Synopsis

This unit provides students with an understanding of the issues underlying the conducting of rigorous and theoretically correct and practically relevant qualitative business related research. Students will be introduced to ways of using different research methods within qualitative research, such as case study research, interviewing, naturalistic observation and text analysis.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. acquire the necessary skills to conduct high quality independent qualitative research related to business administration
  2. acquire a comprehensive grounding in a number of qualitative research methods applicable in different business environments
  3. understand how to collect qualitative data using a variety of research techniques
  4. design probability and non-probability samples for conducting qualitative research
  5. analyse and evaluate qualitative data.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BEX5012 - Industry placement

12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Paul Collier (MBA)
Dr Ian Walker (all other teaching periods)

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Paul Collier (MBA)
Dr Ian Walker (all other teaching periods)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester A 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester B 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must be granted permission by the Chief Examiner to undertake this unit.

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in a Master's program to undertake this unit.

Notes

Students must have completed at least 1 semester of full time equivalent study at Monash before undertaking this unit.

Synopsis

This unit is designed to provide students with the opportunity to put theory into practice in a business environment.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop a deeper understanding of the difference between theory and practice
  2. apply theory and ethical values to practice in a supervised environment
  3. evaluate personal learning and personal development in a complex business environment
  4. apply research skills and provide innovative solutions to complex business problems
  5. communicate effectively and perceptively in a business environment.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 288 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average six/eight hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Off-campus attendance requirements

The contact hours will be spent engaged in supervised industry-based learning activities as part of their placement. This includes time required to attend regular meetings on campus with their academic supervisor.


BEX5020 - Research thesis proposal

12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

Students must have achieved an average mark of 70 (D) in BEX5000 and BEX5010 before undertaking this unit.

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 3194.

Synopsis

Students will prepare a research proposal in a discipline area approved by the course coordinator. Students will, with the assistance of a research mentor, select a research topic and prepare a proposal for their MPhil thesis consisting of a literature review, theory and hypothesis development, an outline of the research methods to be applied and the data requirements.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. acquire knowledge of the planning phases of a research project including topic selection
  2. prepare a literature review relating to the topic that demonstrates a breadth of reading and an analysis of the academic papers in terms of both progressive development of theories and, where existing, conflict of views
  3. develop research questions and/or hypotheses for the study, which flow from the literature review
  4. identify and discuss the methodology to be employed for the testing of the research questions and/or hypotheses including the data requirements, types of data collection
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills in individual and/or group activities dealing with research methods.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 288 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average six/eight hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BEX5110 - Special reading unit 2

0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Farshid Vahid-Araghi

Coordinator(s)

Professor Farshid Vahid-Araghi

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Synopsis


BEX5112 - Industry project

12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Paul Collier (MBA)
Dr Ian Walker (all other teaching periods)

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Paul Collier (MBA)
Dr Ian Walker (all other teaching periods)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • MBA Teaching Period 3 2018 (On-campus)
  • MBA Teaching Period 4 2018 (On-campus)
  • MBA Teaching Period 5 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester A 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester B 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Permission required

Synopsis

This unit is designed to provide students with the opportunity to put theory into practice in a business environment.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. compare and contrast theory and practice
  2. apply theory to practice in a supervised environment
  3. evaluate personal learning and personal development in a complex business environment
  4. analyse complex business problems and to prepare and present innovative solutions.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 288 hours per semester typically comprising independent study under industry and academic supervision.

See also Unit timetable information

Off-campus attendance requirements

As agreed with industry and/or academic supervisor.


BEX5200 - Climate change and carbon management strategies

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Jessica Fritze

Coordinator(s)

Ms Jessica Fritze

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

BFF5901, AFF9012

Synopsis

This unit provides an introduction to the business, regulatory and economic perspectives of climate change mitigation. It investigates how market and regulatory initiatives to mitigate greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions by carbon pricing mechanisms can be managed by liable businesses and other stakeholders, by examining the following:climate change science; economic impacts of climate change; international initiatives to mitigate GHG emissions; investment in low-emissions technologies; carbon pricing regulatory regimes and market trading mechanisms; measurement of business carbon footprint; industry sector interactions with carbon markets and regulatory regimes; accounting issues arising from pricing GHG emissions.

Outcomes

The learning objectives associated with this unit are to:

  1. acquire an understanding of climate change mitigation with respect to political, environmental, regulatory and economic impacts on business in the Australian and global context
  2. acquire a working knowledge of the main market and regulatory mechanisms for mitigating GHG emissions
  3. evaluate the supply and demand side aspects of industries that are the principal GHG emitters and their capacity to mitigate such emissions
  4. assess the likely strategies that can be employed by businesses to comply with, and manage, carbon pricing obligations at least cost
  5. acquire practical research skills including the ability to work in groups of diverse cultural and social backgrounds and investigate academic, institutional and public media sources
  6. demonstrate the ability to evaluate, formulate, and articulate justifiable business strategies and tactics to address the impacts of market and regulatory changes arising from climate change in a summative assessment.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BEX5300 - Applied financial econometrics

0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Xibin Zhang

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Xibin Zhang

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Second semester 2018 (Evening)

Synopsis

Illustrates how statistical and econometric methods can be applied to financial data to solve problems arising in financial markets. Also covers modelling, estimating and testing the volatility of financial markets. Practical examples will be discussed in lectures to enhance the understanding of analysing financial data using the statistical and econometric tools taught in this unit. An integral component will be the completion of a number of minor research projects enabling students to develop the necessary skills.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify the issues involved when modelling the dynamics of financial markets
  2. estimate volatility models using econometrics software
  3. critically evaluate the financial econometrics literature
  4. explain the financial market applications of the non linear models developed
  5. undertake a research project that applies the techniques and analysis to a financial market of interest.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BEX5410 - Bayesian Time Series Econometrics

0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Gael Martin

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Synopsis

This unit introduces students to both foundational and methodological aspects of Bayesian econometrics. Topics covered include a review of the philosophical and probabilistic foundations of Bayesian inference; the contrast between the Bayesian and frequentist (or classical) statistical paradigms; the use of prior information via the specification of objective, Jeffreys and subjective prior distributions; Bayesian linear regression; the use of simulation techniques in Bayesian inference, including Markov chain Monte Carlo algorithms; Bayesian analysis of Gaussian and non-Gaussian time series econometric models, including state space models; and the Kalman filter as a Bayesian updating rule.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. appreciate the importance of Bayesian statistical techniques in econometric research and understand the differences between the Bayesian and frequentist statistical paradigms
  2. acquire the skills necessary to derive Bayesian results analytically, in simple models
  3. demonstrate an understanding of simulation methods and be able to implement these methods in empirically realistic econometric models
  4. understand the Kalman filter and its role in Bayesian inference in linear time series models.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BEX5411 - Creativity and entrepreneurship

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Buzz Palmer

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have completed 48 credit points.

Synopsis

We now live in an age where entrepreneurs are key to developing the next generation of innovative game-changing companies and driving commercial value. The business landscape over the coming decades will embrace and require innovation, creativity and entrepreneurship with the survival contingent on the business leaders of tomorrow. This unit brings together the principles required to succeed in a competitive innovation-led world while building a solid foundation of application for commercial exploration of new ideas.

In this unit, with an understanding of the entrepreneurial mindset, students will embark upon a journey of creating innovative business ideas and positioning them for market. A real world project will project will provide students with a step-by-step systematic road-map approach to hone their business skills and consolidated learning for crisp execution of a business venture.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are:

  1. to gain an understanding of creativity and sources of innovation
  2. to develop an understanding of intellectual property
  3. to gain an understanding of Venture funding
  4. development and demonstration of entrepreneurial mindset
  5. development and demonstration of entrepreneurial creativity
  6. development and delivery of business case
  7. development and demonstration of pitching competency.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires an average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BEX5463 - Advanced buyer behaviour

0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Harmen Oppewal

Coordinator(s)

Professor Harmen Oppewal

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus split block of classes)

Prohibitions

MKF5463

Synopsis


BEX5479 - Project evaluation

0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Paulo Santos

Coordinator(s)

Dr Paulo Santos

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Synopsis


BEX5650 - Microeconomic theory

0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Jeffrey LaFrance

Coordinator(s)

Professor Jeffrey LaFrance

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course code 3194 to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions

ECC5650

Synopsis

Neoclassical theories of demand, supply, and equilibrium at a level that permits rigorous analysis. Introduction to game theory. Topics include the existence theorem of utility functions, properties of demand and supply functions, existence and Pareto optimality of competitive equilibrium, and various equilibrium concepts of non-cooperative games.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. deepen understanding of microeconomic analysis acquired during undergraduate training
  2. undertake rigorous analysis of microeconomic issues, including the determinants of relative prices and their effects on resource allocation
  3. learn some more advanced analyses going beyond the traditional model and taking account of some real-world complications
  4. acquire proficiency in handling optimisation problems and have a basic understanding of general equilibrium analysis.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload equals 144 hours per semester.

See also Unit timetable information


BEX5660 - Macroeconomic theory

0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Qingyuan Du

Coordinator(s)

Dr Qingyuan Du

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course code 3194 to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions

ECC5660

Synopsis

Underpinnings of modern macroeconomics basic to models of growth and cyclical fluctuations as well as models of monetary and fiscal policies. Topics include neoclassical and endogenous growth theories; overlapping generations models with and without money; policy ineffectiveness issues; equilibrium business cycle as well as traditional Keynesian models of fluctuations; and models of incomplete nominal adjustment such as those of New-Keynesian and the Lucas-Supply variety.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the basic theoretical structures common to modern dynamic macroeconomics. In particular, critical analysis of the economic reasons underlying the formation of policy and movements of various macro-aggregates
  2. understand the key determinants affecting economic growth and fluctuations
  3. enhance understanding of the basic theoretical approaches employed in specialist fields such as international economics, economic development/growth, applied general equilibrium and financial economics.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload equals 144 hours per semester.

See also Unit timetable information


BEX5707 - Business insights from data analysis

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Robert Brooks

Coordinator(s)

Professor Robert Brooks

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Winter semester 2018 (On-campus block of classes)

Prerequisites

Students must be granted permission by the Chief Examiner to undertake this unit.

Synopsis

The first objective of this unit is for students to understand how data analysis techniques can produce insights to address a business problem. The second objective is for students to explore the journal and case literature on this topic in the setting of the sports industry. An applied approach will be taken involving some field visits. The unit will be delivered at a time to enable Monash Business School students drawn from multiple programs to interact with exchange and study abroad students from partner universities.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop an understanding of how to interpret data analysis and draw relevant insights in a business context
  2. enhance report writing skills by developing an understanding of the process of preparing a business report based on insight gained from data analysis
  3. enhance communication, interpersonal, problem solving and critical thinking capabilities
  4. develop capabilities to be future generators of sustainable economic, social and environmental value for business.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BEX5722 - Engaging with international business

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Michaela Rankin

Coordinator(s)

Professor Michaela Rankin

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Summer semester B 2018 (On-campus)
  • Winter semester 2018 (On-campus)

Sri Lanka

  • Summer semester B 2018 (On-campus)

United States of America

  • Summer semester B 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must be granted permission by the Chief Examiner to undertake this unit.

Synopsis

This unit requires students to examine a broad range of social, cultural, legal and political issues that can impact on the strategy and operations of businesses operating in a global business environment. Through the use of readings, case studies, and an analysis of current events students are confronted with some specific challenges of doing business in a global context. This unit focuses on developing skills, addressing various global issues and how they affect business, as well as aspects of global citizenship, cultural sensitivity and effective teamwork.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. recognise issues affecting businesses operating in a global context
  2. develop and present strategic responses to specific issues affecting businesses operating in a global context with due consideration to sustainable, responsible and ethical business practices
  3. acquire team skills including team leadership, collaboration, problem-solving, decision-making, communication and presentation skills
  4. develop reflective practice skills in relation to individual learning.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BEX5724 - Engaging with international business

12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Michaela Rankin

Coordinator(s)

Professor Michaela Rankin

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Summer semester B 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Permission required. Students must be participating in an approved program of advanced study.

Synopsis

This unit requires students to examine a broad range of social, cultural, legal and political issues that can impact on the strategy and operations of businesses operating in a global business environment. Through the use of readings, case studies, and an analysis of current events students are confronted with some specific challenges of doing business in a global context. This unit focuses on developing skills, addressing various global issues and how they affect business, as well as aspects of global citizenship, cultural sensitivity and effective teamwork.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. recognise issues affecting businesses operating in a global context
  2. develop and present strategic responses to specific issues affecting businesses operating in a global context with due consideration to sustainable, responsible and ethical business practices
  3. acquire team skills including team leadership, collaboration, problem-solving, decision-making, communication and presentation skills
  4. develop reflective practice skills in relation to individual learning.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 288 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BEX5832 - European business and society

12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Paul Kalfadellis

Coordinator(s)

Dr Paul Kalfadellis

Unit guides

Offered

Prato

  • Summer semester A 2018 (On-campus block of classes)

Synopsis

European business and society is an intensive two week unit taught in Europe. One week is taught at the Monash Prato Centre in Italy and the second week incorporates presentations/lectures in organisational visits in Europe. The unit enables students to better understand the political, economic and social environment in which business operates in Europe. Specifically the unit considers the establishment and functioning of the European Union (EU) and its relationship with its member states as well as providing students with an awareness of the key debates, issues and on-going challenges facing Europe and the European Union. These challenges and their implications for business/management policy and practice in Europe, underpin the essence of this unit.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. increase students awareness and understanding of Europe and the European Union
  2. examine the nature of the forces in the European environment (e.g. political, economic, legal, social and cultural) and their impact upon business
  3. research and critically analyse the challenges facing Europe and understand their implications for policy and practice in business and society
  4. gain knowledge from organisational visits in order to develop insights that can be applied as future generators of sustainable economic, social and environmental value for business and society.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload for this unit is 288 hours per semester. This comprises of a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning (including site visits) and peer directed learning.

See also Unit timetable information


BEX5850 - Mathematical economic theory

0 points, SCA Band 2, 0.000 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Birendra Rai

Coordinator(s)

Dr Birendra Rai

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

ECC5850

Synopsis

Mathematical preliminaries; static optimisation theory; introduction to calculus of variations and optimal control theory; necessary and sufficient conditions; investment theory: costs of adjustment, neoclassical, Q theory; consumption theory; use of duality theory; growth models; Hamilton Jacobi theory; discrete time stochastic models; selected current applications.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the theories of static optimisation, including the first and second order conditions for the multi-dimensional case
  2. analyse mathematically how changes in the economic environment affect economic agents' optimal decisions
  3. analyse dynamic optimisation problems faced by economic agents
  4. develop students' ability to access frontier research in economics that routinely makes use of many mathematical concepts in optimisation theories.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload equals 144 hours per semester.

See also Unit timetable information


BEX5870 - Advanced health economics

0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Sonja Kassenboehmer

Coordinator(s)

Dr Sonja Kassenboehmer

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Synopsis

The achievement of efficiency in the health sector. Alternative approaches to allocative efficiency, recent developments in the management of the market, and efficiency in hospitals. Aspects of evaluation techniques including recent developments in quality of life measurement, statistical issues, and modelling techniques.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. undertake sound research in health economics
  2. have knowledge of the major issues in health economics and the capacity to judge the importance of these issues
  3. function as independent professional health economist.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BEX5900 - Microeconomics

0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Anmol Ratan (First semester)
Dr Xiaodong Fan (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Anmol Ratan (First semester)
Dr Xiaodong Fan (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

ECC2000, ETC2000

Synopsis

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload equals 144 hours per semester.

See also Unit timetable information


BEX5950 - Business statistics

0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Mrs Charanjit Kaur

Coordinator(s)

Mrs Charanjit Kaur

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Synopsis

Students will learn to use basic statistical techniques and apply them to problems in accounting, finance, management, marketing, and business in general. Students should also be able to effectively communicate the results of their analyses. This unit covers descriptive statistics for revealing the information contained in data; probability as a tool for dealing with uncertainty; probability distributions to model business behaviour; confidence interval estimation and hypothesis testing techniques for single populations; analysis of relationships between variables using simple linear regression; and simple tools for forecasting time series data. Applications to critical analysis of business and economic data will be emphasised. Excel software will be used.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. interpret business data using descriptive statistics techniques, including the use of Excel spreadsheet functions
  2. apply simple concepts of probability and probability distributions to problems in business decision-making
  3. describe the role of statistical inference and apply inference methods to single populations
  4. interpret and evaluate relationships between variables for business decision-making, using the concept of correlation and simple linear regression
  5. apply suitable statistical techniques for describing and forecasting time series data
  6. develop the skills for critical analysis of statistical reporting and inference.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BEX5973 - Economic evaluation in health care

0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Rachel Knott

Coordinator(s)

Dr Rachel Knott

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

Prohibitions

ECX9730

Synopsis

This unit introduces students to techniques of microeconomic appraisal in the evaluation of health care programs. It considers conceptual and methodological issues, as well as the practical conduct, and review, of such studies and their use in priority setting within the health care sector. The application of decision rules for economic efficiency in health program evaluation and their influence on policy decisions are introduced.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand techniques used for microeconomic appraisal in the evaluation of health care programs
  2. understand conceptual and methodological issues arising in the economic appraisal of health care programs
  3. understand conduct and review of economic evaluation in the health care sector
  4. understand application of results from economic evaluation to achieving broader priority setting goals within the health care sector.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 70% + Examination: 30%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BEX5975 - Principles of health economics for developing countries

0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Duncan Mortimer

Unit guides

Offered

Alfred Hospital

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus block of classes)

Synopsis


BEX6011 - Empirical asset pricing

0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Stephen Brown

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Synopsis

The objective of this unit is to introduce doctoral candidates to current research issues and empirical tools in asset pricing. This unit will cover research papers in asset pricing. It will also provide students with the skills and proficiency to empirically conduct asset pricing research.


BEX6012 - Corporate financial management

0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Christianus Veld

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Synopsis

This unit introduces doctoral candidates to current research issues and empirical tools in corporate finance and corporate governance. This unit will cover theoretical and empirical papers in corporate finance and corporate governance and will benefit students interested in writing their thesis in corporate finance or corporate governance.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. acquire knowledge of contemporary issues in corporate finance and governance
  2. critically evaluate current theoretical and empirical research in corporate finance and governance
  3. develop analytical skills via understanding the intuition and logic behind theoretical and empirical research in corporate finance and governance
  4. effectively convey ideas in writing and speech
  5. demonstrate comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in this course.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 70% + Examination: 30%

Workload requirements

36 hours per semester of formal class contact

See also Unit timetable information


BEX6013 - Issues in financial institutions

0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Silvio Contessi

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must be enrolled in the 0029 Doctor of Philosophy before undertaking this unit.

Synopsis

This unit introduces doctoral candidates to the current research issues and empirical tools in the area of banking. This unit will cover theoretical and empirical papers as well as introduce students to banking related databases and the main methodology required to conduct high-level banking research.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. acquire knowledge of contemporary issues in financial institution research
  2. critically evaluate current theoretical and empirical research in financial institution research
  3. develop analytical skills via understanding the intuition and logic behind theoretical and empirical research in financial institution research
  4. effectively convey ideas in writing and speech
  5. demonstrate comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in this course

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 70% + Examination: 30%


BEX6014 - Contemporary issues in finance

0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Yulia Veld-Merkoulova

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Yulia Veld-Merkoulova

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Synopsis

The objective of this unit is to teach doctoral students topics that are on the forefront of the academic literature. Possible topics include behavioural finance, which combines elements of finance and psychology into a new field that has gained a lot of importance in recent times. Other topics that may be studied include those that have gained in importance in the top journals. The unit will provide an in-depth study of research papers and will also provide students with the skills necessary to conduct finance research.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop technical proficiency on topics covered in the unit in order to be able to initiate and pursue PhD level research
  2. enhance the capability of developing an original research topic
  3. be in a position to undertake research in behavioural finance (or any other topic covered in the course) and related fields.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BEX6100 - Advanced quantitative research methods

0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Felix Mavondo

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Term 4 2018 (On-campus block of classes)

Malaysia

  • Term 4 2018 (On-campus block of classes)

Co-requisites

BEX6300 and students must be enrolled in the 0029 Doctor of Philosophy or 3194 Master of Philosophy before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

DBA6000

Synopsis

The unit focuses on advanced quantitative research methods used in studying accounting, business, finance, management, marketing, and organisational analysis. Topics to be covered include analytic techniques used for experimental, quasi-experimental, and non experimental research designs. The unit focuses on topics include multivariate techniques which deal with cross-sectional, panel, and time-series data. For example, topics include various multivariate ANOVA techniques, regression procedures, discrete choice models, factor analysis, cluster analysis, structural and simultaneous equation modelling, and time-series analysis techniques. Computer sessions will provide students with the opportunity to apply their classroom learning to various business and management cases.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop the necessary quantitative skills to conduct high quality independent research relevant to their discipline
  2. develop a comprehensive grounding in a number of quantitative methods of data production and analysis
  3. consider and evaluate data collection instruments, sampling strategies and the appropriateness of various types of data for research purposes
  4. assess research designs including experimental design, observational studies, case studies, longitudinal analysis and cross-sectional analysis
  5. conduct quantitative data analysis of a suitable multivariate data set through a practical research activity
  6. develop good communication skills by presenting a defence and/or critique of different methodological positions and perspectives.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

36 hours per semester (split-block mode) of formal class contact.

See also Unit timetable information


BEX6200 - Advanced qualitative research methods

0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Jan Brace-Govan (Caulfield)
Professor Christina Lee Kwai Choi (Malaysia)

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Jan Brace-Govan (Caulfield)
Professor Christina Lee Kwai Choi (Malaysia)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Term 3 2018 (On-campus block of classes)

Malaysia

  • Term 3 2018 (On-campus block of classes)

Co-requisites

BEX6300 and students must be enrolled in the 0029 Doctor of Philosophy or 3194 Master of Philosophy before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

DBA6010

Synopsis

The unit will provide HDR students with the requisite knowledge and skills in qualitative research methodology to enable them to design and execute a PhD research project. The unit will review and explain various qualitative research methods with the aim of critically evaluating the paradigmatic underpinnings of, for example, interpretivist, phenomenological and postmodern theories as they pertain to research design and the collection and analysis of data. Topics to be covered include data gathering techniques such as interviews, content analysis, fieldwork and observation and analysis procedures such as constant comparative analysis. The unit will also provide students with the opportunity to report findings through written and oral presentation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. acquire skills to design qualitative research studies
  2. acquire skills to conduct high quality independent qualitative research
  3. consider and evaluate data collection instruments, and sampling strategies for a qualitative research purpose
  4. assess research design across a range of qualitative research strategies
  5. conduct a qualitative research project and report in an appropriate discursive style.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

36 hours per semester (split-block mode) of formal class contact.

See also Unit timetable information


BEX6300 - Philosophy of research

0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Julie Wolfram Cox

Coordinator(s)

Professor Julie Wolfram Cox

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Term 2 2018 (On-campus block of classes)

Malaysia

  • Term 2 2018 (On-campus block of classes)

Co-requisites

BEX6100 or BEX6200 and students must be enrolled in the 0029 Doctor of Philosophy or 3194 Master of Philosophy before undertaking this unit.

Synopsis

This unit discusses the fundamental epistemological premises on which HDR research may be developed. It explores ways of formulating research question(s) and hypotheses, and identifies assumptions and theories that are relevant in the development of a conceptual framework for research. The topics discussed will cover principles of the scientific method, key epistemological perspectives in the social sciences (e.g. positivism, interpretivism, social constructivism, hermeneutics, functionalism, critical theory) and argument analysis (e.g. avoiding fallacies in scientific reasoning, evaluating and constructing sound arguments). These discussions will clarify the theoretical and practical underpinnings of research design, inform subsequent analyses of how to select different research methods (qualitative, quantitative, mixed), and illustrate key issues associated with main argument development in a HDR thesis. Finally, the unit will examine ways of presenting a compelling theoretical and practical case for the epistemological significance of a HDR project, and examine how this approach could increase the likelihood of successful publication of research results.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. enhance awareness of the multiple epistemological and ontological perspectives that underpin research at HDR level
  2. increase understanding of the principles involved in producing sound complex arguments as required in writing a HDR thesis
  3. consider and evaluate research papers presented in the research seminar series
  4. evaluate the literature, philosophical traditions, methods and problems associated with several topics
  5. apply knowledge of ontological, epistemological, methodological and procedural assumptions to the preparation of papers that demonstrate an advanced understanding of the assumptions, methodology, techniques and results of research.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

36 hours per semester (split-block mode) of formal class contact.

See also Unit timetable information


BEX6400 - Empirical methods for economic analysis

0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Not offered in 2018

Synopsis


BEX6500 - Statistical inference

0 points, SCA Band 2, 0.000 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Mervyn Silvapulle

Coordinator(s)

Professor Mervyn Silvapulle

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must be enrolled in either the 3194 Master of Philosophy or the 0029 Doctor of Philosophy to enrol in this unit.

Synopsis

This unit provides an introduction to probability theory and statistical inference for graduate studies in econometrics and business statistics and related fields. It is intended to prepare research students for a range of other units in econometrics and business statistics. The first part will cover basic probability theory and the second half will be concerned with aspects of statistical inference. Some prior exposure to the topics to at least the advanced undergraduate level will be assumed. This unit is designed for PhD students who intend to write a thesis in econometrics or business statistics. It is not intended for PhD students in other disciplines who need to learn some basic quantitative techniques for the empirical section of their dissertations, although students from other departments who are interested in more advanced methods may wish to take this unit

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. ensure that students have the necessary familiarity with the essentials of probability theory and statistical inference to be able to read graduate level books and journal articles in econometrics and business statistics
  2. minimise rote learning and to encourage students to provide justification to econometric and statistical ideas and to derive results from first principles. To this end, students need to know the basic definitions, concepts and the chain of arguments on which the econometric and statistical theory is built.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

36 hours per semester of formal class contact.

See also Unit timetable information


BEX6510 - Foundations of econometrics

0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Donald Poskitt

Coordinator(s)

Professor Donald Poskitt

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have successfully completed ETX6500 or BEX6500 to enrol in this unit.

Synopsis

This unit provides a rigorous treatment of core methods of econometric estimation and inference in a single and also multiple equation settings. While students are encouraged to look at every problem from several views (informal, algebraic, geometric, etc.), a large emphasis is placed on constructing formal arguments, and the importance of clear notation, definitions, assumptions and deductive arguments is emphasised. Formal lectures and references to graduate level textbooks are provided, and students are also assigned and encouraged to read some classic journal articles. This unit is designed for PhD students who intend to write a thesis in econometrics or business statistics. It is not intended for PhD students in other disciplines who need to learn some quantitative techniques for the empirical section of their dissertations, although students from other departments who are interested in more advanced methods may wish to take this unit.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. ensure PhD candidates master the core elements of econometrics to be able to generalise and apply these principles to research questions
  2. encourage and train PhD students to grind through complex scholarly journal articles and harvest the elements needed to conduct research
  3. train PhD students in developing a habit of using clear notation and clear arguments in research work.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

36 hours per semester of formal class contact.

See also Unit timetable information


BEX6600 - Research topics in advanced microeconomics

0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Not offered in 2018

Synopsis


BEX6650 - Research topics in advanced microeconomics

0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Birendra Rai

Coordinator(s)

Dr Birendra Rai

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students will be required to achieve a mark of at least 70% in all mandatory 6000 level course work which needs to be completed prior to confirmation.

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 0029.

Prohibitions

ECC6650

Synopsis

Advanced topics in microeconomics and current research and policy issues. Topics may include an in-depth study of general equilibrium, mesoeconomics, new classical economics of specialisation, transaction costs, and inframarginal analysis, principal agent models and incentive regulation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. possess technical proficiency to initiate and pursue PhD level research
  2. be capable of developing an original research topic
  3. be in a position to undertake research in microeconomics and related fields.

Assessment

Option 1: Within semester assessment: 100%

Option 2: Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

3 hours per week

See also Unit timetable information


BEX6660 - Research topics in advanced macroeconomics

0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Michelle Teresita Rendall

Coordinator(s)

Dr Michelle Teresita Rendall

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students will be required to achieve a mark of at least 70% in all mandatory 6000 level coursework which needs to be completed prior to confirmation.

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 0029.

Prohibitions

ECC6660Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

Advanced topics in macroeconomics, current research and policy issues. The topics may include an in-depth study of consumption, investment, inflation and monetary policy, unemployment, and empirical applications.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. possess technical proficiency to initiate and pursue PhD level research
  2. be capable of developing an original research topic
  3. be in a position to undertake research in macroeconomics and related fields.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%


BEX6700 - Research paper

0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Not offered in 2018

Synopsis


BEX6800 - Advanced mathematical economic theory

0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Not offered in 2018

Synopsis


BEX6990 - Research strategies and methods in business law

0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Carolyn Sutherland

Coordinator(s)

Professor Carolyn Sutherland

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus block of classes)

Prerequisites

Students will be required to achieve a mark of at least 70% in all mandatory 6000 level coursework units which need to be completed prior to confirmation.

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 0029.

Synopsis

This unit provides students with the skill and proficiency to conduct HDR research in business law. The aim of the unit is to assist students to develop research capabilities in the following areas: formulating research questions for legal problems; selecting a research purpose and theoretical perspective; approaches to the literature review; developing complex arguments; organising and structuring content in a law thesis; advanced writing techniques; ethical issues that arise in legal research; and presenting and publishing research in business law. The unit will also guide students to understand and evaluate legal research perspectives and methodologies that suit different types of research problems in business law. These will include traditional doctrinal approaches; comparative legal methods; legal realist, law in action and critical legal studies perspectives; legal history and empirical legal methods.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. increase understanding of the practical challenges that arise in business law research
  2. translate a business law problem into a research problem and research questions and devise an effective research strategy
  3. develop capabilities in producing complex and coherent arguments as required for a thesis in business law
  4. apply relevant theories and methodologies to research problems in business law.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

72 hours per semester of formal class contact, plus an additional 168 hours of private study. Also see unit timetable informationunit timetable information (http://www.monash.edu.au/timetables/).

See also Unit timetable information


BFC5050 - Global banking institutions and issues

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Piyadasa Edirisuriya

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (Evening)

Prohibitions

AFF5050 and BFF5050.

Synopsis

Topics include: history of international banking; international financial system and its major players; regulations and interaction with public policy; world debt; foreign exchange markets; lending and investment criteria; and the Australian international banking sector.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop skills in understanding of the role of international banking within the international financial, derivatives and regulatory markets
  2. develop an international banking perspective by contrasting different banking and finance systems in other countries
  3. develop an ability to work in a team by completing a group report that requires a written synthesis of the contributions of team members and presentation of the report in the class
  4. develop oral presentation skills by participation in discussions during tutorials
  5. develop academic skills by preparing an individual assignment based on empirical studies that requires research using the web and print reference materials
  6. demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BFC5050.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFC5130 - Case studies and research in banking and finance

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Abu Zafar Shahriar (First semester)
Professor Michael Skully (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Abu Zafar Shahriar (First semester)
Professor Michael Skully (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have completed 72 credit points.

Prohibitions

BFF5130

Synopsis

This unit aims to combine the knowledge students have achieved in their Master of Banking and Finance studies. In addition, the unit introduces a significant research component and assignment to ensure students are familiar with the scientific research method, are able to analyse research papers and understand the aim of research in contributing to theoretical concepts in finance and banking.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate the ability to independently and critically investigate both quantitative and qualitative banking and finance problems, applying and consolidating prior learning to propose solutions
  2. evaluate and weigh information so as to make judgements and arrive at decisions about ethics in business
  3. develop applied research skills on an individual basis and apply these skills to a relevant research assignment
  4. demonstrate the ability to synthesise conclusions and communicate analysis in a concise business manner.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFC5260 - Treasury and financial markets

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Wayne Huf

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students who have not passed BFC5926 or equivalent must be granted permission by the Chief Examiner to undertake this unit.

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B6001, B6003 or B6004.

Prohibitions

BFF5260Not offered in 2018, AFF5260

Synopsis

This unit will combine classroom teaching and direct experiential learning in financial markets covering topics that may include market participants, treasury operations, market structures, dealer markets, liquidity and price formation. This unit is taught in the simulated trading and research laboratory (STARLab). It is a specialist, practically oriented unit where attendance is compulsory as assessment is based on classroom activities. An understanding of financial prices, returns and volatility is required.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. formulate portfolio management decisions
  2. compare and contrast differences between various market structures
  3. acquire an in-depth understanding of economic concepts such as market efficiency, performance evaluation and market structure regulation
  4. plan, verify and settle transactions completed in STARLab
  5. develop, implement, analyse and manage strategies in financial markets
  6. plan, organise and report on all activities involved in STARLab
  7. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with treasury and financial markets.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFC5280 - Institutional asset and liability management

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Shrimal Perera

Coordinator(s)

Dr Shrimal Perera

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

BFC5926

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B6001, B6003 or B6004.

Prohibitions

BFF5280Not offered in 2018, AFF5280

Synopsis

Topics include managing interest rate risk; foreign exchange risk; liquidity risk and the cash flow cycle; credit risk; capital risk; debt and investment risk and managing the risk of derivative products.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop critical skills in understanding, analysing and applying concepts and models such as VAR Model, RAROC Model, Z-score etc. which provide assistance for managing bank's assets and liability risks
  2. develop an understanding of the application of regulatory measures taken by Reserve bank of Australia , APRA and BIS for improvement of risk management in the banking industry
  3. explain the link between theory and real world situation in the areas of market risk, interest rate risks, foreign exchange risks, credit risks, liquidity risks and operation risk faced by banks
  4. develop writing and presentation skills by requiring the submission of group assignments relating to existing practices followed by the banks
  5. develop an ability to work independently by requiring presentation of tutorials answers relating to risk management by the financial institutions
  6. demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BFC5280.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFC5380 - Credit risk modelling

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Jean-Pierre Fenech

Coordinator(s)

Dr Jean-Pierre Fenech

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed AFF9140, BFF5914, ETF5930 or ETF9300 before undertaking this unit.

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B6003 or B6004 to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions

AFF5380 and BFF5380

Synopsis

This unit develops knowledge and improves skills in credit risk modelling by using market information to predict defaulted firms. The topics discussed will provide an understanding of their relative merits, the issues involved in their implementation and their use in the pricing and risk management of credit risk. This unit assists practitioners and students alike to understand better the use of credit risk models and moves them away from the proverbial Black Box scenario.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop credit risk modelling using Altman and Ohlson models
  2. develop an understanding of credit risk modelling approaches
  3. analyse the Merton structural model and implications for credit analysis
  4. analyse the term structure of credit spreads and probabilities of default
  5. analyse implications of alternative ways to model recovery
  6. develop correlations between default rates and recovery
  7. develop copula based approach to modelling default dependence
  8. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with credit risk modelling and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BFC5380.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFC5913 - Financial planning

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Jimmy Feng

Coordinator(s)

Dr Jimmy Feng

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (Evening)

Prohibitions

AFC3440, BFC3440, AFF3111, BFF3111, BFF5913 and AFF9130.

Synopsis

This unit provides an introduction to financial planning. Topics include: the legislative and economic environment; the role of financial service advisers; licensing and disclosure; investment strategies, products, and related taxation implications, with particular reference to securities and managed investments; social security; superannuation, pensions and other retirement issues; estate planning; and the financial planning process.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe financial planning activities and legal compliance requirements for financial planners
  2. develop specialist skills required for interaction with financial planning clients; this will recognise an ethical dimension to the giving of financial planning advice
  3. demonstrate knowledge of the Australian and global investment environments, together with specialist knowledge in the areas of superannuation, financial planning, securities and managed investments
  4. evaluate clients' financial objectives and prepare appropriate financial plans
  5. demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the nature of financial planning and its design for individual clients.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFC5914 - Bank lending

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Jean-Pierre Fenech (First semester)
Dr Kym Brown (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Jean-Pierre Fenech (First semester)
Dr Kym Brown (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

BFC5926

Prohibitions

BFF5914, AFF9140

Synopsis

Topics include the credit risk assessment process; accounting fundamentals; reading financial statements (including ratio analysis); using budgeted financial statements (including breakeven analysis, what-if analysis and variance analysis); creative accounting; technical accounting update; business structures; current issues in insolvency and loan security.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop an understanding of the basic principles governing bank lending
  2. develop an understanding of the framework within which bank lending decisions are made
  3. develop an understanding of the analysis of financial statement of a company
  4. develop analytical skills with regard to the management of credit risk and its measurement techniques
  5. develop an understanding of new bank lending product development and its marketing
  6. demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BFC5914.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFC5915 - Options, futures and risk management

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Zhe An (First semester)
Dr Li Ge (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Zhe An (First semester)
Dr Li Ge (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

BFC5935

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B5001, B6001, B6003, B6004, B6005 or B6015.

Prohibitions

BFF5915

Synopsis

This unit examines how options and futures can be used for hedging risk in the process of risk management. Several aspects of risk management are examined, including the reasons why investors indulge in this activity, how value is created via risk management, and the firm-wide approach to risk management (given that any firm is exposed to a wide variety of risks). Once the importance of risk management has been established, emphasis turns to the use of derivatives (futures and options) to manage risk. To understand how they are used to manage risk, the unit also considers the characteristics and pricing of these instruments, including some exotic versions.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine the financial risk management function and its evolution in the corporate world
  2. understand the characteristics of futures and options markets and be able to apply these instruments so as to hedge the risk exposure of the firm
  3. design appropriate risk management strategies using options and futures for hedging and speculation
  4. demonstrate effective research skills to produce a professional quality business report recommending a solution to a risk management problem
  5. demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of derivative instruments in financial markets, both the mechanism of their operation and their application in hedging risk exposures.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFC5916 - International banking

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Minh Do (First semester)
Dr Piyadasa Edirisuriya (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Minh Do (First semester)
Dr Piyadasa Edirisuriya (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

BFF5916, AFF9160

Synopsis

Topics include the latest international banking regulatory concerns, geographic focus of banking in Europe, Asia and less developed economies; the European monetary system; Euromarkets; trade finance and trade facilitation agencies; country risk analysis.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse characteristics of international banking and consider the rational of domestic banks to expand overseas by researching and applying topics that are generally outside the typical finance undergraduate curriculum
  2. develop an understanding of the financial structure of countries and apply that understanding to a particular country to report potential international banking opportunities based on a country's current financial structure
  3. research, evaluate and report on a current international banking issue
  4. demonstrate an awareness of the complex and changing nature of Euro zone banking
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with international banking and finance and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BFC5916.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFC5925 - Financial management theory

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Ying Xia (First semester)
Dr Emma Zhang (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Ying Xia (First semester)
Dr Emma Zhang (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (Evening)
  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B5001, B6001, B6003, B6004, B6005 or B6015.

Prohibitions

BFF5925

Synopsis

Topics include review of foundations of finance; financial mathematics and pricing of financial instruments; valuation and the management of long term investment and financial leverage; and theory of capital structure and dividend policy.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the foundations of finance and be able to apply pricing models to the valuation of equity and debt instruments in global markets
  2. evaluate investment proposals using capital budgeting techniques
  3. formulate capital structure and dividend policies consistent with entities' objectives
  4. develop capabilities to work effectively in a group and/or demonstrate effective individual research skills to produce professional quality business documents to solve problems related to current issues in financial management
  5. demonstrate in individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by this unit.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFC5926 - Financial institutions and markets

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Hue Hwa Au Yong

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (Evening)
  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses to undertake this unit: B6004, 0028, 0396, 0503, 0504, 0790, 0826, 1445, 1499, 1822, 2098, 2619, 3174, 3176, 3177, 3179, 3189, 3822, 3843, 3844, 3848 or 4435.

Prohibitions

BFF5926, AFF9260

Synopsis

Topics include development of money and financial markets and financial flows analysis; intermediation; economic role of the different financial institutions; determination of interest rates and yield curve analysis in financial markets; exchange rates and money supply; sources of short-term, medium-term and long-term finance; sources of overseas borrowing; an introduction to interest rate and exchange rate management; performance of the financial system.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. compare and contrast specific types of financial institutions, instruments and markets in order to explain the distinctions between their operations, usage and regulation
  2. critically evaluate the assumptions and conventional wisdom relating to the term structure of interest rates and foreign exchange rates
  3. develop academic skills by accessing electronic data sources and hard copy references to evaluate a case study assignment
  4. develop an ability to work in a team by requiring syndicates to submit written solutions to assigned case studies, and thereby demonstrate effective interpersonal communication skills and develop a team orientated approach to work effectively as a team member to produce a professional quality business document solving financial institution related issues
  5. demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the components and functioning of capital markets in an open economy as exemplified by the unit.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFC5935 - Portfolio management and theory

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Daniel Chai (First semester)
Dr Thanh Huynh (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Daniel Chai (First semester)
Dr Thanh Huynh (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (Evening)
  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B5001, B6001, B6003, B6004, B6005 or B6015.

Prohibitions

BFF5935, AFF9350

Synopsis

Topics include investment markets and investment strategies; measuring investment return and risk; capital asset pricing model; arbitrage pricing theory; taxation; shares and share analysis; valuation; financial futures markets; real estate; portfolio management; asset allocation; monitoring.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are:

  1. evaluate financial market information to measure investment risk and return, and be able to incorporate such evaluation in fundamental and technical analysis in the asset valuation process
  2. assess portfolio management performance
  3. understand the relevance of behavioural finance, including an awareness of financial history as it relates to behavioural finance
  4. demonstrate effective interpersonal communication skills and develop a team orientated approach to work effectively as a team member to produce a professional quality business document solving portfolio investment objectives
  5. demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the components of an investment portfolio and their optimal combination as discussed throughout the unit.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFF5021 - Case studies in risk management

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Christine Brown (First semester)
Ms Amanda Nguyen (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Mr Steve Howard (First semester)
Ms Amanda Nguyen (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (Evening)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

BFF5902

Prohibitions

AFF5021

Synopsis

The management of risk is a multi-dimensional activity that entails a range of disciplines and thought processes to ensure that resilience is created and maintained within the firm. There needs to be an understanding by business students of the range of activities and events that can be exposed by the application of risk management techniques and processes. This unit includes detailed analysis of a series of case studies drawn from real life events that encompass the holistic nature of risk within a firm and/or society. If appropriate, they may be presented and discussed by an industry practitioner. The unit is designed to bring all facets of the specialisation together.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop analytical and diagnostic skills and in particular enhance an ability to analyse and resolve problems of practical importance
  2. analyse situations and scenarios by reference to case studies relating to risk management and articulate a response in an effective manner
  3. gain experience in a controlled environment in skills needed for practical implementation of risk management policy within a corporate setting
  4. decide on response tactics ranging from qualitative to quantitative as appropriate
  5. categorise degrees of risk and respond to risk situations, justify responses to various set situations using the matrix approach and emphasise the relationship of risk factors and scenarios to risk practitioners and various guest speakers
  6. work in an individual and/or team environment and develop the ability to project and defend a point of view in a constructive manner
  7. demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BFF5021.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFF5040 - Advanced security analysis

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Viet Nga Cao

Coordinator(s)

Dr Viet Nga Cao

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (Evening)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed BFF5935 or be enrolled in course B6003.

Prohibitions

AFF5040

Synopsis

This unit evaluates and applies contemporary approaches used to analyse and price financial assets including:

  • security and market performance measures
  • multifactor asset pricing
  • fundamental valuation
  • technical analysis
  • fixed income and hybrid securities
  • forward interest rates and swaps
  • investing and hedging with futures, options and other derivatives
  • pricing risk
  • credit derivatives

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop a recognition and understanding of the investment environment and its impact on asset valuation
  2. develop analytical skills related to the valuation of various investments
  3. develop skills to critically evaluate various investment strategies
  4. develop skills relating to dealing with financial risk
  5. develop a critical perspective of such investment management
  6. demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BFF5040.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFF5180 - Research dissertation

24 points, SCA Band 3, 0.500 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Huu Nhan Duong

Coordinator(s)

Dr Huu Nhan Duong

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Full year 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ACX4000 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

AFF5180

Synopsis

Under supervision, students are expected to undertake and report on an original research topic that addresses a contemporary and/or a significant issue in the field of accounting, banking and finance, insurance or risk management. Students must find a suitable supervisor, have selected an appropriate area of research and have obtained the approval of their course director before undertaking in this unit.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop an ability to work independently by selecting a research project that requires a critical review of the literature and derivation of appropriate hypotheses
  2. acquire knowledge of devising appropriate procedures for the testing of the hypotheses, showing regard to both theoretical and practical problems of conducting scientific research
  3. develop the ability to conduct a planned study and manage any problems arising from the research design and data collection
  4. develop a high level of analytical, written and communication skills.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload equals 576 hours per semester

See also Unit timetable information


BFF5230 - Global financial markets

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Silvio Contessi (First semester)
Dr Banita Bissoondoyal-Bheenick (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Silvio Contessi (First semester)
Dr Banita Bissoondoyal-Bheenick (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (Evening)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B5001, B6001, B6003, B6004 or B6005.

Prohibitions

AFF5230

Synopsis

This unit analyses the characteristics, uses and behaviour of financial markets. Topics include:

  • types and users of financial markets
  • financial crises
  • global risk
  • international ratings
  • international debt and equity markets
  • derivative markets
  • credit derivatives
  • specialised sources of international finance
  • regulation of international markets

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically analyse the structure of global financial markets
  2. evaluate the impact of international securities and tax law on international financial markets
  3. evaluate academic papers in terms of the application of finance theories to the international financial markets
  4. demonstrate effective interpersonal communication skills and develop a team-orientated approach to work effectively as a team member to produce a professional quality business document solving financial market-related problems
  5. demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of global financial markets, their products and appropriateness for the investor.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFF5250 - Corporate treasury management

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Eden Zhang

Coordinator(s)

Dr Eden Zhang

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (Evening)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed BFF5954 or BFF5925. No pre-requisite for students enrolled in B6004, B6003, 0504, 3818, 3850, 4412 or 4435.

Prohibitions

AFF5250

Synopsis

This unit covers five pillars of corporate treasury management:

  • corporate finance (financing, investment, dividend payout)
  • debt and equity markets and product design
  • liquidity/net working capital management
  • risk transfer, retention and management (exchange rate risk, interest rate risk, credit risk, and loan concentration risk)
  • managing corporate treasury as a strategic unit.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. design corporate treasury as a strategic business unit with clear structure, roles, functions and control systems
  2. design a risk management framework that reflects the risk appetite of the firm
  3. design risk management strategies including hedging techniques for commodity, interest rate and foreign exchange risk management
  4. design sensitivity analysis, scenario analysis, stress testing approaches and apply real option analysis to assist corporate treasurers to analyse investment projects
  5. design structured and option embedded debt and equity products with emphasis on pricing and market considerations
  6. appraise empirical approaches to net working capital management and liquidity management and the treasurer's role in managing profit-risk trade-off
  7. debate empirical estimation of 'optimal' capital structure and the treasurer's role in optimising debt-equity mix using both short and long term funding
  8. debate Australia's dividend imputation tax system and its implications for corporate treasury goals and operations
  9. evaluate treasury management systems and other decision support systems
  10. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and / or group activities dealing with corporate treasury management and demonstrate in both individual and group summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BFF5250.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFF5260 - Treasury and financial markets

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Orhan Azizoglu

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

Students who have not passed BFF5926 or equivalent must be granted permission by the Chief Examiner to undertake this unit.

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B5001, B6001, B6003, B6004 or B6005.

Prohibitions

AFF5260

Synopsis

This unit will combine classroom teaching and direct experiential learning in financial markets covering topics that may include market participants, treasury operations, market structures, dealer markets, liquidity and price formation. This unit is taught in the simulated trading and research laboratory (STARLab). It is a specialist, practically oriented unit where attendance is compulsory as assessment is based on classroom activities. An understanding of financial prices, returns and volatility is require.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. formulate portfolio management decisions
  2. compare and contrast differences between various market structures
  3. acquire an in-depth understanding of economic concepts such as market efficiency, performance evaluation and market structure regulation
  4. plan, verify and settle transactions completed in STARLab
  5. develop, implement, analyse and manage strategies in financial markets
  6. plan, organise and report on all activities involved in STARLab
  7. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with treasury and financial markets.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFF5270 - Funds management

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Paul Docherty

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (Evening)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B5001, B6001, B6003, B6004 or B6005.

Prohibitions

AFF5270

Synopsis

This unit focuses on funds management styles and philosophies; approaches to implementing investment strategies for funds design and decision making; practical allocation of assets across and within different markets (industries); market sector volatilities and risk management; and performance measurement. Current academic research and trends in the industry are also considered from local and global funds management perspectives.

The topics include:

  • portfolio investment styles, philosophies, mandates and policies
  • capital market expectations
  • asset allocation and portfolio optimisation
  • management of fixed income portfolios
  • international diversification
  • alternative investments
  • quantitative portfolio factor models
  • portfolio monitoring and rebalancing
  • portfolio performance, attribution and evaluation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate knowledge of the global funds management industry, its management philosophies, strategies and styles
  2. compare and contrast approaches to funds design and decision making in terms of fund allocation, portfolio optimisation and portfolio monitoring, along with current trends in the funds management industry
  3. develop skills of summarising, critically analysing and assessing, ranking, reporting and, presenting the current performance of funds managers
  4. develop the capability to work effectively in a group and demonstrate effective research and problem solving skills to produce quality investment portfolio analysis
  5. demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the rudiments of fund management both in theory and in practice as detailed in the unit.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFF5280 - Institutional asset and liability management

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Zhongyan Zhu

Not offered in 2018

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B5001, B6001, B6003, B6004 or B6005.

Prohibitions

AFF5280

Synopsis

Topics include managing interest rate risk; foreign exchange risk; liquidity risk and the cash flow cycle; credit risk; capital risk; debt and investment risk and managing the risk of derivative products.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop critical skills in understanding, analysing and applying concepts and models such as VAR Model, RAROC Model, Z-score etc. which provide assistance for managing bank's assets and liability risks
  2. develop an understanding of the application of regulatory measures taken by Reserve bank of Australia , APRA and BIS for improvement of risk management in the banking industry
  3. explain the link between theory and real world situation in the areas of market risk, interest rate risks, foreign exchange risks, credit risks, liquidity risks and operation risk faced by banks
  4. develop writing and presentation skills by requiring the submission of group assignments relating to existing practices followed by the banks
  5. develop an ability to work independently by requiring presentation of tutorials answers relating to risk management by the financial institutions
  6. demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BFF5280.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFF5300 - Case studies in finance

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Dr John Watson

Coordinator(s)

Dr John Watson

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (Evening)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

BFF5040 or equivalent.

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B6001 or B6003.

Prohibitions

AFF5300

Synopsis

This unit is intended to consolidate and apply the technical learning achieved in the core units of the Master of Applied Finance, to attain real industry experiences. This will be achieved by using a selection of targeted case studies that highlight the issues likely to be encountered in industry.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop the ability to identify problems, to synthesise, analyse, and summarise quantitative and qualitative information
  2. evaluate and weigh evidence, arguments and ethics
  3. apply specialist skills and knowledge to global business issues and to work out solutions to practitioner issues
  4. develop capabilities to work effectively in a group
  5. demonstrate effective individual research skills to produce professional quality business documents to address financial issues.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFF5333 - Project finance

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Christine Brown

Coordinator(s)

Professor Christine Brown

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Second semester 2018 (Evening)

Prerequisites

AFX9540 or BFF5954 or BFF5040 or BFF5925.

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B6001, B6003, B6005 or C6006.

Synopsis

This unit will combine a theoretical, practical and case study approach to the principles surrounding project finance incorporating: the environment surrounding approaches to project finance; the market for project finance; project characteristics; risk analysis and risk management; the role of an advisor in a project finance deal; valuing the project and project cash flow analysis; financing the deal; legal aspects of project finance and; credit risk in project finance transactions.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse the theoretical and practical aspects of project finance
  2. develop the ability to identify problems, to synthesise, analyse, and summarise quantitative and qualitative information in project finance
  3. evaluate and weigh evidence, arguments and ethics related to project finance
  4. apply specialist skills and knowledge to project finance issues and to create solutions to practitioner issues
  5. develop capabilities to work effectively in a group
  6. demonstrate effective individual research skills to produce professional quality business documents to address project finance issues.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFF5580 - Mergers and acquisitions

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Dr John Vaz

Coordinator(s)

Dr John Vaz

Quota applies

This unit has an enrolment quota of 40.

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Second semester 2018 (Evening)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B6001, B6003 or B6004.

Prohibitions

AFF5580

Synopsis

This unit examines the concept of mergers and acquisitions from two perspectives - the relevant areas of finance and the basic taxation, accounting and legal issues. The aim is to provide students with a practical understanding of this major corporate strategy. The finance issues will involve an examination of basic theory and empirical findings associated with mergers and acquisitions, the valuation of firms under a range of techniques, the structuring of bids from a financing perspective and defensive strategies. The taxation, accounting and legal issues include a review of the taxation effects from the position of both the bidder and the target's shareholders, the legal responsibilities of the Board and senior management of both target and bidder companies, the role of the Takeover Panel in relation to both defensive and negotiating strategies, the use of independent experts, the application of the Trade Practices Act and the effect of the accounting asset impairment tests.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define the purposes and scope of mergers and acquisitions in terms of the legal and economic consequences
  2. evaluate the impact of mergers and acquisitions on the participating parties
  3. describe the differences between mergers, hostile acquisitions and private equity involvement
  4. communicate clearly and in an organised manner the findings from both case studies and academic studies on the issues raised in the preceding goals
  5. critically analyse the strategies and financial worth of a nominated M & A corporate example
  6. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with mergers and acquisitions and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in BFF5580.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFF5902 - Introduction to risk principles

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Christine Brown (First semester)
Ms Amanda Nguyen (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Iain Maclachlan (First semester)
Ms Amanda Nguyen (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (Evening)
  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

AFF9020

Synopsis

This unit is designed to introduce the concept of risk as a business philosophy and to introduce students to the Australian Risk Management Standard, AS/NZS/ISO31000:2009. It will look at the evolution of risk, the requirements for risk management, the risk management process and steps, and the application of risk management.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate an understanding of the scope, application and definition of risk
  2. explain the risk management requirements needed of a business entity of the 21st century
  3. compare and contrast the risk management process with existing approaches to governance, compliance and control
  4. link the risk approach to effective business control, by reference to AS/NZS/ISO31000:2009
  5. understand the steps and the logic of the sequence
  6. demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BFF5902.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFF5915 - Options, futures and risk management

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Binh Do (First semester)
Associate Professor Jin Yu (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Binh Do (First semester)
Associate Professor Jin Yu (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (Evening)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Only students enrolled in one of the following courses may undertake this unit:

0028, 0396, 0503, 0504, 0790, 0826, 1445, 1499, 1679, 2098, 2619, 3174, 3176, 3177, 3179, 3189, 3818, 3822, 3843, 3844, 3848, 3850 or 4412.

Prohibitions

AFF5290, AFF3751, BFF3751, AFF9150

Synopsis

This unit examines how options and futures can be used for hedging risk in the process of risk management. Several aspects of risk management are examined, including the reasons why investors indulge in this activity, how value is created via risk management, and the firm-wide approach to risk management (given that any firm is exposed to a wide variety of risks). Once the importance of risk management has been established, emphasis turns to the use of derivatives (futures and options) to manage risk. To understand how they are used to manage risk, the unit also considers the characteristics and pricing of these instruments, including some exotic versions.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine the financial risk management function and its evolution in the corporate world
  2. understand the characteristics of futures and options markets and be able to apply these instruments so as to hedge the risk exposure of the firm
  3. design appropriate risk management strategies using options and futures for hedging and speculation
  4. demonstrate effective research skills to produce a professional quality business report recommending a solution to a risk management problem
  5. demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of derivative instruments in financial markets, both the mechanism of their operation and their application in hedging risk exposures.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFF5954 - Business finance

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Barbara Chambers

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (Evening)
  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (Evening)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed ETF5900 or be enrolled in course B6002, B6011 or C6006.

Prohibitions

AFF9250, BFF5925, AFF9641, AFG9044, BFG5944, AFX9641, AFX9540

Synopsis

This unit covers corporate finance concepts and theories at an introductory level. Students will be expected to be able to master basic calculations involving share and bond valuations, NPV and IRR, company cost of capital, etc. and to use them in determining whether investment projects should proceed as well as the value of companies. They will also expected to be able to interpret the results and to discuss basic issues and theories appropriate to an introductory level unit.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. value financial instruments including debt and equity instruments using financial models and financial mathematics
  2. explain and critique the theory of capital markets
  3. evaluate firms' investment project decisions using capital budgeting techniques
  4. describe and critique firms' financing and payout decisions
  5. identify and explain firms' financial risks and how firms can manage financial risks using risk management techniques.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFF5977 - Risk financing and treasury management

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Christine Brown (First semester)
Ms Amanda Nguyen (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Mr Tony Cusack (First semester)
Ms Amanda Nguyen (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (Evening)
  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (Evening)

Prohibitions

AFF9770

Synopsis

Topics include the evaluation of risk; financing tools; retention and transfer; insurance; non insurance; pre and post loss funding; retention and self insurance decisions; insurance and reinsurance principles and practices for the corporate buyer; deductible selection models; management and administration of losses and insurance claims; institutional factors, accounting factors, including taxation and government incentives; captive insurance companies; international considerations; financial transfer by contract.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop critical skills in understanding, analysing and applying concepts and models relating to risk management by the treasury of an organisation
  2. develop an understanding of optimum capital structure, maximisation of firm value and investment risk management faced by the treasury
  3. explain the link between theory of derivative products, insurance products and credit derivatives such as securitisation and the real world situation
  4. develop writing and presentation skills by requiring the submission of group assignments relating to existing practices followed by the banks
  5. develop the ability to work independently by requiring presentation of tutorials answers relating to risk management by the financial institutions
  6. demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BFF5977.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFM5915 - Options, futures and risk management

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Jothee Sinnakkannu

Coordinator(s)

Dr Jothee Sinnakkannu

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (Evening)

Co-requisites

Only students enrolled in one of the following courses may undertake this unit:

0028, 0503, 0504, 0790, 0826, 2098, 2619, 3174, 3176, 3177, 3179, 3189, 3818, 3822, 3843, 3844, 3848, 3850, 4412, B6003, B6004 or B6007.

Prohibitions

AFF5290, AFF3751, BFF3751, BFF5915, AFF9150

Synopsis

This unit examines how options and futures can be used for hedging risk in the process of risk management. Several aspects of risk management are examined, including the reasons why investors indulge in this activity, how value is created via risk management, and the firm-wide approach to risk management (given that any firm is exposed to a wide variety of risks). Once the importance of risk management has been established, emphasis turns to the use of derivatives (futures and options) to manage risk. To understand how they are used to manage risk, the unit also considers the characteristics and pricing of these instruments, including some exotic versions.

Outcomes

The learning outcomes associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine the financial risk management function and its evolution in the corporate world
  2. understand the characteristics of futures and options markets and be able to apply these instruments so as to hedge the risk exposure of the firm
  3. design appropriate risk management strategies using options and futures for hedging and speculation
  4. demonstrate effective research skills to produce a professional quality business report recommending a solution to a risk management problem
  5. demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of derivative instruments in financial markets, both the mechanism of their operation and their application in hedging risk exposures.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study.

See also Unit timetable information


BFM5959 - Accounting and finance for international managers

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Ravichandran Subramaniam

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (Evening)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B6007.

Prohibitions

AFX9590, ACM5959, BFF5959, BFS5959, BFZ5959

Synopsis

This unit provides an introduction to terminology, concepts and techniques used in accounting and finance. Important areas to be discussed include understanding financial statements, basic analysis of financial statements, working capital management, the framework of capital budgeting, and time value of money. International issues in accounting will also be examined. The emphasis will be on decision making and value creation in a global environment.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop an understanding of the nature and roles of accounting and finance in managing in a global environment
  2. explore the process of value management in a global world
  3. develop competencies and computational skills required to prepare and evaluate the strategies and tactics associated with value creation
  4. develop an appreciation for the relevance of theory and its linkage with practice
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with principles of accounting and finance and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in the unit.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFM5973 - International finance

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Mohammed Shaiban

Coordinator(s)

Dr Mohammed Shaiban

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • Second semester 2018 (Evening)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B6007

Prohibitions

AFF9160, BFF5916, BFF5973, AFF9730

Synopsis

Topics include working capital management, capital budgeting and funding decisions (capital structure and cost of capital) incorporating the identification of foreign exchange risks and their management as well as their financial reporting implications.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify motives and evaluate strategies for foreign direct investment
  2. understand the impact of and strategies to manage risks associated with international business
  3. acquire a sound knowledge of issues surrounding the financing of international business
  4. develop oral presentation skills in communicating complexities surrounding international business
  5. develop an ability to work independently, lead and participate in teams from diverse cultural and social backgrounds by producing a presentation relating to an international business issue
  6. demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BFM5973.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study.

See also Unit timetable information


BFS5959 - Accounting and finance for international managers

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Stefani Coetzee

Coordinator(s)

Prof G Els

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • Term 2 2018 (On-campus block of classes)
  • Term 4 2018 (On-campus block of classes)

Prohibitions

AFX9590, BFF5959, BFM5959, BFZ5959

Synopsis

This unit provides an introduction to terminology, concepts and techniques used in accounting and finance. Important areas to be discussed include understanding financial statements, basic analysis of financial statements, working capital management, the framework of capital budgeting, and time value of money. International issues in accounting will also be examined. The emphasis will be on decision making and value creation in a global environment.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop an understanding of the nature and roles of accounting and finance in managing in a global environment
  2. explore the process of value management in a global world
  3. develop competencies and computational skills required to prepare and evaluate the strategies and tactics associated with value creation
  4. develop an appreciation for the relevance of theory and its linkage with practice
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with principles of accounting and finance and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in BFS5959.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFX4000 - Research methods

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Philip Gray

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B3701.

Synopsis

Students will be introduced to research methodologies used in finance and will prepare a research proposal. The primary focus is on understanding the process of scientific research, which includes topic identification, literature review, hypothesis development, data requirements and appropriate empirical methodologies.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. prepare a research proposal in finance
  2. prepare a literature review that demonstrates knowledge of essential literature
  3. develop research questions and testable hypotheses
  4. devise empirical methodologies appropriate for testing the research hypotheses
  5. develop technical and computing skills that facilitate research
  6. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills in individual and/or group activities dealing with research methods and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BFX4000.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 75% + Examination: 25%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFX4018 - Honours research thesis

24 points, SCA Band 3, 0.500 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Huu Nhan Duong

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

BFX4000

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B3701.

Synopsis

Students conduct a critical review of the literature relevant to their study; derive appropriate hypotheses for testing; devise an empirical test of the hypotheses showing regard to practical problems of conducting research, ethical considerations, and principles of scientific method; conduct a planned study and manage any problems arising in the data collection; select and conduct an appropriate analysis of the data; and write a report on the project, showing due regard to relevant stylistic conventions.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. implement a research proposal
  2. recognise practical problems of conducting scientific research and propose solutions
  3. complete a research dissertation
  4. develop the ability to conduct and manage a planned study
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills in individual and/or group activities dealing with a research dissertation.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 432 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average seven/eight hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFX4030 - Advanced modelling in finance

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Daniel Chai

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 0181, 0171 or 4416 to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions

AFX4030

Synopsis

This unit has two key components. The first half covers aspects of theoretical and empirical financial modelling, including modelling the stock price behaviour, consumption-based asset pricing models, multifactor models, two beta, ICAPM, intertemporal asset pricing models, mean-variance frontier and beta representations, bayesian alphas and mutual fund persistence, a bayesian and bootstrap analysis, performance measures of the hedge fund returns. The second half covers technical skills in building Excel models to solve problems in Finance. The aim is to bridge the gap between financial theory and practice. To achieve this, students will learn modelling skills in Excel and be introduced to VBA programming concepts and techniques.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. apply advanced knowledge and skills in the use of Excel and Visual Basic
  2. develop advanced skills in the design and implementation of efficient and robust financial models such as option pricing, portfolio and interest rate models
  3. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with advanced modelling in finance and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BFX4030.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFX4060 - Issues in corporate finance

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Yulia Veld-Merkoulova

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 0181, 0171 or 4416 to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions

AFX4060

Synopsis

The objective of this course is to develop critical economic reasoning and understanding of important empirical regularities in corporate finance. This unit builds on introductory corporate finance studies and analyses a variety of issues by introducing a study of recent empirical literature. There is a strong focus on research with a selective and critical examination of theoretical and empirical research in corporate finance. The advanced topics covered include market efficiency and event studies, security offerings, corporate takeovers, and capital structure, dividend policy, corporate governance and financial tunnelling.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. acquire knowledge of empirical findings in corporate finance
  2. develop an ability to conceptualise and analyse issues in corporate finance at a sound level of understanding and be in a position to make a significant contribution in setting firm financial policy
  3. critically evaluate underlying theories, concepts, assumptions, limitations and arguments in corporate financial theory
  4. develop analytical skills via understanding the intuition and logic behind recent academic research and the possible extension to the recent research
  5. demonstrate in an individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BFX4060.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFX4080 - Issues in banking

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Barry Williams

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must be enrolled in course 0181, 0171 or 4416 to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions

AFX4080

Synopsis

This unit draws on the academic literature to provide a study of a range of topics relating to banking and finance. It presents a basis for students intending to undertake research into banking and related finance questions. Topics covered include theory of financial intermediation, risk management, efficiency assessment, competition modelling and bank regulation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. discuss existing theory in the field of banking and its evolution
  2. critically assess the usefulness and limitations of this theory in the field of banking
  3. apply this theory to relevant current policy issues
  4. critically evaluate empirical research and identify major research questions in banking
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills in individual and/or group activities dealing with issues in banking and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BFX4080.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFX4120 - Issues in investments

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Philip Gharghori

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must be enrolled in Bachelor of Commerce (Honours) to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions

AFX4120

Synopsis

This unit will examine empirical research in asset pricing and investments. It will develop students knowledge and ability to apply empirical techniques to conduct research in asset pricing and investments.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically analyse research papers examining current issues in asset pricing and investments
  2. critically evaluate research methodologies applicable to empirical finance research
  3. demonstrate an ability to conduct research in asset pricing and investments
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills in individual and/or group activities dealing with issues in investment and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BFX4120.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFX5000 - Research methods

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Philip Gray

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B6001 or B6003.

Synopsis

Students will be introduced to research methodologies used in finance and will prepare a research proposal. The primary focus is on understanding the process of scientific research, which includes topic identification, literature review, hypothesis development, data requirements and appropriate empirical methodologies.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. prepare a research proposal in finance
  2. prepare a literature review that demonstrates knowledge of essential literature
  3. develop research questions and testable hypotheses
  4. devise empirical methodologies appropriate for testing the research hypotheses
  5. develop technical and computing skills that facilitate research
  6. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills in individual and/or group activities dealing with research methods and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BFX5000.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 75% + Examination: 25%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFX5018 - Research dissertation

12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Huu Nhan Duong

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

BFX5000

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B6001 or B6003.

Synopsis

Students conduct a critical review of the literature relevant to their study; derive appropriate hypotheses for testing; devise an empirical test of the hypotheses showing regard to practical problems of conducting research, ethical considerations, and principles of scientific method; conduct a planned study and manage any problems arising in the data collection; select and conduct an appropriate analysis of the data; and write a report on the project, showing due regard to relevant stylistic conventions.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. implement a research proposal
  2. recognise practical problems of conducting scientific research and propose solutions
  3. complete a research dissertation
  4. develop the ability to conduct and manage a planned study
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills in individual and/or group activities dealing with a research dissertation.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 432 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average seven/eight hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFX5860 - International study program in banking and finance

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Zoltan Murgulov

Coordinator(s)

Dr Zoltan Murgulov

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Summer semester A 2018 (On-campus block of classes)

Prerequisites

Students must be granted permission by the Chief Examiner to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions

AFX5860

Synopsis

The unit is designed to impart an understanding and appreciation of the current issues underlying the International area of finance, and to develop a practical understanding of the markets and the financial techniques used within the markets. To encourage research techniques for a specialised topic within the financial markets area. To develop a practical understanding and appreciation of cultural differences within the area of international banking and finance through an overseas visitation program.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. become skilled in understanding the history and structure of International banking and financial markets
  2. acquire an understanding of the theories and usage of International foreign exchange markets
  3. develop a practical understanding and appreciation of cultural differences within the area of international banking and finance through an overseas visitation program
  4. develop a set of academic skills which include the ability to work independently, evaluate academic papers in terms of the application of finance theories to the International financial markets, search the web and to submit assignments on time
  5. develop excellent oral and written communication skills to be able to analyse case studies and to lead/participate in groups from diverse cultural and social backgrounds.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFZ5959 - Accounting and finance for international managers

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Kym Brown (Full year)
Dr John Watson (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Suzhou

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus block of classes)
  • Full year 2018 (On-campus block of classes)

Prohibitions

Students who have completed BFM5959, BFF5959, BFS5959 or AFX9590, or enrolled in courses 0748, 0503, 0790, 0826, 3850, 4401, 4402 and 3843 are prohibited from enrolling in this unit.

Synopsis

This unit provides an introduction to terminology, concepts and techniques used in accounting and finance. Important areas to be discussed include understanding financial statements, basic analysis of financial statements, working capital management, the framework of capital budgeting, and time value of money. International issues in accounting will also be examined. The emphasis will be on decision making and value creation in a global environment.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop an understanding of the nature and roles of accounting and finance in managing in a global environment
  2. explore the process of value management in a global world
  3. develop competencies and computational skills required to prepare and evaluate the strategies and tactics associated with value creation
  4. develop an appreciation for the relevance of theory and its linkage with practice
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with principles of accounting and finance and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in BFZ5959.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTC5904 - Law and commercial decisions

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Mark Bender (First semester)
Mr Mathews Thomas (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

BTF5903, BTM5903, BTF5904.

Synopsis

This unit examines business law in practice, including negotiation techniques and applying contract law; legal risk management techniques, applying the law of negligence, statutory consumer law protections and occupational health and safety; choosing the most appropriate business form and complying with requirements, applying corporations law, the law of partnerships, agency and sole traders.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. use a business-focused approach to the law to develop skills in:
    • assessing the legal risks faced by the business
    • avoiding those legal risks
    • going beyond mere legal compliance by developing sound processes
  2. develop strong practical negotiating skills to assist students to:
    • negotiate what they need for their business
    • create strong relationships
    • limit liabilities
  3. develop an understanding of business entities to be able to critically:
    • determine the most appropriate legal form
    • understand the benefits and problems with each legal form
    • develop good corporate governance.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTF5000 - Corporate governance

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Chenxia Shi

Coordinator(s)

Dr Chenxia Shi

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (Evening)

Prohibitions

MGX5320, BTX5000

Synopsis

This unit provides students with an appreciation of best corporate governance practices from a global perspective. It considers the reasons for the interest in corporate governance and compares and contrasts the various international corporate governance systems and best practice models; roles and functions of the board of directors, board committees and the board's relationship with management are explored from both a legal and management perspective; empirical studies of the relationship between corporate governance and corporate performance, and the role and legal duties of directors in takeover and insolvency contexts. Corporate governance issues in Asia are also analysed.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the theories upon which corporate governance models are based, including the legal, economics and management perspectives of these theories
  2. evaluate the various international corporate governance systems and best practice models
  3. define the roles and functions of the board of directors and the board's relationship with management, shareholders and other stakeholders
  4. analyse the way in which corporate law, historical factors and economic institutions affect corporate governance
  5. critically analyse various aspects of corporate governance best practice.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTF5001 - Business regulation and compliance

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Petra Mahy

Coordinator(s)

Dr. Michelle Welsh

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Second semester 2018 (Evening)

Synopsis

Regulatory oversight and control are increasingly shaping the development of economies and business. Managing business regulation and compliance is a fundamental component of every business operation whether these regulations are by law or self-regulatory. This unit will provide a framework for understanding regulation, government and industry regulators and the range of regulatory methods employed to achieve law enforcement and compliance with business regulation.

Adopting a case study approach, students will explore the meanings and limitations of regulation in different economic and business contexts such as corporations, environment and sustainability, corporate social responsibility, financial services, taxation and workplaces in Australia and regulation practice in the Asia Pacific region.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand and be able to explain a range of theories on, and the practical perspectives, of regulation
  2. be able to identify and assess the different meanings and limitations of regulation and regulatory factors in different contexts
  3. be able to analyse and develop strategies to achieve compliance with regulatory requirements and best practice in different geographic, economic and business contexts.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + End of Semester Task: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTF5050 - Comparative business law in Asia

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Alice de Jonge

Coordinator(s)

Dr Alice de Jonge

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Winter semester 2018 (On-campus block of classes)

Prohibitions

BTX5050

Synopsis

Trade and investment regimes affecting enterprises operating in the Asian region. International and regional trade conventions. Business and investment laws of selected Asian nations. Topics covered include national development planning; the political context of international trade and investment; import/export regulation; foreign investment regimes, corporate governance, prudential regulation in East Asia and dispute resolution.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define and describe the history and current operation of regional trade and investment agreements in Asia
  2. describe and demonstrate an understanding of the historical, economic and political context of national legal systems in selected Asian jurisdictions (Malaysia, Indonesia, China and Hong Kong)
  3. identify and describe the operation of the institutions responsible for the administration of commercial laws in select Asian jurisdictions
  4. have used accepted legal research methodology to examine in detail their choice from a number of specialised topics related to commercial law in one or more Asian jurisdictions
  5. identify, analyse and propose possible resolutions to legal issues arising from the conduct of business activities in one or more selected Asian jurisdictions.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTF5060 - The law of employment

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Matt Nichol

Coordinator(s)

Mr Matt Nichol

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (Evening)

Synopsis

The unit aims to develop knowledge and skills, and an understanding of the relationship between the common law, statute law and awards and agreements. In this regard, the unit introduces students to the central tenets of the contract of employment including the formation of the contract, breach of contract and wrongful dismissal, confidentiality, restrictive covenants, employee/independent contractor issues and discrimination law.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify a wide range of legal issues affecting the employment relationship, with a particular focus on the contract of employment
  2. illustrate the practical implications of employment law by identifying emerging issues in the media, the workplace and the case law
  3. apply the legal principles from relevant cases to hypothetical scenarios
  4. evaluate the principles underlying employment laws and assess the law's impact on the employment relationship.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTF5130 - International law and policy

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Alice de Jonge

Coordinator(s)

Dr Alice De Jonge

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (Off-campus)
  • First semester 2018 (Evening)

Prohibitions

BTX5130

Synopsis

The unit examines the principles of international law governing the legal relations between international states or other international legal persons. To this end a study will be made of the sources of international law and the relationship of international and municipal law. Specifically, the course will outline the principles relating to territory, personality, state responsibility, recognition, jurisdiction, air, space and sea law, dispute settlement and the law of treaties.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define and describe the distinctive nature of international law and some of its basic doctrines and subject areas
  2. identify the sources of international law, and explain the principles which govern the use of those sources
  3. describe the structures and institutions of international law, and be able to use the vocabulary of international law
  4. analyse the increasing impact of international law on Australian domestic law, as well as on the domestic legal systems of other states
  5. demonstrate a capacity to conduct research on, and to critically analyse, a specific aspect of public international law.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTF5160 - The globalisation of law and development in Asia

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Professor John Gillespie

Coordinator(s)

Professor John Gillespie

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Summer semester B 2018 (On-campus block of classes)

Prohibitions

BTX5160Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

The unit will introduce students to the theories about the globalization of law. Using a series of cases studies it aims to show how global laws are adopted and reinterpreted in key domestic legal systems in Asia. The unit will also demonstrate the local constraints on the globalization of law and offer reasons why legal and regulatory systems in Asian are not necessarily converging with those in the West.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop an understanding of the historical, economic and political context of domestic legal systems in selected Asian countries (China, Indonesia, Malaysia, Japan)
  2. acquire in depth knowledge and a critical interest in the interaction between global regulation and domestic regulation in developing countries in Asia
  3. gain a greater insight into the role of global regulation in the Asia Pacific region
  4. critically apply acquired analytical legal skills to a research project of the students choice
  5. develop general legal research and academic skills
  6. develop presentation skills, both verbal and written, involving the communication of abstract ideas.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTF5170 - Chinese business law

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Chenxia Shi

Coordinator(s)

Dr Chenxia Shi

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

BTX5170Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

This unit provides historical and broad policy perspectives on specific areas of business law and regulation in China. Some of the specific topics of the unit include business entities in China, corporate governance, competition law and policy, intellectual property rights protection and business disputes resolution. This unit will enable students to acquire a good understanding of cultural, political and social factors in shaping business law and regulation in China, and provide students with guidance on compliance issues in practice.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. comprehend business culture and underlying principles of business law and regulation in China
  2. develop good understanding of cultural, political and social factors in shaping business regulation in China
  3. acquire knowledge of specific substantive areas of Chinese business law
  4. critically analyse key issues of Chinese business law and the manner in which law regulates commercial activities in China
  5. evaluate broad policy perspectives on the issues studied, informed by comparative approach in legal analysis
  6. improve student research, writing and presentation skills through an extended opportunity to write and present research assignments in a chosen topic or area by the students.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTF5180 - Financial services regulation

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Andrew Serpell

Coordinator(s)

Dr Andrew Serpell

Not offered in 2018

Prohibitions

BTX4180, BTX5180

Synopsis

This subject examines the laws relating to financial services regulation from the policy perspective of what they are trying to achieve. The unit starts by considering the purpose of financial services regulation and the function and powers of financial regulators. It examines financial crime and the penalties which apply to breaches of the financial services laws. Other topics include the regulation of financial intermediaries and financial product advice, consumer protection and redress, fundraising and disclosure, brokers and financial markets and consumer credit.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

1 understand the purpose of financial services regulation

  1. critically examine the role and powers of financial regulators
  2. research, describe and analyse the regulation of financial products, financial markets, financial intermediaries, financial advice and consumer credit in Australia
  3. communicate effectively about financial regulation issues, both verbally and in writing.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTF5235 - Workplace and investment taxation

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Ken Devos

Coordinator(s)

Dr Ken Devos

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (Evening)

Prohibitions

BTF4230, BTF5230, BTF4240, BTF5240

Synopsis

The Workplace and Investment Taxation Unit introduces students to CGT and GST issues, which flow from making investments. It provides students with a thorough analysis of the main types of entity structures from an investment perspective. Specific topics include: the taxation of partnerships, trusts, companies and shareholders. The unit covers the most common taxation issues faced by employees, contractors and employers in the workplace. Also covered are tax administration, employee/contractor distinction, the Personal Services Income (PSI) regime, salary packaging, superannuation and employee share schemes (ESS).

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. apply the CGT and GST legislation to investment problems and identify solutions
  2. explain implications and calculate taxable income received by partnerships, trusts, companies, contractors and investors
  3. describe the administrative aspects of the income tax system
  4. explain the tax implications of superannuation and employee share schemes provided by employers
  5. calculate the tax position of employees and independent contractors in the workplace who receive fringe benefits and other types of remuneration.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTF5340 - Regional trade governance

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Alice de Jonge

Coordinator(s)

Dr Alice de Jonge

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Second semester 2018 (Off-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Synopsis

This unit will explore regional trade governance, with a special focus on the Asia, Asia-Pacific and Australasian regions. Topics addressed in the unit include; what is regional trade governance; regional dispute settlement; how are regional trade agreements made, who by and for whose benefit; the relationship between regional trade agreements and the global/multilateral regime; the extent to which regional trade governance impacts on the internal politics and law of participating nation states; whether regional trade governance manages the interface between trade and social goals effectively, for example, should regional trade agreements include provisions to actively promote developmental, environmental, health and other public interest goals.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the framework of regional trade governance arrangements and dispute settlement processes
  2. understand how and why regional trade agreements are made and the role of states, market factors and civil society in the process
  3. understand the relationship between regional trade agreements and the global multilateral regime
  4. assess the impact of regional trade agreements on participating states and the interface between regional trade agreements and objectives, such as developmental, environmental and public health goals.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTF5501 - Corporations law

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Tabatha Pettitt

Coordinator(s)

Dr Tabatha Pettitt (Semester 1)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (Evening)
  • Second semester 2018 (Evening)

Prerequisites

If students are enrolled in course B6002 there are no prerequisites.

Students enrolled in all other courses must have passed BTF5903.

Synopsis

This unit provides students with an understanding of the general law of corporations within the Australian regulatory context. The focus of this unit is on the nature of a corporation and its governance structure as a means of carrying out business. The unit examines the role of the corporation in society, its relationship to shareholders, creditors, the regulator and the community and includes topics which address the concept of limited liability, director's duties, shareholder remedies and corporate insolvency.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate an understanding of the significance and functions of corporations and trusts as legal structures that facilitate the carrying on of business
  2. identify, explain and apply legislation and case law to the internal and external regulations of corporations and operation of trusts
  3. develop skills in problem solving and analyse legal problems relating to corporations and trusts.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTF5801 - Masters research paper

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Petra Mahy (First semester)
Professor Vince Morabito (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Petra Mahy (First semester)
Professor Vince Morabito (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (Evening)
  • Second semester 2018 (Evening)

Prerequisites

It is recommended that this unit be undertaken in the last semester of study for the Master of Business Law.

Synopsis

This unit requires students to formulate a research topic on a business law related area of study and complete an approximately 8,000 word research project. Seminars will be conducted at which students will present progress and final reports on their research projects. The seminars will also include practical research and academic skills sessions.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. enable students to apply acquired analytical legal skills to a research project of their choice
  2. acquire in depth knowledge and a critical interest in a business law area
  3. demonstrate legal research and presentation skills and the ability to critically analyse legal issues have been acquired
  4. develop and further build upon general legal research and academic skills
  5. further build upon presentation skills, both verbal and written, involving the communication of abstract ideas.

Assessment

Research project (8,000 words): 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTF5841 - Human resources management law

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Dominique Allen

Coordinator(s)

Dr Dominique Allen

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Synopsis

The unit aims to develop knowledge and skills relating to the legal principles which underpin contemporary human resource management issues. It includes consideration of such matters as recruitment and selection, contract of employment issues, performance appraisal, equal opportunity and anti-discrimination, termination of employment, remuneration, rewards and employee benefits, employee health and safety and related HRM issues. The unit takes a practical approach to these matters and focuses specifically on practical case studies and decisions of the Courts and Tribunals.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify a wide range of legal issues affecting the human resources practitioner
  2. illustrate the practical implications of the law in the area of human resources management by identifying emerging issues in the media, the workplace and the case law
  3. apply the legal principles from relevant cases to hypothetical scenarios involving human resources management issues
  4. evaluate the principles underlying employment laws and assess the law's impact on the employment relationship.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTF5900 - Major research project

18 points, SCA Band 3, 0.375 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Dominique Allen

Coordinator(s)

Ms Anne O'Rourke

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Full year 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B6013.

Synopsis

Under supervision students are expected to undertake and report on an original research project that addresses a significant issue (or issues) in business law; this research proposal is likely to have substantial practical outcomes or implications; as well, it is hoped that students and supervisors will publish the work in an appropriate peer-refereed journal.

Assessment

Research dissertation (16,000 - 18,000 words) or

Research dissertation (12,000 - 14,000 words) and a pre-submission panel presentation: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 288 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average six/eight hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTF5903 - Law and business decisions

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Andrew Coleman

Coordinator(s)

Dr Andrew Coleman

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (Evening)
  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B6002, B6011 or B6015.

Prohibitions

BTM5903, BTC5904, BTF5904.

Synopsis

This unit examines business law in practice, including:

  • negotiation techniques, applying contract law
  • legal risk management techniques, applying the law of negligence, statutory consumer law protections and occupational health and safety
  • choosing the most appropriate business form and complying with requirements, applying corporations law, the law of partnerships, agency and sole traders.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. use a business-focused approach to the law to develop skills in:
    • assessing the legal risks faced by the business
    • avoiding those legal risks
    • going beyond mere legal compliance by developing sound processes
  2. develop strong practical negotiating skills to assist students to:
    • negotiate what they need for their business
    • create strong relationships
    • limit liabilities
  3. develop an understanding of business entities to be able to critically:
    • determine the most appropriate legal form
    • understand the benefits and problems with each legal form
    • develop good corporate governance.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTF5904 - Law and commercial decisions

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Mark Bender (First semester)
Mr Mathews Thomas (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (Evening)

Prohibitions

BTF5903, BTM5903, BTG9270, BTX9020, MBA9002, BTX5140, BTX9030 and students enrolled in course 3843, B6002 or B6011

Synopsis

This unit examines business law in practice including negotiation techniques, applying contract law, legal risk management techniques, applying the law of negligence, and statutory consumer law. It also looks at protections including occupational health and safety, and choosing the most appropriate business form and complying with requirements, applying corporations law, the law of partnerships, and agency and sole traders.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. use a business-focused approach to the law to develop skills in assessing the legal risks faced by the business, avoiding those legal risks, and going beyond mere legal compliance by developing sound processes
  2. develop strong practical negotiating skills to assist students to negotiate what they need for their business, creating strong relationships, and limiting liabilities
  3. develop an understanding of business entities to be able to critically determine the most appropriate legal form, understand the benefits and problems with each legal form, and develop good corporate governance.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTF5910 - Sustainability regulation

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Wayne Gumley

Coordinator(s)

Mr Wayne Gumley

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Second semester 2018 (Evening)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Synopsis

This unit assists students to understand the regulatory framework supporting a transition to ecologically sustainable development from a global perspective, including the role of international law, common law and national legislative schemes for protection of ecological services and natural resources, with particular consideration to the role of corporations and free trade.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify and understand the nature of global environmental problems
  2. identify and understand how the principles of ecologically sustainable development have been incorporated into environmental regulation at the national and local level
  3. understand and analyse the environmental responsibilities of corporations and business managers in local and global business transactions.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTF5919 - International trade law

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Jadranka Petrovic (First semester)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Jadranka Petrovic (First semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (Evening)

Synopsis

Topics include law of international trade, including rights and duties in international sales transactions; legal regimes governing contracts for carriage of goods internationally; distribution agreements; legal aspects of financing international trade; shipping documents, documentary collections and letters of credit; marine and aviation insurance; international dispute resolution.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define the purpose and scope of the international legal framework in which trade between nations takes place
  2. recognise and understand the form and nature of documents used in international trade including contracts of sale, shipping documentation, invoices, insurance policies, bills of exchange, documentary collections and letters of credit
  3. identify and understand legal issues in an international trade context
  4. apply the laws relating to international contracts of sale, international carriage of goods and finance of international trade in a variety of situations
  5. write a coherent piece of advice discussing the legal issues arising in an international trade dispute.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTF5965 - Taxation law

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Wayne Gumley (First semester)
Mr Toan Le (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Mr Wayne Gumley (First semester)
Mr Toan Le (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (Evening)
  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (Evening)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Synopsis

The unit covers the concepts of income taxation and the taxation of capital gains in their underlying historical, social and constitutional contexts. It includes discussion and learning of the policy and constitutional matrices of taxation, the legal definition of income, taxation of income from personal services and business, taxation of fringe benefits, indirect taxation of goods and services, taxation of capital gains, taxation of companies and allowable deductions from gross income in personal and business contexts.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify conceptual structures in the core income tax provisions and apply them in an ordered approach
  2. understand fundamental tax concepts to determine income and deductions, and together with appropriate judicial principles, apply them to personal, business and property scenarios
  3. calculate income tax, CGT and GST liabilities; and the taxable value of fringe benefits
  4. understand the operation of the taxation system; the interaction of GST with other taxes; and some tax accounting principles.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTM5903 - Law and business decisions

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Abdul Majid Nabi Baksh (First semester)
Dr Gan Joo Ee (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Abdul Majid Nabi Baksh (First semester)
Dr Gan Joo Ee (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (Evening)

Prohibitions

BTF5903, BTG9270, BTX5140, BTX5950, BTX9020, BTX9030, MBA9002

Synopsis

This unit examines business law in a management context. It will cover contractual and non-contractual risks and will provide instruction on how to identify, assess and manage these different legal risks. It will also provide an introduction to different legal forms of business organisations and their comparative risks and advantages.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop an understanding of the basic legal risks when operating a business, including contractual risks, non-contractual risks and statutory risks
  2. develop the ability to identify, assess and resolve these legal risks.
  3. develop an understanding of different legal forms of business organisation (sole trader, agency, partnership and corporation), to be able to critically determine the most appropriate legal form, understand the benefits and problems associated with each legal form and develop a good corporate governance regime.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning,peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTM5919 - International trade law

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Thaatchaayini Kananatu

Coordinator(s)

Dr Thaatchaayini Kananatu

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (Evening)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

BTF5919, BTS5919, BTX5190, LAW7028, LAW7209, BTW3201

Synopsis

Topics cover both public and private international trade law, including the WTO and dispute settlement within its framework; rights and duties in international sales transactions; legal regimes governing contracts for carriage of goods internationally and the rights and duties arising there under; legal aspects of financing international trade through documentary collections and letters of credit; marine insurance; and international dispute resolution.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the purpose and scope of the international legal framework in which trade between nations takes place
  2. recognise and understand the nature and purpose of documents used in international trade including contracts of sale, shipping documentation, invoices, insurance policies, bills of exchange and letters of credit
  3. identify and understand legal issues in an international trade context
  4. apply the laws relating to international contracts of sale, international carriage of goods, international finance and marine insurance in a variety of practical situations
  5. write a coherent piece of advice discussing the legal implications of the issues arising in an international trade dispute.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTS5919 - International trade law

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Tinaye Chivizhe

Coordinator(s)

Mr Tinaye Chivizhe

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • Trimester 2 2018 (On-campus block of classes)
  • Term 4 2018 (On-campus block of classes)

Prohibitions

BTX9190, BTF5919, BTM5919, BTF5910, BTX9100

Synopsis

Topics cover both public and private international trade law, including the WTO and dispute settlement within its framework; rights and duties in international sales transactions; legal regimes governing contracts for carriage of goods internationally and the rights and duties arising there under; legal aspects of financing international trade through documentary collections and letters of credit; marine insurance; and international dispute resolution.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the purpose and scope of the international legal framework in which trade between nations takes place
  2. recognise and understand the nature and purpose of documents used in international trade including contracts of sale, shipping documentation, invoices, insurance policies, bills of exchange and letters of credit
  3. identify and understand legal issues in an international trade context
  4. apply the laws relating to international contracts of sale, international carriage of goods, international finance and marine insurance in a variety of practical situations
  5. write a coherent piece of advice discussing the legal implications of the issues arising in an international trade dispute.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTX4110 - Directed studies

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Michelle Welsh (First semester)
Dr Benjamin Hayward (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Professor Michelle Welsh (First semester)
Dr Benjamin Hayward (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B3701 and undertaking the Business Law and Taxation specialisation.

Synopsis

Under the guidance of an academic supervisor, this unit allows a student independently to gain in-depth discipline knowledge in a selected area of business law and/or taxation as a foundation for the completion of an honours project. The student will complete a prescribed list of readings, undertake further independent literature studies, and complete other learning activities and assessments considered appropriate for the selected field of study.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse the literature in order to develop subject matter expertise beyond the specific focus of the Honours project
  2. synthesise the literature to inform the student's research topic of choice
  3. critically evaluate academic literature and present in written and oral form key arguments related to the research project.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Off-campus attendance requirements

On campus only


BTX4900 - Research methods and proposal

12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Anne O'Rourke (First semester)
Dr Benjamin Hayward (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Ms Anne O'Rourke (First semester)
Dr Benjamin Hayward (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B3701 and undertaking the Business Law and Taxation specialisation.

Prohibitions

BTF4900

Synopsis

This unit discusses the fundamental theoretical premises that can frame legal and regulatory research. It explores ways of formulating research question(s) and hypotheses, and identifies assumptions and theories that are relevant in the development of a conceptual framework for research. The topics discussed will cover principles of legal and social scientific methods, such as relational theory, comparative law, regulatory theory, social constructivism, systems theory and critical legal theory). Stress will be placed on developing argument analysis (e.g. avoiding fallacies in reasoning, evaluating and constructing sound arguments). These discussions will clarify the theoretical and practical underpinnings of research design, inform subsequent analyses of how to select different research methods (qualitative, quantitative, mixed), and illustrate key issues associated with the main arguments development in research work. The unit will also examine ways of presenting a compelling theoretical and practical case for legal and regulatory research. Finally, students will prepare a research proposal and report.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. enhance students' awareness of the core theoretical and methodological perspectives that underpin research about law and regulation at the honours level
  2. increase students' understanding of the principles involved in producing sound complex arguments as required in writing an approved research project
  3. consider and evaluate material presented in the research and methodology seminar series
  4. apply theoretical and methodological knowledge in the preparation of a research proposal for a research project.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 288 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average six/eight hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTX5150 - Law of marketing

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Coordinator(s)

Mr Mark Bender

Not offered in 2018

Prohibitions

BTX9150

Synopsis

The unit aims to develop an understanding of the legal frameworks regulating marketing activities, including competition law, the regulation of marketing communication, channel strategies and the fundamentals of intellectual property principles.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify, analyse and apply laws designed to protect consumers
  2. identify, analyse and apply intellectual property principles and apply these to the development, marketing and protection of products, knowledge and ideas.
  3. identify, analyse and apply the laws regulating a range of competition practices.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTX5160 - The globalisation of law and development in Asia

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Professor John Gillespie

Coordinator(s)

Professor John Gillespie

Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

The unit will introduce students to the theories about the globalization of law. Using a series of cases studies it aims to show how global laws are adopted and reinterpreted in key domestic legal systems in Asia. The unit will also demonstrate the local constraints on the globalization of law and offer reasons why legal and regulatory systems in Asian are not necessarily converging with those in the West.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop an understanding of the historical, economic and political context of domestic legal systems in selected Asian countries (China, Indonesia, Malaysia, Japan)
  2. acquire in depth knowledge and a critical interest in the interaction between global regulation and domestic regulation in developing countries in Asia
  3. gain a greater insight into the role of global regulation in the Asia Pacific region;
  4. critically apply acquired analytical legal skills to a research project of the students choice
  5. develop general legal research and academic skills, and
  6. develop presentation skills, both verbal and written, involving the communication of abstract ideas.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTX5170 - Chinese business law

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Chenxia Shi

Coordinator(s)

Dr Chenxia Shi

Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

This unit provides a detailed study of the theoretical perspectives of business law and regulation in China. Some of the specific topics of the unit include business organizations in China, company law, securities law, fund management law, contract law, copyright law, and bankruptcy law. This unit will provide students with broad policy perspectives on these topics in a nutshell and practical guidance on compliance issues concerning Chinese business law and regulation when doing business in China.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. comprehend business culture and underlying principles of business law and regulation in China
  2. develop good understanding of cultural, political and social factors in shaping business regulation in China
  3. acquire knowledge of specific substantive areas of Chinese business law.
  4. critically analyse key issues of Chinese business law and the manner in which law regulates commercial activities in China
  5. evaluate broad policy perspectives on the issues studied, informed by comparative approach in legal analysis
  6. improve student research, writing and presentation skills through an extended opportunity to write and present research assignments in a chosen topic or area by the students.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTX5220 - International issues in employment law

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Gan Joo Ee

Coordinator(s)

Dr Gan Joo Ee

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • Second semester 2018 (Evening)

Prohibitions

BTG9241, BTX5060, BTX9060 and BTW2241

Synopsis

This unit analyses current international issues impacting employment law, including the challenges faced by businesses with a global workforce. With a comparative focus on Malaysia, these include the feminisation of labour; migrant labour; expatriate employment contracts; restrictive covenants; implementation of global codes of conduct via corporate social responsibility initiatives; reorganisation of business and redundancy; outsourcing; performance management and alternative dispute resolution options for workplace issues. Examples from various jurisdictions and international organisations will be used to facilitate an appreciation of the tensions between nation state dynamics and international norms. The unit offers an intellectual and practical contribution to knowledge in the area of workplace relations and the law. The assessment of the course will be by way of assignments.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the role of international norms in employment law
  2. explain expatriate contracts in employment law i.e. contracts of service & independent contractors, restraints of trade and trade secrets
  3. discuss managerial prerogatives of reorganisation and outsourcing
  4. evaluate the consequences of disciplinary action and the role of mediation
  5. discuss the role of corporate social responsibility at the workplace.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTX5801 - Final research project

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Christopher Arup (First semester)
Professor Vince Morabito (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Professor Christopher Arup (First semester)
Professor Vince Morabito (Second semester)

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

It is recommended that this unit be undertaken in the last semester of study for the Master of Business Law.

Synopsis

This unit requires students to formulate a research topic on a business law related area of study and complete an approximately 8,000 word research project. Seminars will be conducted at which students will present progress and final reports on their research projects. The seminars will also include practical research and academic skills sessions.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. enable students to apply acquired analytical legal skills to a research project of their choice
  2. acquire in depth knowledge and a critical interest in a business law area
  3. demonstrate legal research and presentation skills and the ability to critically analyse legal issues have been acquired
  4. develop and further build upon general legal research and academic skills
  5. further build upon presentation skills, both verbal and written, involving the communication of abstract ideas.

Assessment

Research project (8,000 words): 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC4500 - Long-run economic change

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Gary Magee

Coordinator(s)

Professor Gary Magee

Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

This unit will introduce students to the field of long-run economic growth and performance. Two key questions are addressed: why do certain economies persistently perform more successfully than others, and how is leadership in the global economy achieved and maintained? Students completing this unit will be able to explain and describe the pattern of long-term economic growth, leadership and decline in the world economy since the industrial revolution; evaluate the role of culture, institutions and the environment in economic change; and apply the methods of historical economics to contemporary economic debates.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. evaluate critically contrasting views about the determinants of long-run economic change
  2. analyse the processes of long-term economic growth and decline
  3. analyse a variety of different approaches, including the historical and institutional, that can be used to supplement traditional economic analysis and policy making
  4. explain and analyse the main issues and debates in the field of historical economics
  5. explain and describe the main contours of the development of the world economy
  6. better contextualize and analyse contemporary economic events.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC4650 - Microeconomics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Chongwoo Choe

Coordinator(s)

Professor Chongwoo Choe

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Synopsis

Topics include consumer preference theory; choice; demand; technology; profit maximisation and duality; competitive general equilibrium in the context of decreasing, increasing and constant returns; two-part tariffs; expected utility; adverse selection; and moral hazard.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. upgrade their analytical skill for intermediate microeconomics
  2. appreciate and have a basic understanding of the key ideas of advanced microeconomic theory
  3. gain first hand experience in the application of microeconomic principles to the analysis of a range of economic issues
  4. gain the microeconomic techniques to undertake successfully other fourth year units and some fifth year units taught by the Department.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC4660 - Macroeconomics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Solmaz Moslehi

Coordinator(s)

Dr Solmaz Moslehi

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

ECF5421

Synopsis

Contemporary macroeconomics and recent policy debates, including market clearing and long-run equilibrium; classical dichotomy; money in the global economy; aggregate demand and price rigidity, microfoundations of macroeconomics, disequilibrium models; stock-flow interactions; wealth effects; rational expectations; policy ineffectiveness and Ricardian equivalence; money and credit; exchange rate regimes; new Keynesian macroeconomics; comovements of macro variables and macroeconomic forecasting.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. be aware of major recent developments in the field of macroeconomics
  2. have a basic understanding of the concepts and techniques of macroeconomic forecasting using an applied general equilibrium (AGE) model
  3. be aware of the major developments in the field of macroeconomics in the last ten years
  4. be familiar with different macroeconomic models used for policy making and their points of emphasis
  5. be able to make judicious policy predictions and undertake independent research studies in the unit.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC4670 - Economic development

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Pushkar Maitra

Coordinator(s)

Professor Pushkar Maitra

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ECC2000 or equivalent.

Synopsis

Characteristics and experience of developing countries; theories of economic growth and development; domestic and external sources of financial and human resources for development; the roles of international trade, investment, technology manufacturing and government in the development process.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. be familiar with the distinctive environmental, technical and social characteristics of developing countries
  2. understand the processes of structural change and social change which occur during development
  3. recognise the importance of institutions, technological change, and international trade, aid, and investment for the development process
  4. have skills necessary for the critical appraisal of theories of economic development.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC4690 - International trade

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Christis Tombazos

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Christis Tombazos

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ECC4650 and ECC3690 or equivalent.

Synopsis

Topics include the gains and costs of trading internationally; static and dynamic welfare effects of protection; the political economy of international trade policy; optimum policies in the presence of market power, uncertainty, and other market imperfections; trade policy instruments; strategies for trade liberalisation including regional trade agreements.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. be able to analyse the effects of international trade on real income and its distribution in various market structures
  2. have a sound understanding of the allocation and welfare effects of commercial policies
  3. possess the skills necessary to evaluate critically contemporary innovations in Australia's trade policies.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC4700 - Competition, regulation and policy

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Gennadi Kazakevitch

Coordinator(s)

Dr Gennadi Kazakevitch

Not offered in 2018

Prohibitions

ECC5470, ECX5470, ECF3900, ECX3900

Synopsis

Outline of the Australian and overseas approaches to competition policy; the economic background to the Competition and Consumer Act; market definition issues; evaluation of restrictive trade practices and mergers or alliances; structural reform of industries, access and monopoly regulation.

Outcomes

The learning objectives of this unit are to:

  1. be able to understand and analyse critically the economic reasons for government intervention to reduce the adverse effects of restrictive trade practices
  2. have an understanding of the Australian Competition and Consumer Commission (and its predecessor, the Trade Practices Commission)
  3. be able to evaluate recent decisions from the perspectives of an economist, lawyer, policy-maker and business manager.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC4710 - Post-Keynesian economics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Michael White

Coordinator(s)

Dr Mike White

Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

Topics include Keynes' aggregate demand and supply analysis and critique of automatic adjustment in the economy; the significance of an endogenous money supply for inflation; credit, speculation and financial instability; the national saving debate; investment and income distribution; the Phillips Curve and hysteresis.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. be familiar with the Post Keynesian framework of the economy, which draws on the work of J M Keynes and M Kalecki
  2. have a clear understanding of how the framework can be used to analyse a number of policy issues in Australia, including monetary policy, the roles of investment and saving, government budgetary strategies and income policies
  3. be able to critically analyse the framework through written work.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC4720 - Law and economics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Peter Forsyth (First semester)
Professor Russell Smyth (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Professor Russell Smyth

Not offered in 2018

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B3701.

Prohibitions

ECX5472

Synopsis

The unit applies the method of economics to the analysis of the law itself - to the structure of the common law, legal processes, legal institutions and statutory regulation, and to the impact of law on the behaviour of individuals and groups and the functioning of the economy. Topics include: is there a role for law and economics in studying the law, economics of crime and capital punishment, punitive damages, interest group theories of judicial independence and the determinants of judicial influence and prestige.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the two-way interrelationships between law and economics
  2. evaluate the key role of laws in setting the institutional framework in which economic decisions are taken and to critically evaluate current and proposed laws as determinants of economic performance
  3. critically assess the responses of households and business enterprises to current and alternative laws.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC4750 - Financial economics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Matthew Leister

Coordinator(s)

Dr Matthew Leister

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ECC4650 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

ECC5475, ECX5475

Synopsis

Theories of hedging and speculation; determination of spot and futures prices, and intertemporal allocation; market efficiency; expectations, including adaptive expectations and rational expectations.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. have an understanding of how to think about the trade-off between risk and return
  2. have the ability to read literature in financial economics.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC4790 - Project evaluation

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Paulo Santos

Coordinator(s)

Dr Paulo Santos

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

ECC4650 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

ECC5479, ECX5479

Synopsis

Topics include development and application of microeconomic theory for the economic evaluation of (public) sector investment projects and policies; investment analysis and criteria, discounting techniques; Pareto potential improvement criterion, shadow pricing, social discount rates, distribution issues, secondary benefits, risk and uncertainty, cost-effectiveness.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. apply the analytical framework, economic principles and techniques required for the economic evaluation of investment projects, policies and regulations, especially those involving the public sector
  2. appreciate the welfare economic foundations upon which economic evaluation is based
  3. design studies to estimate benefits and costs, in the presence of market distortions (eg controls, taxes and externalities), and for non-marketed goods (for example, time, noise, safety).

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC4810 - Public economics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Vai-Lam Mui

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Vai-Lam Mui

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ECC3810 or equivalent.

Synopsis

Models of decision making in the collective setting, utilising a number of tools, some of which will be familiar microeconomic ones. Economic approaches to collective decision environments, including 'new welfare economics', the 'Chicago' and 'Virginia' schools. Whenever possible, Australian policies will be examined in light of theory.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the issues and analysis of collective decisions
  2. become more discriminating observers of the political and policy environment
  3. be able to review market failures and consider the potential for solving these failures in the collective or political setting
  4. be able to examine problems of free-riding, incentives to vote, interest group influence, bureaucratic behaviour and constitutional frameworks
  5. understand the economist's role in the process of formulating public policy.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC4830 - Welfare economics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

To be advised

Coordinator(s)

To be advised

Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

A study of theories in welfare economics, including conditions for Pareto optimality, welfare criteria, social choice, consumer surpluses, second versus third best, externalities and public goods as well as problems of applying these theories to such areas as public utility pricing, optimal taxation, road congestion, environmental protection, and public spending.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the welfare economic foundation of public policies
  2. analyse the pros and cons, costs and benefits of economic measures and changes from the perspective of social welfare.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC4840 - Industrial organisation

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Dyuti Banerjee

Coordinator(s)

Dr Dyuti Banerjee

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

ECC5484, ECX5484, ECF5040

Synopsis

Theories of the firm, contract, property rights structure, market structure, hierarchy, bargaining, principal-agent relationship, research and development, advertising, and entry, exit, and pricing strategy. The equilibrium implications of the internal organisation of a firm and the organisational structure of the market in relation to strategic interactions between agents, information problems and related incentive mechanisms. Basic game theory and concepts of game equilibrium applied to the analysis of opportunistic behaviour and related transactions costs.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. be familiar with the modern developments of the theory of industrial organisation
  2. enhance their knowledge of intermediate microeconomics by incorporating information and endogenous transaction costs into analysis
  3. undertake theoretical and empirical research in the field of industrial organisation.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC4860 - Honours research project

12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Vinod Mishra

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Vinod Mishra

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Full year 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Admission to fourth year honours, Graduate Diploma in Economics or preliminary masters in the Departments of Economics, Econometrics or Accounting and Finance

Synopsis

Students select a preferred topic on which to conduct original research after consulting with the coordinator and supervisors. During the year students participate in research workshops, propose the research plan in written and oral form, conduct research, give a final presentation of the research findings, act as a reviewer of other students' research, submit their own final research paper, and are expected to engage in discussion of other students' presentations.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. gain the necessary analytical, communication, creative, critical thinking and technical research skills and apply them to ask and answer a research question that has significant theoretical or policy implications
  2. demonstrate the ability to analyse, comment, evaluate, discuss, and communicate research outcomes in written and oral form in a professional manner
  3. demonstrate the application of knowledge and skills with high level personal autonomy and accountability.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 288 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average six/eight hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC4870 - Health economics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Jennifer Watts

Coordinator(s)

Professor Jeff Richardson
Ms Jenny Watts

Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

A survey of theoretical issues in the economics of health systems and the major health policy issues confronting Australia. Emphasis is given to theories which differ from economic orthodoxy. Topics include market characteristics; market failure and regulation; equity and issues of social justice; demand analysis and human capital; the production of health and health care; theories of price formation; hospital models and hospital payment; optimal health insurance; and alternatives to Medicare.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. have a clear understanding of the theoretical debate over the 'special' characteristics of health and the health care and health insurance markets
  2. have a clear understanding of the major theories of the demand for health care
  3. have a clear understanding of the use of economic incentives to achieve allocative and technical efficiency in the production of both health and health care services
  4. be familiar with the social and institutional characteristics of the Australian health care market and the various proposals for its reform.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC4990 - Economic evaluation of health services

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Tony Harris

Coordinator(s)

Mr Anthony Harris

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

ECC4650

Synopsis

Principles and techniques used in the economic evaluation of health services. Topics include effectiveness, efficiency and economic evaluation; cost benefit analysis; cost effectiveness and cost utility analysis; multi-attribute utility analysis; measuring utility; psychometric measurement theory; ethical issues in resource allocation; decision criteria; time discounting; costing.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. techniques applied to the evaluation of health services and programs
  2. theoretical debates over discounting, decision criteria, and the measurement of both costs and the quality of life.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC5010 - Special topics in advanced economics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Liang Choon Wang

Coordinator(s)

Dr Liang Choon Wang

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in B3701 BCom (Honours in Economics) or B6001 Master of Applied Economics and Econometrics

Synopsis

This unit introduces advanced economic theory and/or methodology in various areas of applied, theoretical, and policy economic analysis. Topics will be tailored to special research needs of students, and may include, but not be limited to, advanced economic theory, economic modelling, experimental economics methodology, and computation and simulation techniques.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop an understanding in a specific subject area of advanced economics of the main theories or methods used in the current academic literature
  2. learn how to apply the specific area of economic theory or methodology to a research problem.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC5470 - Competition, regulation and policy

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Gennadi Kazakevitch

Coordinator(s)

Dr Gennadi Kazakevitch

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

ECC4700Not offered in 2018, ECX5470, ECF3900, ECX3900

Synopsis

Outline of the Australian and overseas approaches to competition policy; the economic background to the Competition and Consumer Act; market definition issues; evaluation of restrictive trade practices and mergers or alliances; structural reform of industries, access and monopoly regulation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. be able to understand and analyse critically the economic reasons for government intervention to reduce the adverse effects of restrictive trade practices
  2. have an understanding of the Australian Competition and Consumer Commission (and its predecessor, the Trade Practices Commission)
  3. be able to evaluate recent decisions from the perspectives of an economist, lawyer, policy-maker and business manager
  4. be able to research in-depth a current problem area relating to competition policy and practices that requires investigation beyond topics covered in lectures.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC5475 - Financial economics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Matthew Leister

Coordinator(s)

Dr Matthew Leister

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ECC4650 or ECF5410 or with permission

Prohibitions

ECC4750, ECX5475

Synopsis

Theories of hedging and speculation; determination of spot and futures prices, and intertemporal allocation; market efficiency; expectations, including adaptive expectations and rational expectations.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the trade-off between risk and return
  2. develop the ability to understand literature in financial economics
  3. understand the concepts of adaptive and rational expectations
  4. develop analytical, written and oral skills by writing and presenting research papers.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC5479 - Project evaluation

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Paulo Santos

Coordinator(s)

Dr Paulo Santos

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ECC4650 or ECF5410 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

ECC4790Not offered in 2018, ECX5479

Synopsis

Topics include development and application of microeconomic theory for the economic evaluation of (public) sector investment projects and policies; investment analysis and criteria, discounting techniques; Pareto potential improvement criterion, shadow pricing, social discount rates, distribution issues, secondary benefits, risk and uncertainty, cost-effectiveness.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. apply the analytical framework, economic principles and techniques required for the economic evaluation of investment projects, policies and regulations, especially those involving the public sector
  2. appreciate the welfare economic foundations upon which economic evaluation is based
  3. design studies to estimate benefits and costs, in the presence of market distortions (e.g. controls, taxes and externalities), and for non-marketed goods (for example, time, noise, safety).

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC5484 - Industrial organisation

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Dyuti Banerjee

Coordinator(s)

Dr Dyuti Banerjee

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

ECC4840, ECX5484, ECF5040

Synopsis

Theories of the firm, contract, property rights structure, market structure, hierarchy, bargaining, principal-agent relationship, research and development, advertising, and entry, exit, and pricing strategy. The equilibrium implications of the internal organisation of a firm and the organisational structure of the market in relation to strategic interactions between agents, information problems and related incentive mechanisms. Basic game theory and concepts of game equilibrium applied to the analysis of opportunistic behaviour and related transactions costs.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. be familiar with the modern developments of the theory of industrial organisation
  2. enhance knowledge of intermediate microeconomics by incorporating information and endogenous transaction costs into analysis
  3. undertake theoretical and empirical research in the field of industrial organisation.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC5650 - Microeconomic theory

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Jeffrey LaFrance

Coordinator(s)

Professor Jeffrey LaFrance

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 3194.

Prohibitions

BEX5650

Synopsis

The unit aims to introduce students to the building blocks of microeconomics. It will start with individual choice theory where the focus will be to explain the mathematical structure of the different types of objects of choice that are conceived by economists to model individual behaviour across a variety of contexts. This will be followed by an exhaustive discussion of how and when preferences over a set of objects can be represented using a real-valued utility function. The basic concepts and results in social choice theory, cooperative and non-cooperative game theory, and mechanism design will also be covered. The unit will highlight the important role of axiomatization, optimization, and strategic reasoning in microeconomics.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. gain an understanding of the mathematical building blocks of formal microeconomic analysis
  2. be able to express complex economic relationships using formal mathematical exposition
  3. understand the core concepts and results in individual and social choice theory, game theory, and mechanism design.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC5651 - Advanced microeconomic theory

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

ECC5650

Prohibitions

ECC6650

Synopsis

This unit will cover advanced topics in microeconomics and current research and policy issues. Topics may include an in-depth study of general equilibrium, mesoeconomics, new classical economics of specialisation, transaction costs, and inframarginal analysis, principal agent models and incentive regulation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. possess technical proficiency to initiate and pursue PhD level research
  2. be capable of developing an original research topic
  3. be in a position to undertake research in microeconomics and related fields.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC5660 - Macroeconomic theory

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Qingyuan Du

Coordinator(s)

Dr Qingyuan Du

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 3194.

Synopsis

Underpinnings of modern macroeconomics basic to models of growth and cyclical fluctuations as well as models of monetary and fiscal policies. Topics include neoclassical and endogenous growth theories; overlapping generations models with and without money; policy ineffectiveness issues; equilibrium business cycle as well as traditional Keynesian models of fluctuations; and models of incomplete nominal adjustment such as those of New-Keynesian and the Lucas-Supply variety.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop familiarity with the mathematical tools and techniques of modern macroeconomic theory
  2. understand the economics of growth and business cycle fluctuations
  3. appreciate the role of economic policy in the short and long-run
  4. enhance understanding of the basic theoretical approaches employed in specialist fields such as international economics, economic development/growth, dynamics stochastic general equilibrium and financial economics.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC5690 - Theories in international and development economics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Pushkar Maitra

Coordinator(s)

Professor Pushkar Maitra

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ECC4670 or ECC4690 or equivalent.

Synopsis

Evaluation of the neoclassical trade model and its extensions; foreign direct investment, capital flows and technology transfer; alternative explanations of comparative advantage including increasing returns and imperfect competition; geography and trade; new growth models; micro- and macroeconomic reform, structural change and factor mobility; institutions, transaction costs and rent seeking; theories of the state; the political economy of liberalisation and stabilisation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. gain an understanding of advanced theories in the areas of international and development economics
  2. identify the linkages between the two major areas of open economy analysis
  3. formulate policies on the basis of sound theoretical foundations and, correspondingly, to evaluate policy proposals
  4. acquire the skills necessary to assess critically new theoretical developments in this area.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC5800 - Economics seminar

0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

This graduate seminar unit is compulsory for PhD candidates and Master of Economics candidates in the Department of Economics. It is a non-weighted unit and is taken in addition to any prescribed coursework. Students will be assessed on the basis of attendance, participation and presentation. PhD candidates are required to present two seminars, Master of Economics candidates are expected to present one seminar. Seminar presentations must be made prior to submission of a candidate's research paper or thesis.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. extend advanced knowledge of the breadth of economics beyond area of specialisation
  2. develop skills for consolidation and dissemination of research findings
  3. develop oral and presentational skills required for effective presentations of research findings to peer audiences
  4. refine debating skills in professional peer settings.

ECC5810 - Public economics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Vai-Lam Mui

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Vai-Lam Mui

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 3194.

Synopsis

Topics in the theory of public goods including optimum conditions analysis; market failure and problems of political decision-making in relation to the supply of pure and impure public goods; separation of equity and efficiency aspects; possible applications to such issues as income redistribution, merit wants, pollution control and multi-level government.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. be familiar with the welfare framework, economic concepts and theoretical economic analysis of public goods at an advanced level
  2. be familiar with advanced economic analysis of political decision-making in the public choice literature
  3. have a sophisticated understanding of the implications of public goods analysis for government policy in major areas of public expenditure
  4. have a sophisticated appreciation of the limitations and deficiencies of theoretical and empirical economic analysis in this general area.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC5840 - Information, incentives and games

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Nick Feltovich

Coordinator(s)

Professor Nick Feltovich

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

ECC5650

Synopsis

This unit provides students with training in information economics and applied game theory. Discussion of key concepts in game theory; the nature of different kinds of information asymmetries (whether the informed party has private knowledge about certain events, whether he/she can undertake actions unobservable to others); and economic implications. Explore how different incentive mechanisms (signalling by the informed party and screening by the uninformed party) can be used to mitigate the impact of asymmetric information.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the key concepts in game theory, as well as the nature and economic implications of different kinds of information asymmetries
  2. understand how different incentive mechanisms -- for example, signalling by the informed party and screening by the uninformed party may be useful in mitigating the impact of asymmetric information on economic activities
  3. critically evaluate the extent to which a particular application of information economics and game theory succeeds in generating new testable implications regarding the phenomena under study
  4. construct formal models to study the importance of informational problems in explaining phenomena that are of interest to them.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC5850 - Mathematical economic theory

6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Birendra Rai

Coordinator(s)

Dr Birendra Rai

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Synopsis

This unit will primarily focus on explaining the structure of mathematics used in economics. It will start with an introduction to axiomatic set theory and highlight that almost all mathematical concepts of interest to economists can be thought of assets or subsets of suitably defined sets. The three main mathematical structured sets to be covered will be sets with an order structure, topological structure, and linear structure. The six main topics will be Set Theory, Metric and Topological Spaces, Properties of Functions and Correspondences, Linear and Normed Linear Spaces, Fixed Point and Separating Hyperplane Theorems, and a brief introduction to Static and Dynamic Optimization.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the basic structure of mathematics that is used by economists
  2. gain an in-depth knowledge of Order Structure, Topological Structure, and Linear Structure
  3. master the notion of functions and correspondences along with their key properties
  4. understand fixed point theorems, separating hyperplane theorems, and the different types of static and dynamic optimisation problems
  5. develop the ability to read technical articles on one's own.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC5861 - Economics research project

12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Vinod Mishra

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Vinod Mishra

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Full year 2018 (On-campus)

Synopsis

This unit provides students with the opportunities and skills to conduct, communicate, discuss, evaluate, and report research. Students find a supervisor in the Department of Economics and identify a preferred topic on which to conduct research after consulting with the supervisor. Students participate in a range of research activities and produce a final research paper.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. gain the necessary analytical, communication, creative, critical thinking, and technical research skills and apply them to ask and answer a research question that has significant theoretical or policy implications
  2. demonstrate the ability to analyse, comment, evaluate, discuss, and communicate research outcomes in written and oral form in a professional manner
  3. demonstrate the application of knowledge and skills with high level personal autonomy and accountability.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 288 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average six/eight hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC5900 - Microeconomics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Erte Xiao (First semester)
Dr Xiaodong Fan (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Erte Xiao (First semester)
Dr Xiaodong Fan (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

ECC2000, ETC2000, ECX9000

Synopsis

The behaviour of the economy is the result of a host of decisions made each day by millions of people. Prices and markets play a crucial role in economic behaviour, creating a system in which actions of individuals, guided by self-interest and without any central co-ordination or planning, create wealth for society as a whole. How individual workers, households and firms make decisions, and how they interact with each other, is the subject of microeconomics.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand how markets work, and how prices work to allocate resources
  2. understand the basic principles of how people make economic decisions, how they interact economically, and how the economy as a whole works
  3. understand the role of public policy, and the constraints on its operation, when markets fail
  4. understand how firms are organised and make decisions
  5. have developed learning skills and begun to acquire the techniques of thinking like an economist
  6. have sufficient grounding to attempt advanced studies in microeconomics in subsequent years.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Off-campus attendance requirements

3 hours per week


ECC5901 - Macroeconomics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Qingyuan Du (First semester)
Dr Siew Ling Yew (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Qingyuan Du (First semester)
Dr Siew Ling Yew (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

ECC2010, ETC2010, ECC9010, ECX9010

Synopsis

This unit focuses on macroeconomic theory and policy; managing aggregate demand; economic growth and fluctuations. Content covers the following topics in detail:

  • open-economy IS-LM framework and AD-AS framework
  • principles of monetary and fiscal policy and problems of implementation
  • alternative theories of aggregate supply; imperfect information; labour market rigidities
  • explaining and correcting inflation and unemployment.

This unit provides an intermediate level treatment of macroeconomic theory and policy. Its central focus is the analysis of the factors and processes that determine the macroeconomic performance of a nation as reflected in such indicators as aggregate output, employment, the price level and exchange rate, and the balance of payments.

Implications of this analysis for the formulation of national economic policy are explored with particular application to Australia.

Outcomes

On completion of this unit students should be able to:

  1. analyse systematically the forces that determine change in macroeconomic performance and living standards in Australia
  2. understand the relationship between the domestic economy and the international economic environment as reflected in the behaviour of the balance of payments and exchange rates
  3. evaluate critically the issues underlying important contemporary policy debates in Australia and elsewhere
  4. understand the nature and relevance of some significant recent developments in macroeconomics
  5. practice rigorous economic analysis and put that to constructive use in decision-making.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC5953 - Economics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor He-Ling Shi (First semester)
Dr Edwyna Harris (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor He-Ling Shi (First semester)
Dr Edwyna Harris (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (Evening)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

ECF5953, ECG9101, ECG5901, ECF9530

Synopsis

Microeconomics: scarcity; economic choice; economic systems; economic ideology; demand and supply analysis; consumer behaviour and elasticity; costs of production and profit maximisation; perfect competition and monopoly. Macroeconomics: aggregate demand and aggregate supply; Keynesian versus Neoclassical approaches; the money market and monetary policy; the government budget deficit and fiscal policy; the foreign exchange market and exchange rate policy; unemployment and inflation; the current and capital accounts.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. have a basic understanding of the methodology and principles of economics
  2. have a basic understanding of micro and macro economics
  3. present arguments and make decisions in the economic environment.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC6660 - Research topics in advanced macroeconomics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Siew Ling Yew

Coordinator(s)

Dr Siew Ling Yew

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

Students will be required to achieve a mark of at least 70% in all mandatory 6000 level coursework which needs to be completed prior to confirmation.

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 0029.

Synopsis

Advanced topics in macroeconomics, current research and policy issues. The topics may include an in-depth study of consumption, investment, inflation and monetary policy, unemployment, and empirical applications.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. possess technical proficiency to initiate and pursue PhD level research
  2. be capable of developing an original research topic
  3. be in a position to undertake research in macroeconomics and related fields.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC6690 - Research topics in open economy

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Pushkar Maitra

Coordinator(s)

Professor Pushkar Maitra

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 0029.

Synopsis

A research forum for the exploration of new directions in research and advanced specialist topics in open economy analysis. Students will be introduced to the forefront of contemporary analytical developments that are relevant for policy formation. The scope of the subject encompasses the pure theory of international trade, open economy macroeconomics and international finance, and development economics.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. possess first-hand knowledge of the contemporary research agenda in the economics of the open economy
  2. be conversant with the evolving research literature that is represented in working papers and formal publications of leading researchers at home and abroad
  3. possess the qualifications to undertake technically advanced research assignments that are of contemporary analytical and policy relevance
  4. gain practical experience in, and understanding of PhD level research work.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECF5040 - Industry economics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Mita Bhattacharya

Coordinator(s)

Dr Mita Bhattacharya

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Second semester 2018 (Evening)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B6001.

Prohibitions

ECC4840, ECC5484.

Synopsis

The unit develops and examines the theoretical and empirical relationships between the structure of industries, the behaviour of enterprises and market performance. The fundamental principles are applied to the advanced analysis of various forms of firms' interaction: entry deterrence, collusion, product differentiation, advertising, RandD, price discrimination, vertical integration. Welfare and policy issues will be discussed with the help of applied theory and empirical approach. In this respect recent journal articles will be used to analyse the concepts.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. to promote students understanding of the industry in which firms compete
  2. to understand strategic concepts and the use of such concepts with regard to economics, management, and organisational behaviour thereby developing an economic framework or way of thinking
  3. to understand the question 'how do we define the firm?', and the relationship of the definition of the firm to the 'make or buy' problem
  4. to establish an understanding of the dynamics of entry and exit in the marketplace by looking at strategies that incumbents employ to prevent entry or quicken exit by competitors
  5. to develop a competitive advantage framework for characterising and analysing a firm's strategic position within the market.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 55% + Examination: 45%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECF5060 - Applied economics research project

12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Klaus Abbink

Coordinator(s)

Professor Klaus Abbink
Professor Michael Ward

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Full year 2018 (Evening)
  • Second semester 2018 to First semester 2019 (Evening)

Prerequisites

Admission to B6001 Master of Applied Economics and Econometrics

Prohibitions

ECF5010, ECF5300.

Synopsis

This unit will be organised around a series of workshops to introduce the research methodology to students. Different fields of applied economics such as reveal preference theory, experiment economics, industrial organisation, fiscal and monetary theory and financial economics will then be introduced to showcase the research frontiers of applied economics.

Students will then be required to select a project in their area of specialisation and submit a 9000 word report and an oral presentation. Students will work closely with a personal supervisor to ensure that the research paper locates and masters new knowledge and demonstrates originality in both research content and intellectual argument.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop appreciation of major economic dimensions of the environment in which business operates such as public sector and policy, regulatory frameworks and international linkages
  2. develop the capability of critical evaluation of economic literature in the area of the applied economics and initiating a research topic for further development
  3. conduct, under the mentoring of a supervisor, innovative works to appropriately address the research topic
  4. develop analytical and writing skills in preparing research papers
  5. develop oral communication skills and gain experience in presenting economic analysis to non-specialist audiences.

Assessment

Oral presentation: 20% + Research Project: 80%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 288 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average six to eight hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECF5200 - Game theory and business strategy

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Anmol Ratan

Coordinator(s)

Dr Anmol Ratan

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Second semester 2018 (Evening)

Prerequisites

ECC2000 or equivalent, or ECF5927

Synopsis

Game theoretic analysis is fundamental to understanding modern business strategies and forms the basic infrastructure of strategy courses. The unit teaches the basic tools of Game Theory, and introduces a structured way to think about business interactions. Game theory originated in the middle of the twentieth century as the general study of strategic interactions and has found applications in a wide variety of contexts including economics, psychology, politics and evolutionary biology. It is this generality that is the source of its power. Accordingly, the unit develops game theory broadly with applications to strategic situations, including business as well as more general contexts.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. to develop a broad understanding of the basic principles of strategic analysis including solution concepts
  2. to apply the abstract theory to concrete problems.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECF5410 - Applied microeconomics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Zhijun Chen

Coordinator(s)

Dr Zhijun Chen

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (Evening)

Prohibitions

ECC5900 and ECF5927.

Synopsis

This unit applies microeconomic principles to study how consumers and firms make decisions to achieve their goals. In particular, it analyses how firms position themselves in the market and how they form their output and price decisions on the basis of their understanding of demand and supply conditions, market structures, and strategic interaction with other firms. Finally this unit looks at particular aspects of market failure and the role of government in relation to market failure.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. upgrade the analytical and quantitative skills for microeconomics above the intermediate level
  2. appreciate that microeconomic theory can be usefully applied in many facets of modern business decision making and public policy analysis
  3. gain hands-on experience in the application of microeconomic principles to the analysis of a range of economic issues
  4. think independently and communicate effectively.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECF5421 - Applied macroeconomics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Siew Ling Yew

Coordinator(s)

Dr Siew Ling Yew

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Second semester 2018 (Evening)

Prohibitions

ECC5901 and ECF5922Not offered in 2018.

Synopsis

The focus is on practical questions about how to achieve economic growth and control inflation in the context of a global economy, with special attention to policy formulation and implementation and the dilemmas facing decision-makers in the Government and private sectors. Methods for analysing the short-term, medium-run and long-term trends are also considered. Australia's experience during the last two decades, in particular the impact of the global financial crisis, are examined closely.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify current major macroeconomic issues
  2. understand and examine government macroeconomic policy options
  3. evaluate the impact of government policy on business decision marking
  4. evaluate the effects of events like the Asian financial crisis on the domestic economy.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECF5921 - International economics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Luc Borrowman (First semester)
Associate Professor Asadul Islam (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Luc Borrowman (First semester)
Associate Professor Asadul Islam (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (Evening)
  • Second semester 2018 (Off-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

ECF9210, ECM5921, ECS5921, ECX5921, ECX9210

Synopsis

The unit introduces basic economic principles and concepts and discusses economic interdependence notions and gains from trade and globalisation; the role of institutions in promoting and facilitating these concepts in the international economy; theories of trade, incorporating notions of absolute and comparative advantage; modern trade theory and its extensions; empirical evidence which highlight trade theory strengths and limitations; investigation and analysis of welfare effects of trade, using both theory and evidence to answer contentious concerns: does trade make the poor even poorer; are trade restrictions necessary to protect jobs; do larger trade benefits accrue to developed countries more than developing countries?

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. introduce basic economic principles, concepts and ideas
  2. identify and understand the theoretical foundations of why economies engage in trade
  3. critically analyse issues, concerns and developments in the international economy and be able to interpret their impacts on the Australian economy.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECF5922 - Trade, finance and foreign exchange

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Horag Choi

Coordinator(s)

Dr Horag Choi

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

Students must be enrolled in course 3842 to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions

ECF2721, ECG2721, ECW2721

Synopsis

This unit focuses on the topics of international finance and trade. This includes the importance of international finance, the determination of exchange rates, foreign investment, parity conditions, hedging and speculation in foreign exchange markets, foreign exchange markets-spot, forward, futures and options markets, the balance of payments accounts and the effect of macroeconomic policies on trade balance.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the operation of foreign exchange markets
  2. understand the key factors that influence international financial markets
  3. analyse and evaluate the benefits and disadvantages of the various exchange rate systems
  4. understand the concept of payments among nations and macroeconomic policies
  5. understand and analyse the interactions among the foreign exchange rate, trades and macroeconomic policies.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECF5923 - Macroeconomics and monetary policy

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Luc Borrowman

Coordinator(s)

Dr Luc Borrowman

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B6001 or B6014.

Prohibitions

ECF2331 and ECC5901

Synopsis

This unit examines the scope for policy to improve macroeconomic performance. It will cover: the cyclical behaviour of the economy; the role of monetary, fiscal and exchange rate policies in influencing economic activities; the implementation and operation of monetary policy; the relationship of exchange rates to monetary policy; major factors determining movements in interest rates and exchange rates in both the intermediate and long terms.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the theoretical and practical importance of distinguishing between the short-run and long-run impacts of macroeconomic policy
  2. understand the importance of and the differences between monetary, fiscal and exchange rate policies
  3. be able to critically assess macroeconomic policy
  4. understand the implementation and operation of monetary policy and critically assess its impact on the national economy
  5. be familiar with economic factors which are of a major interest to stakeholders in the banking and finance industries.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECF5927 - Managerial economics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Anmol Ratan

Coordinator(s)

Dr Anmol Ratan

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B6001 or B6014.

Prohibitions

ECC5900, ECF2731, ECG2731, ECS2731, ECW2731.

Synopsis

Students will develop sound knowledge of the differing views of the firm and industry. Topics include: the firm within a capitalist economic system; the macroeconomic constraints on the firm; the market structural constraints on the firm; differing perspectives of the firm - the conventional economic, technological view, the accounting, management and marketing views, the recent transaction costs and new classical view; how these different areas explain current issues such as downsizing and electronic commerce.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand and recognise the various processes involved in investment decision making
  2. understand and explain the relevant factors behind risk analysis and risk management
  3. understand and analyse firm pricing strategies
  4. recognise and critically evaluate theories of the organisation known as the firm and the role of managers in such an organisation; and develop an understanding of strategic games in the context of business applications.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECF5953 - Economics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor He-Ling Shi (First semester)
Dr Edwyna Harris (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor He-Ling Shi (First semester)
Dr Edwyna Harris (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (Evening)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

ECG9101, ECG5901, ECF9530

Synopsis

Microeconomics: scarcity; economic choice; economic systems; economic ideology; demand and supply analysis; consumer behaviour and elasticity; costs of production and profit maximisation; perfect competition and monopoly. Macroeconomics: aggregate demand and aggregate supply; Keynesian versus Neoclassical approaches; the money market and monetary policy; the government budget deficit and fiscal policy; the foreign exchange market and exchange rate policy; unemployment and inflation; the current and capital accounts.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. have a basic understanding of the methodology and principles of economics
  2. have a basic understanding of micro and macro economics
  3. present arguments and make decisions in the economic environment.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECM5921 - Introduction to international economics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Poon Wai Ching (First semester)
Associate Professor Grace Lee Hooi (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Poon Wai Ching (First semester)
Associate Professor Grace Lee Hooi (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (Evening)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

ECF9210, ECF5921, ECS5921, ECX9210

Synopsis

The unit introduces basic micro and macroeconomic principles and concepts. It discusses economic interdependence notions and gains from trade and globalisation with application to Malaysia and other Asian countries; attempts of Asian institutions at promoting and facilitating these concepts in the international economy; theories of trade, notions of absolute and comparative advantage; modern trade theory and its extensions; empirical evidence which highlight trade theory strengths and limitations with respect to Asia; investigation and analysis of welfare effects of trade, using both theory and evidence to answer contentious concerns: does trade make the poor in Asia even poorer; are trade restrictions necessary to protect jobs; do larger trade benefits accrue to developed countries more than developing countries and if so why?

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. introduce basic economic principles, concepts and ideas
  2. identify and understand the theoretical foundations of why economies engage in trade
  3. critically analyse issues, concerns and developments in the international economy and be able to interpret their impacts on the Australian economy.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECM5953 - Economics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Shahriar Kabir (First semester)
Dr Ashutosh Sarker (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Shahriar Kabir (First semester)
Dr Ashutosh Sarker (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (Evening)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

ECF5953, ECF9530

Synopsis

This unit explores:

Microeconomics: scarcity, economic choice, economic systems, economic ideology, demand and supply analysis, consumer behaviour and elasticity, costs of production and profit maximisation, and perfect competition and monopoly.

Macroeconomics: aggregate demand and aggregate supply, Keynesian versus Neoclassical approaches, the money market and monetary policy, the government budget deficit and fiscal policy, the foreign exchange market and exchange rate policy, unemployment and inflation, and current and capital accounts.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop a basic understanding of the methodology and principles of economics
  2. develop a basic understanding of micro and macro economics
  3. present arguments and make decisions in the economic environment.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated reading, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECS5921 - Introduction to international economics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Kwame Osei-Assibey

Coordinator(s)

Dr Kwame Osei-Assibey

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • Term 1 2018 (On-campus block of classes)
  • Term 3 2018 (On-campus block of classes)

Prohibitions

ECF9210, ECF5921, ECM5921, ECW5921, ECX9210

Synopsis

The unit introduces basic micro and macroeconomic principles and concepts. It discusses economic interdependence notions and gains from trade and globalisation with application to South Africa and the African continent; the role of institutions in promoting and facilitating these concepts in the international economy; theories of trade, incorporating notions of absolute and comparative advantage; modern trade theory and its extensions; empirical evidence with respect to Africa which highlight trade theory strengths and limitations; investigation and analysis of welfare effects of trade, using both theory and evidence to answer contentious concerns whether trade make the poor even poorer; whether trade restrictions necessary to protect jobs; and whether larger trade benefits accrue to developed countries more than developing countries; as well as regional integration in Africa.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. introduce basic economic principles, concepts and ideas
  2. identify and understand the theoretical foundations of why economies engage in trade
  3. critically analyse issues, concerns and developments in the international economy and be able to interpret their impacts on the South African and other African economies.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETC4010 - Special reading unit in econometrics honours

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Brett Inder

Coordinator(s)

Professor Brett Inder

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

It is recommended that students have completed at least three third year econometrics units.

Synopsis

A unit of study in a special field of econometrics in which no formal unit is available. The supervisor will prescribe a list of references, consult frequently with the student and set whatever written work and examinations are deemed appropriate.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop an understanding of the key academic literature in a particular area of econometrics or statistical research
  2. learn how to undertake original research, either theoretical or applied.

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETC4110 - Actuarial practice 1

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Mike Callan

Coordinator(s)

Dr Mike Callan

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have completed the following units: ETC2430, ETC3430, ETC3530, ETC3420 and ETC3510, or completion of 24 credit points in course 4439

Synopsis

Unit ETC4110 covers the subject material required for Actuaries Institute subject Part IIA The Actuarial Control Cycle. The student is introduced to the concept of the Actuarial Control Cycle and how it can be applied in practical commercial situations in a wide range of insurance and related applications. This covers life insurance, general insurance, health insurance, pension or superannuation funds and investment issues. The unit also develops the student's understanding of a wide range of commercial background matters in insurance, pensions and investment - covering features of financial products, the related business environment in Australia, and Government policies affecting insurance and related industries. Risk management is introduced both in terms of the risk issues involved in offering insurance and related financial products, and the general concepts of Enterprise Risk Management.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. discuss and apply an actuarial control cycle in a variety of practical commercial situations
  2. apply the tests of professionalism
  3. examine the need for and impact of regulation and government policy on medium and long term commercial decisions
  4. analyse the main features and risks of financial products and contracts, from the point of view of consumers and providers
  5. demonstrate an understanding of enterprise risk management and its role in organisational management
  6. apply a risk assessment framework to identify and assess the risks in a range of commercial situations.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETC4130 - Asset liability management

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Dan Zhu

Coordinator(s)

Dr Dan Zhu

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed ETC4110 or be granted permission by the Chief Examiner to undertake this unit.

Synopsis

Unit ETC4130 covers the subject material required for Actuaries Institute subject Part IIB Investment and Asset Modelling. The unit gives an introduction into the investment background for Australian financial institutions, especially those offering insurance and related financial products. It then addresses issues in asset liability management. The student is introduced to the characteristics and behaviour of various investment types and the understanding of the relationship between risk and return. Valuation methods for investment types are addressed. Economic and financial theories relevant to investment are studied. The techniques of setting investment objectives for different investment funds are covered. More detailed issues in relation to asset liability management are then addressed, including how investment policy for assets may assist in managing liabilities for financial institutions.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. be able to describe and critically discuss the characteristics and behaviour of different Investment types under different economic conditions, understanding the relationship between risk and return and recognising risk factors which includes issuer default, counterparty failure, systemic liquidity, the collapse of speculative bubbles, shocks to the economic system and cyclical/structural changes
  2. develop an understanding of the methods used for valuation of the common forms of debt, equity, property and derivative securities. In particular students should be aware of the valuation methods and principles, data requirements and sources and the implicit assumptions and limitations of these models
  3. develop an understanding of the application and limitations of the major economic and financial theories relevant to investment, and be able to critically evaluate these theories including the efficient market hypothesis, the capital asset pricing model, multi-factor pricing models and theories from behavioural finance
  4. define appropriate investment objectives based on the liability profile of a fund
  5. specify appropriate investment constraints, based on the liability profile of a fund
  6. identify the characteristics of different types of asset models
  7. critically evaluate the appropriateness of an asset model for a given context
  8. derive consistent asset assumptions for asset models, taking into account historical data, prevailing industry expectations, contemporary investment literature, and other practical considerations such as tax
  9. apply asset assumptions, and the linkages contained within asset models, to real world situations
  10. describe and critically evaluate different approaches to asset allocation.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETC4400 - Econometric theory

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Don Poskitt

Coordinator(s)

Professor Don Poskitt

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

ETC3400

Synopsis

The objective of this unit is to outline the general principles that underlie what has become known as the Generalized Method of Moments (GMM). The discussion is motivated by reference to econometric and statistical techniques, and simple practical examples with which students should be familiar. It is shown that GMM finds application in many areas of econometrics and business statistics, and that GMM may be viewed as a methodology that encompasses many econometric and statistical techniques. Broad topic headings are: Classical Method of Moments and Regression (OLS and IV), GMM, Identification, Asymptotic Distribution Theory for GMM, GMM and Optimal Inference.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. build upon existing concepts developed in previous courses and to outline the basic principles under-lying what has become known as the Generalized Method of Moments (GMM)
  2. outline the classical Method of Moments and relationship of Regression to the Method of Moments
  3. discuss Identification and Asymptotic Distribution Theory in the context of the GMM
  4. examine GMM in relation to minimum variance unbiased estimation, and GMM based inference
  5. consider special cases of single equation and simultaneous equations GMM.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETC4410 - Applied econometrics 2

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Daniel Melser

Coordinator(s)

Dr Daniel Melser

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ETC3400, ETC3410, ETC3450 or equivalent.

Synopsis

This unit involves a critical review of recent empirical work in econometrics. The topics to be covered include i) the specification and estimation of systems of consumer demand equations and producer demand and supply equations and extensions of these methods to other areas; and ii) structural vector autoregressions and error correction models, together with some practical applications that address macroeconomic issues. On completion of this unit students should be familiar with recent developments in these fields and have developed the skills to undertake empirical work. Further, students should be able to critically evaluate empirical work and related policy implications.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. specify the structure of consumer demand systems
  2. use duality theory to generalise these specifications
  3. understand the use of appropriate specific estimation techniques
  4. extend these ideas to producer demand and supply models
  5. consider a number of empirical applications, and derive policy implications
  6. become competent in handling demand and production data using econometric software
  7. specify, estimate and interpret growth regressions
  8. understand the modelling of trends, cycles and structural breaks
  9. specify, estimate and interpret structural vector autoregressions and error correction models.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETC4420 - Microeconometrics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Xueyan Zhao

Coordinator(s)

Professor Xueyan Zhao

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must passed ETC3400, ETC3410 or equivalent or be granted permission by the Chief Examiner to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions

ETC5420, BEX4420

Synopsis

This unit involves the analysis of micro-level cross-sectional and panel data to study the behaviour of individuals and other micro-units as decision makers. It studies the specification, estimation, inference and evaluation of a range of microeconometric models. These include models for discrete, count, duration, censored or truncated dependent variables and examine issues arisen from sample selection and endogenous treatment. The aim of the unit is also for students to gain hands-on experience and computation skills for analysing large scale micro datasets. The computing package used for the unit is STATA.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. become familiar with typical features and structures of micro datasets
  2. be able to identify microeconometric models suitable for given micro datasets and given research objectives
  3. be able to specify, estimate, evaluate and analyse econometric models with dependent variables that are binary choices, multinomial discrete choices, durations, censored or truncated, using a given dataset
  4. be able to summarise and present key model results and measures of interest in tables and graphs
  5. be comfortable and proficient with the use of STATA software to manage and analyse large datasets
  6. have had hands-on experience with analysing several real world micro datasets in health, labour, finance and marketing research, through computing exercises and a written assignment.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETC4430 - Quantitative economic policy

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor John Madden

Coordinator(s)

Professor John Madden

Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

This unit covers the theoretical structure and application of computable general equilibrium (CGE) models. Topics include:

  • the derivation of the model's non-linear equation system
  • evaluation of coefficients and parameters, model closure, specification of economic shocks, solution techniques and interpretation of results.

During hands-on computing sessions, students will undertake simulations of a series of economic policy questions and analyse results.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. acquire an understanding of the main elements of the theoretical structure of a computable general equilibrium (CGE) model
  2. acquire an understanding of how a CGE model is calibrated and implemented on computer
  3. develop the ability to conduct basic simulations with a comparative-static CGE model
  4. acquire skills in the analysis of the more readily interpretable model results in terms of model theory, data base, closure and shocks
  5. develop an elementary understanding of the key features of dynamic CGE models.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETC4460 - Financial econometrics 2

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Catherine Forbes

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Catherine Forbes

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed ETC3460 and one of ETC3400, ETC3410, ETC3450, ETC3510 or equivalent.

Synopsis

This unit introduces students to a range of advanced, current techniques used in analysing financial data. Topics covered include the analysis of the time series and distributional features of financial data; the use of stochastic volatility and realised volatility models to capture time-varying volatility, including long memory in volatility; the use of econometric methods to estimate Value at Risk; the modelling of transactions data using trade duration models and transaction-based volatility models; continuous time processes and the application of econometric techniques to option pricing; and the use of generalised method of moments in financial models.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically evaluate alternative methods of modelling asset return volatility
  2. explain the role of volatility modelling in the measurement of risk and in the pricing of financial derivatives
  3. describe the role of continuous time stochastic processes in the pricing of financial derivatives
  4. evaluate econometric models for high frequency data
  5. evaluate the use of generalized method of moments in financial models.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETC4541 - Bayesian time series econometrics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Gael Martin

Coordinator(s)

Professor Gael Martin

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ETC3400 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

ETC5410

Synopsis

This unit introduces students to both foundational and methodological aspects of Bayesian econometrics. Topics covered include a review of the philosophical and probabilistic foundations of Bayesian inference; the contrast between the Bayesian and frequentist (or classical) statistical paradigms; the use of prior information via the specification of objective, Jeffreys and subjective prior distributions; Bayesian linear regression; the use of simulation techniques in Bayesian inference, including Markov chain Monte Carlo algorithms; Bayesian analysis of Gaussian and non-Gaussian time series econometric models, including state space models; and the Kalman filter as a Bayesian updating rule.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. appreciate the importance of Bayesian statistical techniques in econometric research and understand the differences between the Bayesian and frequentist statistical paradigms
  2. acquire the skills necessary to derive Bayesian results analytically, in simple models
  3. demonstrate an understanding of simulation methods and be able to implement these methods in empirically realistic econometric models
  4. understand the Kalman filter and its role in Bayesian inference in linear time series models.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETC4860 - Honours research project

12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Xueyan Zhao

Coordinator(s)

Professor Xueyan Zhao

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Full year 2018 (On-campus)

Synopsis

Topics for seminar presentation are selected in consultation with the coordinator. A list of possible topics will be distributed but students are encouraged to propose subjects of interest to them, based in their own discipline. Students present one paper, act as formal discussant on another, and are expected to engage in discussion of others.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop the skills to present an area of research in the discipline of econometrics or statistics in a non-technical manner, both written and oral
  2. grow in ability to ask and address critical questions about research.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 288 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average six/eight hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETC5010 - Special reading unit 2

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Farshid Vahid

Coordinator(s)

Professor Farshid Vahid

Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop an understanding of the key academic literature in a particular area of econometrics or statistical research
  2. learn how to undertake original research, either theoretical or applied.

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETC5020 - Special reading unit 3

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Farshid Vahid

Coordinator(s)

Professor Farshid Vahid

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

Students must be granted permission by the Chief Examiner to undertake this unit.

Synopsis

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop an understanding of the key academic literature in a particular area of econometrics or statistical research
  2. learn how to undertake original research, either theoretical or applied.

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETC5242 - Statistical thinking

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Catherine Forbes

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Catherine Forbes

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B6001 or B6014.

Synopsis

This unit focuses on the tools for a large, digital data world, including the building blocks for business analytics, modern insurance and risk assessment. A computational approach is employed to teach the concepts of statistics, and decision making in the presence of uncertainty. An important aspect will be to develop skills for compiling data from multiple sources to support better decisions and models. Topics covered will include simulation and randomisation methods, decision and credibility theory, data wrangling and visualisation, methods for time series, Bayesian analysis, models for risk and loss distributions.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. use simulation of statistical games to understand decision theory
  2. learn about statistical distributions, including those used for loss functions
  3. compile data from various digital sources, handling missing values, clean, transform, visualise and summarise
  4. understand and explain the basic concepts of Bayesian statistics
  5. obtain a basic understanding of working with temporal data and time series models
  6. use randomisation methods to assess uncertainty in relation to hypothesis testing, decision-making, risk assessment and model assessment.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETC5252 - Probability and statistical inference for economics and business

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Donald Poskitt

Coordinator(s)

Professor Donald Poskitt

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in B6001 or B6014.

Prohibitions

MTH2222, ETC2520

Synopsis

An introduction to probability and statistical inference for use in economics and business. Topics covered include random variables, moments and cumulants generating function, discrete and continuous distributions, independence, jointly distributed random variables, conditional random variables, the central limit theorem, sampling distribution, properties of estimators, confidence intervals, tests of hypotheses.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand concepts of probability, statistical inference, generating functions and cumulants
  2. derive and use generating functions to evaluate moments and establish the distribution of linear combinations of independent random variables
  3. understand and apply the main methods of estimation and the main properties of estimators
  4. construct confidence intervals for unknown parameters and test hypotheses
  5. develop written, presentational and group work skills through a series of assessed essays, assignments and tutorial work
  6. describe the use of methods learnt during the course of this unit in business and economics.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETC5340 - Principles of econometrics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Gael Martin

Coordinator(s)

Professor Gael Martin

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ETF2100, ETC2410, ETC3440 or equivalent.

Synopsis

This unit provides a formal treatment of the core principles underlying econometric and statistical analysis, with particular focus given to likelihood-based inference. Topics covered include the likelihood principle and maximum likelihood estimation; minimum variance unbiased estimation; maximum likelihood asymptotic distribution theory; likelihood-based hypothesis testing; and quasi-maximum likelihood inference. The theoretical developments are supplemented by numerical results produced using computer simulation. Consideration is also given to the numerical optimisation techniques used to implement likelihood-based procedures in practice.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. consolidate the core principles underlying econometric and statistical analysis
  2. understand and implement the technique of maximum likelihood estimation and develop an appreciation of the associated asymptotic distribution theory
  3. understand and implement likelihood-based hypothesis testing and quasi-maximum likelihood inference
  4. develop the skills needed to demonstrate and explore theoretical sampling properties using computer simulation
  5. critically analyse the application of principles underlying econometric analysis.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETC5341 - Applied econometrics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Jun Sung Kim

Coordinator(s)

Dr Jun Sung Kim

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ETF2100, ETC2410, ETC3440 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

ETC3410, ETC4341, ETW3410, ECC3410

Synopsis

This unit presents econometric models and techniques that are widely used in modern applied econometrics. Emphasis is placed on models that address the special problems that arise when analysing microeconomic data, that is, data at the level of individual consumers, households and firms. The topics covered include modelling discrete dependent variables, modelling data sets that have both a cross-section and a time-series dimension and conducting inference in models in which the dependent variable is jointly determined with one or more of the regressors. The models taught in this unit are widely used in empirical work in economics, finance and marketing.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. conduct statistical inference in statistical models with a binary dependent variable
  2. conduct statistical inference in statistical models with one or more endogenous explanatory variables
  3. conduct statistical inference in a system of simultaneous equations
  4. conduct statistical inference on data that has both a time series and a cross section dimension
  5. interpret the results of econometric analysis of data in context
  6. describe the role of econometrics as it applies to the analysis of data.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETC5342 - Applied insurance methods

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Dan Zhu

Coordinator(s)

Dr Dan Zhu

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ETC2420, ETC2520, ETC5252, MTH2222 or equivalent.

Synopsis

To provide a further grounding in the mathematics and statistics of short term insurance risk.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. calculate probabilities and moments of loss distributions both with and without limits and risk-sharing arrangements
  2. construct risk models involving frequency and severity distributions and calculate the moment generating function and the moments for the risk models both with and without simple reinsurance arrangements
  3. explain the concept of ruin for a risk model
  4. describe the fundamental concepts of risk rating and apply them to simple experience rating systems
  5. describe and apply techniques for analysing a delay (or run-of) triangle and projecting the ultimate position
  6. critically analyse the application of principles underlying econometric analysis.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETC5343 - Financial mathematics under uncertainty

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Athanasios Pantelous

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Athanasios Pantelous

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ETC2430 or equivalent.

Synopsis

Financial mathematics under uncertainty will apply the ideas of interest rates, present values, cash flow modelling and profit testing in the context of certain payments and payments dependent on individual deaths or other uncertain risk. We will also introduce stochastic modelling techniques applied to actuarial and financial contexts.

Students will cover the topics of present values and accumulated values, equations of value, Markov modelling, survival models, life tables and contingent products.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the use of cash flow models to visualise a series of income and outgo within a financial context
  2. understand and be able to manipulate interest rates, to convert interest rates between effective and nominal and to appropriate interest rates to cash flows
  3. explain the concept of survival models
  4. Understand and apply the concepts of Markov chains and jump processes to financial and actuarial contexts.
  5. understand mortality rates, the development of mortality tables and their use in pricing actuarial products
  6. understand the different types of actuarial products including annuity and assurance type products, their pricing and notation
  7. explain the sequence of procedures that should be applied to analyse a given dataset
  8. critically analyse the application of principles underlying economic analysis.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETC5345 - Time series analysis for business and economics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Mr John Stapleton

Coordinator(s)

Mr John Stapleton

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ETF2100, ETC2410, ETC3440 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

ETC4345, ETC3450

Synopsis

This unit provides an introduction to modern time series methods. The topics covered include a review of stationary, univariate ARMA models, stochastic and deterministic trends, testing for unit roots, vector auto regressions, multivariate cointegration and error correction models.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. model and forecast stationary autoregressive and moving average time series
  2. test for unit roots in univariate time series
  3. analyse the relationships between multiple, stationary time series
  4. test for, estimate and interpret the long run relationships between non-stationary time series
  5. describe the use of methods learnt during the course of this unit in business and economics.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETC5346 - Financial econometrics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr David Frazier

Coordinator(s)

Dr David Frazier

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ETF2100, ETC2410, ETC3440 or equivalent.

Synopsis

This unit focuses on the specification, estimation and testing of asset pricing models, including the capital asset pricing model and extensions; the statistical characteristics of financial data emphasising skewness, kurtosis and volatility aspects; volatility models such as ARCH models of financial time series, with applications to stock prices, derivatives, and exchange rates including the forecast performance of these models.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the time series and distributional features of financial data
  2. explain appropriate specification, estimation and testing of asset pricing models
  3. evaluate the need for volatility models for financial returns
  4. describe the specification and estimation of conditional volatility models
  5. critically analyse the use of time series in pricing of financial products.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETC5351 - Modelling in finance and insurance

6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Fima Klebaner

Coordinator(s)

Professor Fima Klebaner
Professor Don Poskitt

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ETC2520 or equivalent.

Synopsis

Mathematical definition of options and other financial derivatives; probability models; mathematical models of random processes; applications; numerical methods; Monte Carlo methods.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop an understanding of the modern approach to evaluation of uncertain future payoffs
  2. develop an understanding of the concepts of arbitrage and fair games and their relevance to finance and insurance
  3. develop an understanding of the concepts of conditional expectation and martingales and their relation to pricing of financial derivatives
  4. develop an understanding of the random processes such as Random Walk, Brownian Motion and Diffusions and be able to apply them for modelling real life processes and risk models
  5. obtain skills to use Ito's formula
  6. develop the skills to price options by using the Binomial and Black-Scholes models
  7. ability to simulate the price process and obtain prices by simulation
  8. ability to formulate discrete time Risk Model in Insurance and use it for control of probabilities of ruin.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETC5353 - Insurance and pensions

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Dan Zhu

Coordinator(s)

Dr Dan Zhu

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ETC2430 or equivalent.

Synopsis

This unit focuses on the modelling and valuation of cash flows dependent on death, survival, or other uncertain risks.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. calculate, using ultimate or select mortality, net premiums and net premium reserves for increasing and decreasing benefits and annuities
  2. develop techniques for the valuation of annuity and assurance products involving two lives, and the use of actuarial functions in that situation
  3. develop methods which can be used to model cash flows contingent upon competing risks
  4. develop the technique of discounted emerging costs as used in profit tests, pricing assessments and reserving calculations for various insurance and pension products
  5. address practical issues such as guarantees and options, risk classification and the effects of the pricing and reserving basis on the emergence of profit
  6. describe the use of multi decrement models in the valuation of actuarial liabilities.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETC5400 - Research topics in econometrics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Farshid Vahid

Coordinator(s)

Professor Farshid Vahid

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

ETC4400Not offered in 2018 or ETC4410 or permission

Synopsis

This unit will cover specialised topics from current research areas of staff members with the aim of exposing students to the level of technical detail required for econometric research.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine methodological developments at the forefront of econometric research
  2. explain the importance of probabilistic and statistical techniques in econometric research.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETC5410 - Bayesian time series econometrics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Gael Martin

Coordinator(s)

Professor Gael Martin
Associate Professor Catherine Forbes

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ETC3400, ETC5340 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

ETC4541

Synopsis

This unit introduces students to both foundational and methodological aspects of Bayesian econometrics. Topics covered include a review of the philosophical and probabilistic foundations of Bayesian inference; the contrast between the Bayesian and frequentist (or classical) statistical paradigms; the use of prior information via the specification of subjective, Jeffreys and conjugate prior distributions; Bayesian linear regression; the use of simulation techniques in Bayesian inference, including Markov chain Monte Carlo algorithms; Bayesian analysis of Gaussian and non-Gaussian time series econometric models, including state space models; and the Kalman filter as a Bayesian updating rule.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. appreciate the importance of Bayesian statistical techniques in econometric research and understand the differences between the Bayesian and frequentist statistical paradigms
  2. acquire the skills necessary to derive Bayesian results analytically, in simple models
  3. demonstrate an understanding of simulation methods and be able to implement these methods in empirically realistic econometric models
  4. understand the Kalman filter and its role in Bayesian inference in linear time series models.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETC5420 - Microeconometrics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Xueyan Zhao

Coordinator(s)

Professor Xueyan Zhao

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed ETC3400, ETC3410 or equivalent or be granted permission by the Chief Examiner to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions

ETC5420, BEX4420

Synopsis

This unit involves the analysis of micro-level cross-sectional and panel data to study the behaviour of individuals and other micro-units as decision makers. It studies the specification, estimation, inference and evaluation of a range of microeconometric models. These include models for discrete, count, duration, censored or truncated dependent variables and examine issues arisen from sample selection and endogenous treatment. The aim of the unit is also for students to gain hands-on experience and computation skills for analysing large scale micro datasets. The computing package used for the unit is STATA.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. become familiar with typical features and structures of micro datasets
  2. be able to identify microeconometric models suitable for given micro datasets and given research objectives
  3. be able to specify, estimate, evaluate and analyse econometric models with dependent variables that are binary choices, multinomial discrete choices, durations, censored or truncated, using a given dataset
  4. be able to summarise and present key model results and measures of interest in tables and graphs
  5. be comfortable and proficient with the use of STATA software to manage and analyse large datasets
  6. have had hands-on experience with analysing several real world micro datasets in health, labour, finance and marketing research, through computing exercises and a written assignment.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETC5440 - Econometric theory

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Don Poskitt

Coordinator(s)

Professor Don Poskitt

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

ETC3400 or ETC5340

Prohibitions

ETX5440Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

The objective of this unit is to outline the general principles that underlie what has become known as the Generalized Method of Moments (GMM). The discussion is motivated by reference to econometric and statistical techniques, and simple practical examples with which students should be familiar. It is shown that GMM finds application in many areas of econometrics and business statistics, and that GMM may be viewed as a methodology that encompasses many econometric and statistical techniques. Broad topic headings are: Classical Method of Moments and Regression (OLS and IV), GMM, Identification, Asymptotic Distribution Theory for GMM, GMM and Optimal Inference.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. build upon existing concepts developed in previous courses and to outline the basic principles under-lying what has become known as the Generalised Method of Moments (GMM)
  2. outline the classical Method of Moments and relationship of Regression to the Method of Moments
  3. discuss Identification and Asymptotic Distribution Theory in the context of the GMM
  4. examine GMM in relation to minimum variance unbiased estimation, and GMM based inference
  5. consider special cases of single equation and simultaneous equations GMM.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETC5441 - Applied econometrics 2

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Daniel Melser

Coordinator(s)

Dr Daniel Melser

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of the following before undertaking this unit: ETC3400, ETC5340, ETC3410, ETC5341, ETC3450, ETC5345, ETF3200, ETF5320.

Synopsis

This unit involves a critical review of recent empirical work in econometrics. The topics to be covered include i) the specification and estimation of systems of consumer demand equations and producer demand and supply equations and extensions of these methods to other areas; and ii) structural vector autoregressions and error correction models, together with some practical applications that address macroeconomic issues. On completion of this unit students should be familiar with recent developments in these fields and have developed the skills to undertake empirical work. Further, students should be able to critically evaluate empirical work and related policy implications.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. specify the structure of consumer demand systems
  2. use duality theory to generalise these specifications
  3. understand the use of appropriate specific estimation techniques
  4. extend these ideas to producer demand and supply models
  5. consider a number of empirical applications, and derive policy implications
  6. become competent in handling demand and production data using econometric software
  7. familiarity with recent developments in macroeconomic analysis and have developed skills to undertake applied macroeconomic analysis
  8. critically analyse the use of econometrics to analyse data.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETC5443 - Quantitative economic policy

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor John Madden

Coordinator(s)

Professor John Madden

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

ECC2010 and ETC3400 or ETC3410

Prohibitions

ETC4430Not offered in 2018 and ETX5443Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

This course surveys contemporary macroeconometric and applied general equilibrium models as they are used for policy analysis. The focus of these models extends from fiscal, monetary and tax policy, through trade, tariffs and industry policy, to the environment and greenhouse gases. In their major written assignment, all students are expected to come to grips with some of the practical issues involved in policy modelling.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. acquire an understanding of the main elements of the theoretical structure of a computable general equilibrium (CGE) model
  2. acquire an understanding of how a CGE model is calibrated and implemented on computer
  3. develop the ability to conduct basic simulations with a comparative-static CGE model
  4. acquire skills in the analysis of the more readily interpretable model results in terms of model theory, data base, closure and shocks
  5. develop an elementary understanding of the key features of dynamic CGE models.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETC5460 - Financial econometrics 2

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Catherine Forbes

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Catherine Forbes

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of the following: ETC3460 or ETC5346, and at least one of: ETC3400, ETC3410, ETC3450, ETC5340, ETC5341, ETC5345, MTH3251 or MTH3260 or obtain permission.

Prohibitions

ETC4460

Synopsis

This unit introduces students to a range of advanced, current techniques used in analysing financial data. Topics covered include the analysis of the time series and distributional features of financial data; the use of stochastic volatility and realised volatility models to capture time-varying volatility, including long memory in volatility; the use of econometric methods to estimate Value at Risk; the modelling of transactions data using trade duration models and transaction-based volatility models; continuous time processes and the application of econometric techniques to option pricing; and the use of generalised method of moments in financial models.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically evaluate alternative methods of modelling asset return volatility
  2. explain the role of volatility modelling in the measurement of risk and in the pricing of financial derivatives
  3. describe the role of continuous time stochastic processes in the pricing of financial derivatives
  4. evaluate econometric models for high frequency data
  5. evaluate the use of generalised method of moments in financial models.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETC5470 - Econometrics graduate seminar

0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Natalia Bailey

Coordinator(s)

Dr Natalia Bailey

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Full year 2018 (On-campus)

Synopsis

This graduate seminar subject is compulsory for PhD candidates. PhD and masters candidates proceeding by major thesis are required to present at least two seminars, one at an early stage to outline their thesis proposal and the second towards the end of candidature, preferably before writing-up has commenced. Masters candidates are required to present at least one seminar at a time to be determined in consultation with their supervisor.

Outcomes

The learning goal associated with this unit is to develop an understanding of the breadth of research interests in the disciplines of econometrics and business statistics.


ETC5860 - Research paper

12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Xibin Zhang

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Xibin Zhang

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Full year 2018 (On-campus)

Synopsis

Topics for seminar presentation are selected in consultation with the coordinator. A list of possible topics will be distributed but students are encouraged to propose subjects of interest to them, based on their own discipline. Students present one paper, act as formal discussant on another, and are expected to engage in discussion of others.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop the skills to present an area of research in the discipline of actuarial science in a non-technical manner, both written and oral
  2. grow in ability to ask and address critical questions about research.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload equals 288 hours per semester.

See also Unit timetable information


ETC5900 - Business statistics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Mrs Charanjit Kaur

Coordinator(s)

Mrs Charanjit Kaur

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (Evening)
  • Second semester 2018 (Evening)

Co-requisites

Students enrolled in course B6014 cannot undertake this unit.

Prohibitions

AFX9510, ETC1000, ETG1102, ETW1000, ETW1102, ETX1100, ETC9000, ETF5900

Synopsis

Students will learn to use basic statistical techniques and apply them to problems in accounting, finance, management, marketing, and business in general. Students should also be able to effectively communicate the results of their analyses. This unit covers descriptive statistics for revealing the information contained in data; probability as a tool for dealing with uncertainty; probability distributions to model business behaviour; confidence interval estimation and hypothesis testing techniques for single populations; analysis of relationships between variables using simple linear regression; and simple tools for forecasting time series data. Applications to critical analysis of business and economic data will be emphasised. Excel software will be used.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. interpret business data using descriptive statistics techniques, including the use of Excel spreadsheet functions
  2. apply simple concepts of probability and probability distributions to problems in business decision-making
  3. describe the role of statistical inference and apply inference methods to single populations
  4. interpret and evaluate relationships between variables for business decision-making, using the concept of correlation and linear regression
  5. apply suitable statistical techniques for describing and forecasting time series data
  6. develop the skills for critical analysis of statistical reporting and inference.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETF5010 - Special reading unit 2

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Brett Inder

Coordinator(s)

Professor Brett Inder

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must be granted permission by the Chief Examiner to undertake this unit.

Synopsis

A unit of study in a special field of econometrics in which no formal unit is available. The supervisor will prescribe a list of references, consult frequently with the student and set whatever written work and examinations are deemed appropriate. Students interested in a reading subject of this type should first consult the unit leader.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop an understanding of the key academic literature in a particular area of econometrics or statistical research
  2. learn how to undertake original research, either theoretical or applied.

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETF5020 - Special reading unit 3

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Brett Inder

Coordinator(s)

Professor Brett Inder

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must be granted permission by the Chief Examiner to undertake this unit.

Synopsis

A unit of study in a special field of econometrics in which no formal unit is available. The supervisor will prescribe a list of references, consult frequently with the student and set whatever written work and examinations are deemed appropriate. Students interested in a reading subject of this type should first consult the unit leader.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop an understanding of the key academic literature in a particular area of econometrics or statistical research
  2. learn how to undertake original research, either theoretical or applied.

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETF5200 - Applied time series econometrics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Jiti Gao

Coordinator(s)

Professor Jiti Gao

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (Evening)

Prerequisites

ETC3200, ETF3300, ETC3410, ETF5320, ETC5341 or equivalent.

Synopsis

Presents newly developed econometric methodology in model building and model evaluation in general. Recent literature on assessing business time series properties, non-linear time series models, multiple cointegration, impulse response function and variance decomposition is introduced. Examples in business, economics and finance will be drawn to illustrate the application of techniques covered in this unit.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. test the properties of economic and financial time series under various conditions such as structural breaks and asymmetric assessment due to business cycles
  2. test if the modelling framework for the relationship between variables should be linear or nonlinear
  3. test for the existence of long run relationship and if it is nonlinear and stable
  4. conduct multivariate framework time series analysis based on vector auto regression
  5. test for the presence of multi-long run relationships and estimate the vector auto regressive model.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETF5231 - Business forecasting

6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor George Athanasopoulos

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor George Athanasopoulos

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed ETX2111, ETF2100, ETX2121Not offered in 2018, ETF2121, ETF9100, ETF5910, ETF9121, ETF5912, ETF9300, ETF5930, MBA9007, MBA5907 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

ETX3231Not offered in 2018, ETC2450Not offered in 2018, ETF3231

Synopsis

Forecasts are crucial for guiding the planning and decision making process in business. In this unit you will learn to apply reliable methods for generating accurate forecasts in a rapidly changing business environment. These include: an introduction to regression modelling from a forecasting perspective, classical decomposition, exponential smoothing, Box-Jenkins ARIMA modelling and judgemental forecasting. You will build your programming skills by learning to program in R, a free programming language for statistical computing.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop statistical skills for analysing data in a business environment
  2. learn how to build accurate and robust models for forecasting
  3. acquire computer skills vital for forecasting business and economic data
  4. gain knowledge of the theoretical aspects of the models used.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETF5300 - Applied financial econometrics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Xibin Zhang

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Xibin Zhang

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Second semester 2018 (Evening)

Prerequisites

ETF3200, ETF3300, ETC3460, ETF5320, ETF5330, ETC5346 or equivalent.

Synopsis

Illustrates how statistical and econometric methods can be applied to financial data to solve problems arising in financial markets. Also covers modelling, estimating and testing the volatility of financial markets. Practical examples will be discussed in lectures to enhance the understanding of analysing financial data using the statistical and econometric tools taught in this unit. An integral component will be the completion of a number of minor research projects enabling students to develop the necessary skills.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify the issues involved when modelling the dynamics of financial markets
  2. estimate volatility models using econometrics software
  3. critically evaluate the financial econometrics literature
  4. explain the financial market applications of the non linear models developed
  5. undertake a research project that applies the techniques and analysis to a financial market of interest.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETF5320 - Applied econometrics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Vasilis Sarafidis

Coordinator(s)

Dr Vasilis Sarafidis

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ETF2100, ETC2410, ETC3440, ETF5910 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

ETC3410, ETF3200, ETF9200, ETF5920

Synopsis

This unit presents econometric models and techniques that are widely used in applied econometrics. The topics covered are linear regression models with random regressors, method of moments and instrumental variables estimations; simultaneous equations models; models for time-series data; introduction to maximum likelihood estimation; models for discrete dependent variables and models for panel data. EViews computer software is used to carry out data analysis and estimation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. conduct statistical inference in linear regression models with random regressors using the method of moments and the instrumental variables estimators
  2. conduct statistical inference for simultaneous equations models
  3. understand the statistical properties of nonstationary macroeconomic time series data and how to model the long-run relationships among co-integrated time series
  4. conduct statistical inference in models with discrete dependent variables
  5. conduct statistical inference in panel data models.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETF5330 - Quantitative methods for financial markets

6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Yi He (First semester)
Dr Wei Wei (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Yi He (First semester)
Dr Wei Wei (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ETF2100, ETF2121, ETC2410, ETC3440 or equivalent.

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B6001.

Prohibitions

ETF3300, ETF5930

Synopsis

This unit covers statistics and econometric tools to assess the time series properties and distributional properties of financial series. It teaches how to model and estimate the single-factor and multiple-factor capital asset pricing models; and conduct diagnostic checks and reliable statistical inferences on various risk-return relationships and financial market hypotheses. It also introduces recent literature on modelling, estimating and forecasting financial markets' volatility; and parametric and nonparametric methods to estimate the value at risk and expected shortfall. Statistical software will be used to carry out financial data analysis and applied research projects.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

1 assess the time series and distributional properties of financial data

2 evaluate the risk-return relationship among financial assets

3 estimate the long run relationship among financial time series and test market hypotheses arising in finance

4 analyse and model the volatility of financial returns and estimated value at risk and relate measures

5 demonstrate the ability to generate and analyse computer output

6 critically analyse the application of principles underlying quantitative methods in finance.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETF5400 - Econometric theory

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Mervyn Silvapulle

Coordinator(s)

Professor Mervyn Silvapulle

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

Students must be enrolled in course code 3816 or 3822 or 3194 or 4412 or be granted permission. It is recommended that students should have a high level of familiarity with the topics covered in ETF2100 and ETF2700.

Synopsis

The topics covered in this unit would be (i) invaluable for any student intending to work in applied econometrics, and (ii) essential to understand journal articles in econometrics. This unit introduces some of the essentials to develop a working knowledge of econometrics for large samples. The topics covered include, weak law of large numbers, multivariate central limit theorem, large sample properties of the least squares estimator in the linear model, large sample properties of maximum likelihood estimators, and applications of these to some econometric models used in applied econometric research.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define different models used in econometrics and statistics
  2. compare different methods of estimating and testing econometric models
  3. recommend suitable methods of inference
  4. evaluate different methods of inference for econometric models
  5. summarise the advantages and disadvantages of various methods of inference.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETF5410 - Special topics in econometrics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Duangkamon Chotikapanich

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Xibin Zhang

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

Students must be enrolled in course code 4412 or 3822, or have passed ETF3200 or ETC4400Not offered in 2018 or ETC4410 or equivalent.

Synopsis

Topics may include hypothesis testing, Bayesian econometrics, non-linear models, duality theory, specification analysis, spectral analysis, cointegration, applied time series, limited dependent variable models, economy wide modelling, models of demand and production functions, state space time series models and multivariate methods. Additional topics may be covered by visiting staff.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define different models used in econometrics and statistics
  2. compare different methods of estimating and testing econometric models
  3. recommend suitable methods of inference
  4. evaluate different methods of inference for econometric models
  5. summarise the advantages and disadvantages of various methods of inference.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETF5480 - Optimisation for managers

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Tissa Galagedera

Coordinator(s)

Dr Tissa Galagedera

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

ETF3480

Synopsis

This unit is designed to develop quantitative problem solving skills. The emphasis is on recognising and identifying, modelling and solving problems arising in business-decision. Various optimisation techniques used in the business decision-making process will be introduced. Topics include benchmarking with data envelopment analysis, game theory, queuing models, Markov chains and simulation modelling. Applications in business, particularly in management, marketing, banking and finance will be used in the demonstration.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the complementary nature of the rational and behavioural approaches to decision making
  2. select and apply quantitative modelling concepts to problems arising from business
  3. formulate an appropriate model to analyse various business decision problems
  4. apply tools available in Microsoft Excel and algorithms to generate solutions and appraise the solutions through the use of sensitivity analysis
  5. communicate the analysis and results of business decision problems.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETF5500 - High dimensional data analysis

6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Anastasios Panagiotelis

Coordinator(s)

Dr Anastasios Panagiotelis

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must complete one of the following units: ETC2420, ETC2410, ETF2121 or ETF2100.

Synopsis

In many fields of business, analysts must deal with data on many variables, for example; surveys with a large number of questions. In such cases, statistical tools known as multivariate methods must be used to analyse the data and drive business decisions.

This unit covers such methods in three sections: Cluster Analysis, Discriminant Analysis and MANOVA can be used to identify, predict and test for differences groups such as between distinct classes of customers or products; Principal Components Analysis, Correspondence Analysis and Multidimensional Scaling are dimension reduction methods that help analysts to visualise complicated datasets; and finally, Factor Analysis and Structural Equation Modelling are used to predict and test theories and explain and predict business outcomes.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate an understanding of the role that multivariate statistical techniques such as factor analysis, structural equation modelling, logistic regression, categorical data analysis, cluster analysis, multidimensional scaling and correspondence analysis play in uncovering relationships and patterns in survey data
  2. appraise the strengths and limitations of these techniques
  3. apply tools in R to generate solutions for the appropriate statistical techniques
  4. demonstrate skills in using the appropriate statistical techniques from a user and provider perspective
  5. demonstrate skills in communicating the results of the analysis so that decision making can be implemented.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETF5550 - Research project

12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Param Silvapulle (First semester)
Associate Professor Xibin Zhang (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Professor Param Silvapulle (First semester)
Associate Professor Xibin Zhang (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed 24 points at Level 5 from the Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics.

Synopsis

Under supervision, students are expected to undertake and report on an original research topic that addresses a contemporary and significant issue in the field of applied or theoretical econometrics. Students must find a suitable supervisor and have selected an appropriate area of research in order to undertake this unit.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate the knowledge and skill pertinent to the area of research undertaken
  2. survey critically the relevant literature
  3. understand and appreciate the relationship of the research undertaken to that of others
  4. contribute to the knowledge of the subject
  5. communicate and present the findings in writing in a manner that is logical and coherent.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 288 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average six/eight hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETF5555 - Minor thesis

24 points, SCA Band 3, 0.500 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Duangkamon Chotikapanich

Coordinator(s)

Professor Param Silvapulle

Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

Students are required to undertake and report on an original research topic that addresses a contemporary and significant issue in the field of applied or theoretical econometrics and to present that research at seminar presentations and in a thesis of between 20,000 and 25,000 words in length. Students must find a suitable supervisor, have selected an appropriate area of research and have obtained the approval of their course director before undertaking this unit. The minor thesis is expected to be of sufficient standard and practical relevance so as to be suitable for publication in a peer-reviewed journal.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate the knowledge and skill pertinent to the area of research undertaken
  2. survey critically the relevant literature
  3. understand and appreciate the relationship of the research undertaken to that of others
  4. contribute to the knowledge of the subject
  5. communicate and present the findings in writing in a manner that is logical and coherent.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload equals 576 hours per semester

See also Unit timetable information


ETF5600 - Quantitative models for business research

6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Vasilis Sarafidis

Coordinator(s)

Dr Vasilis Sarafidis

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ETF2100, ETC2410, ETC3440, ETF5910 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

ETF3600, ETC4420, ETC5420

Synopsis

The topics covered in this unit include: Review of regression analysis, Binomial dependent variables, Unordered multinomial dependent variables, Ordered multinomial dependent variables, Duration dependent variable. Computer software EViews will be used to apply these techniques to real world problems.

Outcomes

On successful completion of this unit, students will be able to demonstrate a solid understanding of regression analysis; modelling and analysing relationships with binomial, unordered and ordered multinomial and duration dependent variables. Students will apply their skills and knowledge of the above topics to real situations in areas such as marketing, economics and management. They will demonstrate their ability to use the relevant software to help with the analysis of the above topics.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETF5650 - Business optimisation skills

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Tissa Galagedera

Coordinator(s)

Dr Tissa Galagedera

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (Evening)

Prerequisites

ETF5900 or equivalent or MGX5961 or MGX5690.

Prohibitions

Master of Applied Econometrics students should not undertake this unit.

Synopsis

This unit complements students' practical understanding of business practices by introducing quantitative techniques in optimisation. Of particular interest are those techniques designed to improve the efficiency and transparency of supply chains, retailing and operations. Topics covered include quantitative techniques for forecasting, waiting lines, process modelling, logistics, resource planning and e-commerce. Students will learn to apply such methods in business settings.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are:

  1. develop business modelling skills and recognise the importance of optimisation techniques in solving business problems
  2. understand the role of optimisation approaches for dealing with uncertainty in the business environment
  3. develop basic skills in forecasting for business decisions
  4. apply optimisation tools to facilitate movement of information and resources through a business process
  5. recognise the role of online tools in business operation.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETF5900 - Business statistics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Mrs Charanjit Kaur

Coordinator(s)

Mrs Charanjit Kaur

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (Evening)
  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Students enrolled in course B6014 cannot undertake this unit.

Prohibitions

AFX9510, ETC1000, ETG1102, ETW1000, ETW1102, ETX1100 and ETC9000.

Synopsis

Students will learn to use basic statistical techniques and apply them to problems in accounting, finance, management, marketing, and business in general. Students should also be able to effectively communicate the results of their analyses. This unit covers descriptive statistics for revealing the information contained in data; probability as a tool for dealing with uncertainty; probability distributions to model business behaviour; confidence interval estimation and hypothesis testing techniques for single populations; analysis of relationships between variables using simple linear regression; and simple tools for forecasting time series data. Applications to critical analysis of business and economic data will be emphasised. Excel software will be used.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. interpret business data using descriptive statistics techniques, including the use of Excel spreadsheet functions
  2. apply simple concepts of probability and probability distributions to problems in business decision-making
  3. describe the role of statistical inference and apply inference methods to single populations
  4. interpret and evaluate relationships between variables for business decision-making, using the concept of correlation and linear regression
  5. apply suitable statistical techniques for describing and forecasting time series data
  6. develop the skills for critical analysis of statistical reporting and inference.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETF5910 - Introductory applied econometrics

6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Duangkamon Chotikapanich (First semester)
Dr Anastasios Panagiotelis (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Professor Duangkamon Chotikapanich (First semester)
Dr Anastasios Panagiotelis (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ETF1100, ETF5900 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

ETF5934, ETX9344, ETX5934Not offered in 2018, ETF2100, ETC2400, ETC2410, ETC3440, ETF9100

Synopsis

Econometrics is a set of research tools employed not only in economics but also in business disciplines. This unit covers the basic tools for estimation in the context of simple and multiple linear regression, the sampling properties of the least squares estimator, statistical inference and hypothesis testing. It also covers regression with dummy variables, model specification issues and estimation problems when least squares assumptions are violated. EViews is used as the software package.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. apply econometric tools to modelling, estimation, inference, and forecasting in the context of real world economic and business problems
  2. formulate and test hypotheses about the relationships between variables
  3. understand the nature and consequences of violation of the classical assumptions and know how to test for violations
  4. apply the skills and knowledge from the unit to real situations in business and economics, critically analysis and evaluate the results from applications, and make policy recommendations
  5. demonstrate the ability to generate and analyse EViews computer output for business and economic applications.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETF5912 - Data analysis in business

6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Ann Maharaj

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Ann Maharaj

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of the following units ETX1100, ETF1100, ETX9000, ETF5900, ETX5900, BFF5951 or AFX9510 or have permission from the unit coordinator.

Prohibitions

ETF9121, ETX2121Not offered in 2018, ETF2121, ETX2111, ETW2111, ETB2111, ETC1010

Synopsis

This unit will introduce statistical concepts and their applications to business sectors of finance, accounting, marketing and management. Topics covered include: sampling techniques, confidence intervals and hypothesis testing (for both single populations and between populations). The multiple regression models and time series models -- that are very popular in data analysis and forecasting in public sectors and industries -- will be covered in detail in this unit.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define different sampling techniques and use Excel to generate samples from these techniques
  2. demonstrate an understanding of the role of inference and hypothesis testing in statistics and their value when applied in financial, marketing and management fields
  3. conduct hypothesis tests for means and proportions of single populations, identify significant differences between two populations in terms of means, proportions and variances and interpret the value of these techniques in business
  4. interpret and analyse the results of a regression analysis using a linear model, a model which incorporates dummy variables, or models involving nonlinear terms.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETF5922 - Data visualisation and analytics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Jill Wright

Coordinator(s)

Dr Jill Wright

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Summer semester B 2018 (On-campus block of classes)

Prerequisites

Students must have completed ETF5900 or equivalent be enrolled in B6001 or B6014.

Synopsis

Business analytics can unlock the hidden insights in data to give businesses a competitive advantage. Many businesses have masses of data about customers and operations and need skilled analysts to uncover insights and make informed predictions.

This unit uses data visualisation to explore and analyse data sets of all sizes, and it introduces some business analytic models for interpretation and prediction.

It will introduce an appropriate software environment for data visualisation, and analytics, and cover visualisation and analysis techniques for categorical and numerical variables. Visualisation methods to be covered include some of Box-and-whisker plots, Mosaics, Rotatable 3D scatter plots, Heat maps, Motion charts, and cluster and association charts. Models to be covered may include linear regression models, classification and regression trees and random forests. Methods for evaluating model performance will also be discussed. Examples from marketing, finance, economics and related disciplines will be included.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. select, create and interpret appropriate types of visual representation for a given set of data
  2. select and develop model types with explanatory and/or predictive ability
  3. make appropriate use of in-sample and out-of-sample evaluation of models
  4. apply the above research skills to produce innovative solutions in finance, marketing, economics and related areas
  5. use visualisation and modelling to effectively communicate results of investigations
  6. explain the sequence of procedures that should be applied to analyse a given dataset.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average four hours of scheduled activities per week when taught in trimester mode, and three to four hours three times per week when taken as a summer unit. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETF5930 - Financial econometrics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Hsein Kew

Coordinator(s)

Dr Hsein Kew

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (Evening)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed BFF5925 or equivalent or be enrolled in course B6003.

Prohibitions

ETC3460, ETC5346, ETF3300, ETF9300

Synopsis

This unit covers statistics econometrics tools to: analyse and model the key characteristics of empirical distributions of asset returns; model and estimate the simple capital asset pricing model and its extensions; and test for various financial market hypotheses. It includes modelling, estimating and analysing time series properties of stationary and non-stationary financial data: and modelling and estimating simple and multivariate long-run relationships among financial variables; and conducting Granger causality testing. It also includes modelling and estimation of ARCH/GARCH volatilities and time-varying risk premium on financial assets; and estimation of value-at-risks and expected shortfalls of assets and portfolios. Students will be requested to work through a number of questions and projects with a broad range of financial data sets.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe, interpret and critically analyse financial data
  2. apply the simple and multivariate models and theory to model the relationship among financial variables, interpret the results, and conduct reliable statistical inference
  3. test for stationary behaviour of financial time series
  4. model the long-run relationships among financial time series
  5. model the volatility in financial data and perform value-at-risk calculations that are used as an input into the financial decision making process
  6. be proficient at econometric modelling of financial data using the software EVIEWS, which is widely used in the commercial world.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETF5952 - Quantitative methods for risk analysis

6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Tatsushi Oka

Coordinator(s)

Dr Tatsushi Oka

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

ETX2011Not offered in 2018, ETF2011Not offered in 2018, ETX3011, ETX9520

Synopsis

Operations in business and government inevitably entail risk which, of course, must be incorporated into decision making. This unit, supported by software such as @Risk, presents basic quantitative methods for identifying and analysing risk - with broad applicability to areas such as finance, quality control, occupational health and safety, disaster prevention and environmental management.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse risk statistically by summarising and interpreting data using techniques of descriptive statistics including the use of associated spreadsheet functions
  2. analyse and evaluate risk by applying concepts of probability and of probability distributions
  3. analyse and evaluate risk via Monte Carlo simulation, using @Risk software
  4. evaluate decision-making strategies, including use of PrecisionTree software
  5. describe and analyse the quality of production in an industrial process, using statistical control charts.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 45% + Examination: 55%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETF5970 - Mathematics for business

6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Mervyn Silvapulle (First semester)
Dr Yi He (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Professor Mervyn Silvapulle (First semester)
Dr Yi He (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

ETF2700 and ETF5970

Synopsis

The topics covered in this unit include: The Linear Model, Linear Simultaneous Equations, Non-linear functions, Financial Mathematics, Derivatives and Partial Differentiation, Optimization (constrained and non-constrained), Matrix Algebra, and Difference equations.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. acquire skills in solving equations and applying them to problems arising in business
  2. understand the features of linear and non-linear models and their applications in economics, finance and business
  3. solve simultaneous equations, with applications in areas including operations management
  4. work with arithmetic and geometric sequences and series and use them in financial applications
  5. develop skills to perform differentiation, optimisation (constrained and unconstrained) and basic matrix operations and apply them to understand and solve problems in business.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETM5900 - Business statistics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Prabahkaran Narayanan

Coordinator(s)

Dr Prabahkaran Narayanan

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (Evening)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 2098.

Prohibitions

ETX1100, ETF5900 and ETW1102

Synopsis

Students will learn to use basic statistical techniques and apply them to problems in accounting, finance, management, marketing, and business in general. Students should also be able to effectively communicate the results of their analyses. This unit covers descriptive statistics for revealing the information contained in data; probability as a tool for dealing with uncertainty; probability distributions to model business behaviour; confidence interval estimation and hypothesis testing techniques for single populations; analysis of relationships between variables using simple linear regression; and simple tools for forecasting time series data. Applications to critical analysis of business and economic data will be emphasised. Excel software will be used.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. interpret business data using descriptive statistics techniques, including the use of Excel spreadsheet functions
  2. apply simple concepts of probability and probability distributions to problems in business decision-making
  3. describe the role of statistical inference and apply inference methods to single populations
  4. interpret and evaluate relationships between variables for business decision-making, using the concept of correlation and simple linear regression
  5. apply suitable statistical techniques for describing and forecasting time series data
  6. develop the skills for critical analysis of statistical reporting and inference.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETX5440 - Econometric theory

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Don Poskitt

Coordinator(s)

Professor Don Poskitt

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

ETC3400

Synopsis

The objective of this unit is to outline the general principles that underlie what has become known as the Generalized Method of Moments (GMM). The discussion is motivated by reference to econometric and statistical techniques, and simple practical examples with which students should be familiar. It is shown that GMM finds application in many areas of econometrics and business statistics, and that GMM may be viewed as a methodology that encompasses many econometric and statistical techniques. Broad topic headings are: Classical Method of Moments and Regression (OLS and IV), GMM, Identification, Asymptotic Distribution Theory for GMM, GMM and Optimal Inference.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. build upon existing concepts developed in previous courses and to outline the basic principles under-lying what has become known as the Generalised Method of Moments (GMM)
  2. outline the classical Method of Moments and relationship of Regression to the Method of Moments
  3. discuss Identification and Asymptotic Distribution Theory in the context of the GMM
  4. examine GMM in relation to minimum variance unbiased estimation, and GMM based inference
  5. consider special cases of single equation and simultaneous equations GMM.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETX5443 - Quantitative economic policy

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor John Madden

Coordinator(s)

Professor John Madden

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

ECC2010 and ETC3400 or ETC3410

Prohibitions

ETC4430Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

This unit covers the theoretical structure and application of computable general equilibrium (CGE) models. Topics include:

  • the derivation of the model's non-linear equation system
  • evaluation of coefficients and parameters, model closure, specification of economic shocks, solution techniques and interpretation of results. During hands-on computing sessions, students will undertake simulations of a series of economic policy questions and analyse results.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. acquire an understanding of the main elements of the theoretical structure of a computable general equilibrium (CGE) model
  2. acquire an understanding of how a CGE model is calibrated and implemented on computer
  3. develop the ability to conduct basic simulations with a comparative-static CGE model
  4. acquire skills in the analysis of the more readily interpretable model results in terms of model theory, data base, closure and shocks
  5. develop an elementary understanding of the key features of dynamic CGE models.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETX5934 - Introductory econometrics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Kathryn Cornwell

Coordinator(s)

Professor Brett Inder
Dr Kathryn Cornwell
Mr Jason Ng Wei Jian

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

ETC1010, ETC2010 or ETC1031

Prohibitions

ETC2400, ETC2410, ETC3440, ETC4344 and ETX9344

Synopsis

This unit introduces students to the empirical analysis of relationships between economic variables. The approach is based on linear regression theory, and emphasises 'hands on' data analysis. Topics studied will include properties of least squares estimators, hypothesis testing, the choice of appropriate functional form, the use of dummy variables, issues around modelling survey data and the problems of serial correlation, heteroscedasticity and multicollinearity. Students will learn how to critically analyse empirical economic studies.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand and derive the properties of ordinary least squares in summation and matrix notation
  2. interpret, evaluate and apply inferential methods to multiple linear regression
  3. understand the use and implications of data scaling, functional form and dummy variables in regression modelling
  4. identify the presence of heteroscedasticity, adjust OLS standard errors and perform feasible GLS in regression models
  5. understand issues related to modelling with time-series data
  6. develop the skills of critical analysis of empirical economic work.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETX6500 - Statistical inference

6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Mervyn Silvapulle

Coordinator(s)

Professor Mervyn Silvapulle

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must be enrolled in 3194 Master of Philosophy or 0029 Doctor of Philosophy or by permission of the Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics Honours or Masters coordinators to enrol in this unit.

Synopsis

This unit provides an introduction to probability theory and statistical inference for graduate studies in econometrics and business statistics and related fields. It is intended to prepare research students for a range of other units in econometrics and business statistics. The first part will cover basic probability theory and the second half will be concerned with aspects of statistical inference. Some prior exposure to the topics to at least the advanced undergraduate level will be assumed. This unit is designed for PhD students who intend to write a thesis in econometrics or business statistics. It is not intended for PhD students in other disciplines who need to learn some basic quantitative techniques for the empirical section of their dissertations, although students from other departments who are interested in more advanced methods may wish to take this unit.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. ensure that students have the necessary familiarity with the essentials of probability theory and statistical inference to be able to read graduate level books and journal articles in econometrics and business statistics
  2. minimise rote learning and to encourage students to provide justification to econometric and statistical ideas and to derive results from first principals. To this end, students need to know the basic definitions, concepts and the chain of arguments on which the econometric and statistical theory is built.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETX6510 - Foundations of econometrics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Donald Poskitt

Coordinator(s)

Professor Donald Poskitt

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed either ETX6500 or BEX6500 or by permission of the Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics Honours or Masters coordinators.

Synopsis

This unit provides a rigorous treatment of core methods of econometric estimation and inference in a single and also multiple equation settings. While students are encouraged to look at every problem from several views (informal, algebraic, geometric, etc.), a large emphasis is placed on constructing formal arguments, and the importance of clear notation, definitions, assumptions and deductive arguments is emphasised. Formal lectures and references to graduate level textbooks are provided, and students are also assigned and encouraged to read some classic journal articles. This unit is designed for PhD students who intend to write a thesis in econometrics or business statistics. It is not intended for PhD students in other disciplines who need to learn some quantitative techniques for the empirical section of their dissertations, although students from other departments who are interested in more advanced methods may wish to take this unit.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. ensure PhD candidates master the core elements of econometrics to be able to generalise and apply these principles to research questions
  2. encourage and train PhD students to grind through complex scholarly journal articles and harvest the elements needed to conduct research
  3. train PhD students in developing a habit of using clear notation and clear arguments in research work.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


HEC5870 - Advanced health economics A

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Centre for Health Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Sonja Kassenboehmer

Coordinator(s)

Dr Sonja Kassenboehmer

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

ECC5870

Synopsis

The achievement of efficiency in the health sector. Alternative approaches to allocative efficiency, recent developments in the management of the market, and efficiency in hospitals. Aspects of evaluation techniques including recent developments in quality of life measurement, statistical issues, and modelling techniques.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. undertake sound research in health economics
  2. have knowledge of the major issues in health economics and the capacity to judge the importance of these issues
  3. function as independent professional health economist.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


HEC5871 - Advanced health economics B

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Centre for Health Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Sonja Kassenboehmer

Coordinator(s)

Dr Sonja Kassenboehmer

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

ECC5870

Synopsis

The achievement of efficiency in the health sector. Alternative approaches to allocative efficiency, recent developments in the management of the market, and efficiency in hospitals. Aspects of evaluation techniques including recent developments in quality of life measurement, statistical issues, and modelling techniques.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. undertake sound research in health economics
  2. have knowledge of the major issues in health economics and the capacity to judge the importance of these issues
  3. function as independent professional health economist.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


HEC5970 - Introduction to health economics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Centre for Health Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Sonja Kassenboehmer

Coordinator(s)

Dr Sonja Kassenboehmer

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

Prohibitions

ECC5970 and ECX9700.

Synopsis

This unit provides an understanding of the microeconomic approach to resource allocation, both in general and specifically, in relation to the health sector. It introduces students to the use of economic tools in the analysis of the 'market' for health care in terms of efficiency and equity. It also provides an analytical framework for assessment of the Australian health care system, and health policy generally, from an economic perspective.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand basic microeconomic concepts and their application to the health sector
  2. understand role, limitations and usefulness of economic analysis and economics as a way of thinking, particularly when applied to the health care sector
  3. understand organisation and delivery of health services from an economic perspective
  4. understand the Australian Health Care system from an economic perspective, including an analysis of the reasons for growth in expenditure.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


HEC5971 - Pharmaceutical economics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Centre for Health Economics

Coordinator(s)

Dr Silva Zavarsek

Not offered in 2018

Prohibitions

ECX9710

Synopsis

The economics of the pharmaceutical industry including the market for pharmaceuticals and its regulation internationally and in Australia. Principles of economic evaluation of the costs and outcomes of pharmaceutical products, and provides a guide to best practice with particular emphasis on clinical trials and protocol design.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. investigate the role of economic analysis in the pharmaceutical industry
  2. understand the structure of the pharmaceutical industry and the inter-relationship between the nature of the product, market structure and government regulation
  3. understand the impact of government intervention in the pharmaceutical industry including alternative regulatory regimes
  4. explain the role of economic evaluation in promoting the efficient use of drugs
  5. perform an economic analysis of drugs alongside clinical trials, including techniques of health outcome measurement.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 70% + Examination: 30%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


HEC5973 - Economic evaluation in health care

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Centre for Health Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Rachel Knott

Coordinator(s)

Dr Rachel Knott

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

Prohibitions

ECX9730

Synopsis

This unit introduces students to techniques of microeconomic appraisal in the evaluation of health care programs. It considers conceptual and methodological issues, as well as the practical conduct, and review, of such studies and their use in priority setting within the health care sector. The application of decision rules for economic efficiency in health program evaluation and their influence on policy decisions are introduced.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand techniques used for microeconomic appraisal in the evaluation of health care programs
  2. understand conceptual and methodological issues arising in the economic appraisal of health care programs
  3. understand conduct and review of economic evaluation in the health care sector
  4. understand application of results from economic evaluation to achieving broader priority setting goals within the health care sector.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 70% + Examination: 30%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


HEC5974 - Applied health economics and health policy

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Centre for Health Economics

Coordinator(s)

Dr Gang Chen

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

Students who have not passed ECC5970 or equivalent must be granted permission by the Chief Examiner to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions

ECX9741

Synopsis

This unit synthesizes contemporary issues in health policy, building on the fundamental economic concepts, including economic efficiency and equity, learned in the first level introductory unit. It is aimed at further developing the core concepts of efficiency and equity, and the application of contemporary health care issues. The unit is organised around three themes: the role of government in the health care system; government regulation in the organisation and delivery of health care services and incentives for equity and efficiency; and the use of economic principles to analyse and develop policy options in health care.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the changing perceptions of the role of government in the health sector
  2. understand the organisation, delivery and financing of health services, including incentives for equity and efficiency
  3. understand the implications of the ageing population on health care expenditure in Australia, including the organisation, delivery and funding of aged care services
  4. understand the impact of government regulation on prices and subsidies in the pharmaceutical, health technology and in private health insurance industries
  5. understand the options for health system reform, including the analysis of policy options, resource allocation and priority setting models.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


HEC5975 - Principles of health economics for developing countries

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Centre for Health Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Duncan Mortimer

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Duncan Mortimer

Unit guides

Offered

Alfred Hospital

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus block of classes)

Prohibitions

ECX9750

Synopsis

The unit provides an overview of the particular problems confronted by health care systems in developing countries. Economic principles are used to review and develop policy options for financing of the health sector and approaches to priority setting that foster improved expenditure allocation. Practical aspects of individual health care project appraisal in developing countries are also addressed.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the determinants of health, international differences in the pattern of disease and the link between health and development
  2. appreciate the economic principles that should underpin health care financing and expenditure decisions
  3. possess a sound knowledge of alternative health system structures in developing countries, the policy constraints typically faced by developing countries in managing health care systems
  4. use economic principles to critically appraise policy alternatives for health sector reform and understand practical methodologies for the application of economic principles particularly when data availability is extremely limited
  5. review the practical application of methodologies for health care program evaluation in developing countries.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


HEC5979 - Health economics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Centre for Health Economics

Not offered in 2018

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course M6007.

Prohibitions

ECC5970 and ECX9700.

Synopsis

This unit provides an understanding of the microeconomic approach to resource allocation, both in general and specifically, in relation to the health sector. It introduces students to the use of economic tools in the analysis of the 'market' for health care, in terms of efficiency and equity. It also provides an analytical framework for assessment of the Australian health care system, and health policy generally, from an economic perspective.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand basic microeconomic concepts and their application to the health sector
  2. understand the role, limitations and usefulness of economic analysis and economics as a way of thinking, particularly when applied to the health care sector
  3. understand the organisation and delivery of health services from an economic perspective
  4. understand the Australian Health Care system from an economic perspective, including an analysis of the reasons for growth in expenditure.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%


HED5043 - Contemporary issues in business education

6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Coordinator(s)

Ms Nell Kimberley

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

Students must be enrolled in Graduate Certificate in Higher Education to undertake this unit.

Synopsis

The aim of this unit is to provide opportunities for staff to develop knowledge and skills by focusing on issues relevant to their teaching contexts and disciplines. Participants are expected to complete five modules along with required assessment tasks. Credit may also be given to academic staff for attendance at relevant university seminars, however, these must be approved by the Unit Co-ordinator and must incorporate appropriate assessment. As part of their academic development, full-time staff currently employed by the faculty will also be encouraged to attend these workshops.

Outcomes

The learning goals are associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate approaches to the support of learning and teaching that influence, motivate and inspire students to learn;
  2. develop curricula, resources and services that reflect a command of the field of study;
  3. implement approaches to assessment, feedback and learning support that foster independent learning;
  4. employ strategies that demonstrate respect and support for the development of students as individuals;
  5. design scholarly activities or service innovations that influence and enhance learning and teaching.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


HED5044 - Reflection and practice in business education

6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Coordinator(s)

Ms Nell Kimberley

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

Students must be enrolled in Graduate Certificate in Higher Education to undertake this unit.

Synopsis

Enthusiastic and engaged teachers continually evaluate and modify aspects of their units in an effort to enhance student learning. This unit affords participants the opportunity to explore and improve their teaching practices by adopting an action learning model. Focusing on teaching and learning issues arising from HED5043Not offered in 2018 Contemporary issues in business education, participants will be required to apply a teaching intervention (or interventions) to their curricula (for example a technological intervention arising from Module 5) and to critically evaluate its effectiveness, and to instigate further changes and evaluation.

Outcomes

The learning objectives associated with this unit are to:

  1. apply an action learning model to enhance teaching practice
  2. identify, justify and implement an appropriate teaching or learning intervention/s
  3. use appropriate methods of evaluation of a teaching or learning intervention/s
  4. reflect critically on the teaching intervention/s using the education literature
  5. identify areas of teaching or learning that require improvement
  6. critically reflect on the findings in relation to the intervention/s and devise a plan for further improvement.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MBA5111 - Leadership 1: Critical thinking

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

MBA Program

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Anne Lytle

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • MBA Teaching Period 2 2018 (On-campus block of classes)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B6016.

Synopsis

The foundation of long-term leadership effectiveness is a sound understanding of one's self, and frameworks to manage one's self in the long run throughout the leadership journey. This unit explores each individual's values, behaviours and ways of thinking with a mind to understanding the diversity and unique contribution of self and others. Methods of analytical reasoning to address business problems and interpret and produce clear and sound arguments, as well as strategies to support a critical inquiry approach to the learning and research activities throughout the program, will be developed.

The challenges of leading and managing change in complex times, and the dynamic ethical challenges that leaders are likely to encounter in their roles are also addressed. Frameworks for organisational leadership and ethical decision-making will be introduced, along with the recognition of the obstacles that prevent success and result in poor decisions and outcomes.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop critical thinking skills
  2. identify how personal style impacts on others
  3. identify personal and professional strengths and weaknesses and learning goals
  4. clarify one's leadership purpose and ethical foundation
  5. create a growth mindset for life-long learning
  6. develop important self-management skills including mindfulness, resilience and emotional self-control
  7. apply the drivers of team effectiveness to lead and establish teams.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MBA5112 - MBA 1

12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

MBA Program

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Patrick Butler

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • MBA Teaching Period 2 2018 (On-campus block of classes)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B6016.

Synopsis

Topic 1 - Business models and strategy

Business models describe how organisations are configured to create, deliver and appropriate value. In the modern world, technology and globalisation are among the primary forces disrupting existing models in every sector of the economy, and executive leadership requires an understanding of this complexity. New systems that combine hardware, sensors, data storage, microprocessors, software, and connectivity impact industry structure and the nature of competition; businesses are increasingly facing new competitive opportunities and threats. Industry boundaries are being reshaped and entirely new industries are being created. This unit introduces and examines business models, the infrastructure and technologies of business, forces of change in the business and competitive environment, the impact on business models and business strategy initiatives and responses.

Topic 2: Markets and customers

Markets and customers focuses on analysing markets, customer behaviour and related business strategy, and on developing and executing marketing strategy. In an interactive digital environment, consumer and organisational buying behaviour is critically altered, and appropriate models of marketing are required. The unit explores market orientation, market research and analysis, marketing planning and marketing implementation in a range of contemporary contexts, including industrial and consumer markets and private and public sectors. It also looks at the contribution of marketing activity and thinking to other business functions and activities, including stakeholder and relationship strategy, and takes a strategic approach to marketing leadership.

Topic 3: Financial and managerial accounting

Professional managers in every discipline need to understand the role of the accounting function in organisations. Financial and managerial accounting introduces the processes and techniques that enable managers to plan and control organisational activities and make informed, value-enhancing decisions. From a strategic perspective, the topic explores financial performance by introducing a range of techniques used by internal and external stakeholders to assess firm value. It also explores the role of accounting in planning, decision making and performance evaluation, and introduces a range of tools to understand cost behaviour, product pricing, budgeting and performance measurement.

Outcomes

Topic 1 - Business models and strategy

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explore business models in a range of sectors
  2. outline and explore the business strategy process
  3. evaluate the impact on business models of globalisation, regulation, technological innovation and other forces of change
  4. critically analyse dynamic competitive patterns in business sectors
  5. demonstrate capabilities to develop appropriate strategies in a rapidly-evolving business environment.

    Topic 2: Markets and customers

    The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  6. appraise the role of market orientation in contemporary organisations
  7. be able to critically analyse market and customer behaviour and outline a market research study
  8. develop the skills to apply marketing knowledge to a range of marketing opportunities and challenges
  9. design and execute a marketing strategy and marketing plan
  10. articulate the application of marketing thinking to the challenges of organisations.

    Topic 3: Financial and managerial accounting

    The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  11. analyse and apply the theory and techniques of financial and management accounting practices to organisational activities
  12. analyse and interpret accounting information using a range of tools to draw conclusions on financial performance useful to internal and external stakeholders
  13. evaluate financial information to support economic decisions and the deployment of resources in the interests of sustainable value.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 288 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average six/eight hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MBA5113 - MBA Labs: Strategy project

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

MBA Program

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Patrick Butler

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • MBA Teaching Period 2 2018 (On-campus block of classes)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B6016.

Synopsis

The MBA Labs: Strategy project reflects the innovative, applied and research-oriented ethos of Monash University. The MBA Labs will function as a business laboratory, in which ideas are tried and tested, critiqued and improved. The spirit of discovery, enterprise and progress will be evident in the process and the outcomes; the cycle of practice and reflection will exemplify the experience.

In the first MBA applied consulting project, students integrate their knowledge of Module 1 to address the opportunities and/or challenges of host business organisations. Under the supervision of their professors, and with the support of a nominated project sponsor, student teams identify a significant strategic issue for their host organisation, and combine their strategy, marketing and accounting knowledge to tackle the issue. The output is a presentation and report for the sponsor.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate the ability to analyse and synthesise a complex business situation and develop appropriate analyses and recommendations
  2. demonstrate the ability to manage a consulting client relationship
  3. demonstrate the ability to deliver a professional presentation
  4. demonstrate the ability to provide and prepare a report that integrates academic learning and live business issues.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MBA5211 - Leadership 2: People and performance

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

MBA Program

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Anne Lytle

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • MBA Teaching Period 4 2018 (On-campus block of classes)

Prerequisites

MBA5111

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B6016.

Synopsis

In lean and flat contemporary organisations, leaders require much more than the authority associated with their position to be effective. In this unit, the role of leaders and the process of leadership in impacting and influencing people and organisational performance is explored. The aim is to understand how leaders make a difference in what they say and what they do, with the explicit goal of examining each student's leadership communication competencies and developing their leadership effectiveness to influence the performance of others.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify the drivers of performance and develop strategies and actions to influence the performance of others
  2. apply frameworks and techniques to manage poor performance
  3. demonstrate the skills required for effective leadership communication
  4. demonstrate the skills to execute difficult conversations
  5. design and deliver high impact presentations.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MBA5212 - MBA 2

12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

MBA Program

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Patrick Butler

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • MBA Teaching Period 4 2018 (On-campus block of classes)

Prerequisites

MBA5112

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B6016.

Synopsis

Topic 1: Design thinking

The success of practising managers in designing and delivering project to outcomes is a critical factor in their career success. Design thinking applies the skills and strategies developed by designers to a wide range of problems and situations. These include a range of conceptual and communication approaches, ways to explore and reconsider the context in which work is undertaken, as well as what should or could be achieved. Design thinking brings together several approaches known in the sciences and humanities, such as analysis and synthesis, but applies them in ways that are particular to a design approach. Design thinking can enable a more flexible approach to problem solving, and a more nuanced engagement with the complex issues of our contemporary world. Formal project management models and competencies will also be explored. The pedagogy will include a range of cases and applications.

Topic 2: Economics and society

The economic lens for reasoning in business is a critical understanding for practising executives and business leaders. In a turbulent, global economy, tackling macroeconomic challenges such as sustainable models, demographic shifts, climate change and income inequality demands economic literacy. This unit covers the main macroeconomic and microeconomic issues for business organisations, including market structures, supply and demand functions and pricing concepts. The importance of social relationships to economics is addressed, and the relationship between economics and politics is explored in the area of the regulatory environment. To access the most advanced ideas in this broad-based field, the unit will draw on the expertise and experience of university colleagues in relevant faculties and related research centres where required.

Topic 3: Business finance

Business finance introduces the resourcing theories and practices that contribute to the sustainable, strategic management of organisations. The unit takes a value-impacting approach to interrelated issues of investment, financing, budgeting and operations. Drawing on cross-disciplinary perspectives and recent advances in theory and practice, Business finance develops frameworks for analysis and decision-making of relevance to executives and managers in contemporary organisations. The unit examines how financial and economic information is used to gain forward intelligence on the ability of the organisation to create sustainable value. An experiential, case-based pedagogy is adopted.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

Topic 1: Design thinking

  1. demonstrate understanding of the concepts of design thinking and their application
  2. identify and analyse real-world project problems and relevant design thinking approaches
  3. apply design thinking methods and approaches to project-based problems and develop, test and evaluate original proposals in response to those
  4. develop the competencies to initiate, scope, coordinate, implement and close complex projects in dynamic situations.

    Topic 2: Economics and society

  5. evaluate and explain the economic, societal and regulatory issues of relevance to business
  6. apply the tools and techniques of economics to global problems
  7. integrate information from multiple sources to address complex social and economic issues
  8. develop the capabilities to contribute to future generators of sustainable economic, social and environmental value for society.

    Topic 3: Business finance

  9. critically evaluate the firm as a financial entity and to appreciate the definition and measurement of value
  10. apply finance theories and practices such as the quantification of risk and return and the valuation of firms
  11. explore and critically evaluate financial decisions regarding capital investment, financing, dividend policy, capital structure and mergers and acquisitions
  12. develop the competencies of financial analysis to evaluate the goals and performance of the firm, including the interpretation of financial data.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 288 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average six/eight hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MBA5213 - Technology, innovation and entrepreneurship

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

MBA Program

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Patrick Butler

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • MBA Teaching Period 4 2018 (On-campus block of classes)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B6016 and MBA5212.

Synopsis

The rapid rate of technological change in an increasingly knowledge-based society highlights the need for advanced technological capability, innovative thinking and practice, and entrepreneurial capability. For management students, a sound understanding of the application of science and engineering technologies to social and economic problems is necessary to function in sophisticated, technology-led business environments. The unit will draw on the expertise and experience of colleagues in a range of university faculties and research centres to provide an overview of cutting-edge developments, and related issues such as managing commercialisation and intellectual property, in fields such as life sciences, medical devices, information systems, energy, materials science and nanotechnology.

The complex technological business environment requires modern executives to understand innovation processes and to develop both an entrepreneurial mindset and entrepreneurial competencies. Through the application of innovative thinking and techniques, the unit advances the entrepreneurship agenda at individual, organisational and institutional levels.

A minor project integrates the streams in the unit in a practical application.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify and explain the underlying technology and the primary technological developments in a range of fields
  2. critically evaluate the intellectual property issues in technology development
  3. develop the competencies to address the commercialisation of technology
  4. develop an entrepreneurial mindset and competencies
  5. apply the unit learning to a business venture.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MBA5221 - Global executive MBA foundation I

12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Patrick Butler

Coordinator(s)

Professor Patrick Butler

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • MBA Teaching Period 5 2018 (On-campus block of classes)

Co-requisites

MBA5222

Synopsis

Global Executive MBA Foundation I unit comprises two component topics: Global Political Economy and Business Models and Strategy.

Managing in the global business environment requires a sound understanding of the dynamics of the global political economy. Drawing on studies in international relations, trade and development policy and comparative political economy, Global Political Economy focuses on how states, institutions, corporations and markets interact to generate macroeconomic and social outcomes. Business models and strategies are critically shaped by these dynamics and the related fundamentals of political movements, global trade, finance and the regulatory influence of institutions such as the UN, IMF, World Bank and WTO.

Business models describe how organisations are configured to create, deliver and appropriate value. Among the primary forces disrupting existing models are globalisation and technology; industry boundaries are being reshaped and entirely new industries are being created. Business Models and Strategy provides an understanding and evaluation of these issues, develops the capabilities to analyse their impact on participants' businesses, and the creates the ability to design appropriate strategic initiatives and responses.

Outcomes

The learning goals of this unit are to:

  1. evaluate the role and impact of global institutions and policy on economies and businesses and demonstrate the ability to create and implement appropriate initiatives and responses
  2. evaluate the implications of social, technological and other dynamics on business models and strategy and demonstrate the ability to create and implement appropriate initiatives and responses

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 288 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average six/eight hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MBA5222 - Global executive MBA foundation II

12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Patrick Butler

Coordinator(s)

Professor Patrick Butler

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • MBA Teaching Period 5 2018 (On-campus block of classes)

Co-requisites

MBA5221

Synopsis

Global Executive MBA Foundation II unit comprises four component topics: Executive Leadership I: Leadership Mindset, Design Thinking, Strategic Marketing and Business Analytics.

Effective executives have strong self-awareness, high levels of emotional intelligence, a commitment to service and a learning orientation. Executive Leadership I develops participants' capacity for critical reflexivity - the ability to be continually learning and growing from experiences, setbacks, challenges and failures. Drawing on constructive-developmental theory and forms of mind approaches, participants develop a growth mindset in themselves and others.

The success of executives in designing and delivering project outcomes is a critical factor in their careers. Design Thinking is increasingly deployed in entrepreneurial business settings. It brings together analysis and synthesis from the sciences and the arts, and applies models in ways that are particular to a design approach. Design thinking enables a more open and flexible approach to problem-solving, and a more nuanced engagement with the complex issues of our contemporary world.

Strategic Marketing focuses on the contribution of marketing thinking and activity to other business functions and activities, including stakeholder and relationship strategy, and takes a strategic approach to marketing leadership. It features the management of intangible assets and explores market orientation, market insights, customer engagement, value propositions and brand strategy.

Business Analytics provides participants with a managerial knowledge of the tools, methods and practices used to understand the vast amounts of data available to businesses, and its use in forecasting and in making strategic and operational business decisions. Descriptive and predictive analytics are explored, data mining and data visualisation techniques are addressed, and a wide range of cases is used to demonstrate the application of models and techniques.

Outcomes

The learning goals of this unit are to:

  1. analyse and synthesise complex business situations by drawing on the knowledge bases of leadership, design thinking, strategic marketing and business analytics
  2. demonstrate the ability to integrate and evaluate that knowledge to create and implement appropriate business initiatives and responses.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 288 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average six/eight hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MBA5223 - Global executive MBA globalisation I

12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Coordinator(s)

Professor Patrick Butler

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

MBA5221 and MBA5222

Co-requisites

MBA5224Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

Global Executive MBA Globalisation I unit comprises two component topics: Global Business Strategy and Global Executive MBA Business Project I.

Global Business Strategy is co-created with faculty at a leading European business school and taught at their campus. The principal focus is the fundamental challenges in international business, or 'reducing the liability of foreignness'. The key issues are understanding the rules of business abroad, government and business relationships, modes of entry, international partnerships and competing in emerging markets. Business cases from Europe, Asia, South America and Africa feature in the unit.

Global Executive MBA Business Project I is the first in a series of applied consulting projects, in which teams of students undertake an international business project for an Australia-based business in the international market. Assignments can involve market feasibility assessment, resourcing projects, evaluation of global best practice or business relationship development. International market research and related business consulting skills will be developed for this experiential unit, and project preparation in Module 1 is brought to bear.

Outcomes

The learning goals of this unit are to:

  1. explore and evaluate the economic, cultural and commercial challenges and strategies facing organisations operating in global settings
  2. demonstrate the ability to analyse and synthesise a complex, international business situation and develop appropriate recommendations
  3. demonstrate the ability to manage a consulting client relationship and provide a professional presentation and report that integrate academic learning and business outcomes.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 288 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average six/eight hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MBA5224 - Global executive MBA globalisation II

12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Coordinator(s)

Professor Patrick Butler

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

MBA5221 and MBA5222

Co-requisites

MBA5223Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

Global Executive MBA Foundation II unit comprises four component topics: Executive Leadership II: Global Mindset, Sustainable Strategy in the 21st Century, Global Logistics & Operations and Financial Accounting.

Developing effective organisations, strategies and plans in a global operating environment requires a global leadership mindset. Executive Leadership II: Global Mindset develops the key competencies required to lead in such contexts. These include communicating vision, purpose and goals that are global in aspiration and orientation; cross-cultural competence, sensitivity and agility; managing authority, power and identity; developing talent from diverse backgrounds and leading dispersed and virtual teams.

Corporate sustainability practices are on top of the boardroom agenda in progressive businesses. A deep understanding of the impact of commercial activity on the plant's resources and peoples, and a broad-based approach to sustainability is required of next-generation leaders. In Sustainable Strategy in the 21st Century, the necessity for business, government and civil society to work together is established and developed. The UN Sustainable Development Goals inform the issues covered, including poverty and inequality, climate change, energy, water, infrastructure and consumption are addressed.

Managing and coordinating a complex web of physical and data flows in a global context has become a critical priority for international businesses. Global Logistics and Operations addresses the key strategic and operational issues of supply chain management including the integration of upstream and downstream activities in the value chain, the evolving hardware and software technologies of logistics, and questions of efficiency and productivity.

Identifying, measuring, interpreting and communicating critical revenue and cost data and information are the key elements of Financial Accounting. Revenue and cost models, the role of the accounting function in organisations and the processes and techniques that enable managers to plan and control organisational activities are developed. This component unit takes a broad view of accounting and reporting, addresses triple bottom line reporting, and emphasises how management uses accounting for strategic decisions.

Outcomes

The learning goals of this unit are to:

  1. be able to analyse and synthesise complex business situations by drawing on the knowledge bases of Leadership, Sustainable Strategy, Global Logistics & Operations and Financial Accounting
  2. be able to demonstrate the ability to integrate and evaluate that knowledge to create and implement appropriate business initiatives and responses.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 288 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average six/eight hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MBA5225 - Global executive MBA innovation I

12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Coordinator(s)

Professor Patrick Butler

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

MBA5221, MBA5222, MBA5223Not offered in 2018 and MBA5224Not offered in 2018.

Co-requisites

MBA5226Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

Global Executive MBA Innovation I unit comprises two component topics: China Business Strategy and Global Executive MBA Business Project II.

China Business Strategy is co-created with faculty at a leading Chinese business school and taught at their campus. The topics covered include China's transformation and its global implications, comparative analysis of Chinese and other business models, and strategies for entering the China market. Expert guest speakers and local company visits provide opportunities for engagement with industry.

Global Executive Business Project II is the second in the series of applied consulting projects, in which teams of students undertake an international business project for an Australia-based business in the international market. Assignments in this module emphasise innovation and technology, and can involve market feasibility assessment, resourcing projects, evaluation of global best practice or business relationship development. The international market research and related business consulting skills developed earlier will be applied.

Outcomes

The learning goals of this unit are to:

  1. explore and evaluate the political, economic and commercial issues relating to the role and influence of China and the implications for Australia-based business
  2. demonstrate the ability to analyse and synthesise a complex, international business situation and develop appropriate recommendations
  3. demonstrate the ability to manage a consulting client relationship and provide a professional presentation and report that integrate academic learning and business outcomes.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 288 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average six/eight hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MBA5226 - Global executive MBA innovation II

12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Coordinator(s)

Professor Patrick Butler

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

MBA5221, MBA5222, MBA5223Not offered in 2018 and MBA5224Not offered in 2018.

Co-requisites

MBA5225Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

Global Executive MBA Innovation II comprises of four component topics: Executive Leadership III: Innovation Mindset, Corporate Finance, Innovation and Entrepreneurship, and Commercialisation of Technology.

Leading in an age of disruption and volatility requires a capacity to stimulate and sustain continuous innovation at all levels of an organisation. Executive Leadership III promotes the development of an innovation mindset that fosters a commitment to - and expert practice in - creativity, innovation and entrepreneurial activity. Innovation modelling, managing collaboration networks, leading teams through cycles of divergent and convergent thinking and establishing organisations with an experimental mindset are among the issues addressed in this leadership component.

Investment, financing, budgeting and operations decisions are critical areas for business leadership. Drawing on cross-disciplinary perspectives and recent advances in theory and practice, Corporate Finance develops frameworks for analysis and decision-making important to executives and managers in contemporary organisations. The unit introduces the resourcing theories and practices that contribute to the sustainable, strategic management of organisations, and places a particular emphasis on financing issues in innovation and entrepreneurial processes.

Innovation and Entrepreneurship explores the drivers of sustainable competitive advantage in organisations and emphasises technological capability, innovative thinking and practice and entrepreneurial capability. The integration of multiple organisational functions is required for successful product and process innovation, and user-led and technology-led models are explored. The Business Model Canvas framework, and the lean start-up model that supports entrepreneurship by experimentation and iteration, is developed; global case studies and examples are leveraged.

The application of science and engineering technologies to social and economic problems in complex, global environments is a critical area for leaders of next-generation enterprises. An especially important requirement for the contemporary executive is the capability to generate profitable business models for new technologies. In Commercialisation of Technology, commercialisation development models, commercialisation networks, market research, intellectual property, wealth pathways and related issues are explored, developed and applied.

Outcomes

The learning goals of this unit are to:

  1. analyse and synthesise complex business situations by drawing on the knowledge bases of Leadership, Corporate Finance, Innovation and Entrepreneurship, and Commercialisation of Technology
  2. demonstrate the ability to integrate and evaluate that knowledge to create and implement appropriate business initiatives and responses.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 288 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average six/eight hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MBA5227 - Global executive MBA transformation I

12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Coordinator(s)

Professor Patrick Butler

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

MBA5221, MBA5222, MBA5223Not offered in 2018, MBA5224Not offered in 2018, MBA5225Not offered in 2018 and MBA5226Not offered in 2018.

Co-requisites

MBA5228Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

Global Executive MBA Transformation I unit comprises two component topics: Transformation Strategy and Global Executive MBA Business Project II.

Transformation Strategy is co-created with a leading North American business school and taught at their campus. The primary emphasis is on the transformation of organisation systems, cultures and capabilities from conventional to entrepreneurial and technology-led entities. Design thinking, systems thinking, entrepreneurship, leadership, social capital and multiple other streams of knowledge are integrated in this topic. Expert guest speakers and local company visits provide opportunities for engagement with industry.

Global Executive MBA Business Project III is the third in the series of the applied consulting projects, in which teams of students undertake an international business project for an Australia-based business in the international market. Assignments in this module emphasise the high-level transformation challenges of the project sponsor business. The project can involve market feasibility assessment, resourcing projects, evaluation of global best practice or business relationship development.

Outcomes

The learning goals of this unit are to:

  1. explore and evaluate the factors involved in the transformation challenges of contemporary organisations
  2. demonstrate the ability to analyse and synthesise a complex, transformational business situation and develop appropriate recommendations
  3. demonstrate the ability to manage a consulting client relationship and provide a professional presentation and report that integrate academic learning and business outcomes.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 288 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average six/eight hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MBA5228 - Global executive MBA transformation II

12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Patrick Butler

Coordinator(s)

Professor Patrick Butler

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

MBA5221, MBA5222, MBA5223Not offered in 2018, MBA5224Not offered in 2018, MBA5225Not offered in 2018 and MBA5226Not offered in 2018

Co-requisites

MBA5227Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

Global Executive MBA Transformation II unit comprises four component topics: Executive Leadership IV: Transformation Mindset, Corporate Governance, Executive Masterclass and Corporate Strategy.

For executives, leadership is inevitably about transformation and building sustainable organisations that are dynamic, adaptive and enduring despite turbulent and volatile business environments. Resilient executive leadership is based on an orientation where change and flux is the normal course of business, and Executive Leadership IV: Transformation Mindset will develop participants' ability to make sense of volatility, uncertainty and complexity. Constant change raises multiple ethical issues, and the development of participants' ethical acuity and judgement as leaders of successful transformation is central. In this unit participants will work towards their own personal leadership legacy commitment: the legacy that they commit to leaving as global, executive leaders.

Executive career development normally involves engagement with corporate affairs and boards of directors, and an understanding of policy, the regulatory environment and governance processes and relations becomes an important success factor. In Corporate Governance, the role, duties and powers of directors, managers and shareholders - and questions of good faith, care and diligence - are addressed.

Executive Masterclass comprises a series of seminars and workshops designed to provide opportunities to further customise the program for participants. Following earlier modules and units, including specialist modules at international business schools and experiential consulting projects in international markets, the opportunity exists in the Transformation Module to revisit and develop deeper insights into executive topics, and to open up any contemporary issues. Expert faculty and leading practitioners co-create content with program participants that reflects the developmental and experiential priorities of the class.

The long-term direction of an organisation, its competitive environment and scope of activities, and its mission, values, resources and competencies are all fundamental strategy questions for executives. Drawing on earlier studies of business models, business functions and experiential business consulting projects, Corporate Strategy is concerned with the overall scope of the organisation and how value is created in the various business units; the expectations of shareholders and the stock market are important drivers at this level. It serves to consolidate earlier learning, and cases, simulations, leaders' forums and engagement with industry experts and practitioners form the pedagogy.

Outcomes

The learning goals of this unit are to:

  1. be able to analyse and synthesise complex business situations by drawing on the knowledge bases of Leadership, Corporate Governance, Executive Masterclass and Corporate Strategy
  2. be able to demonstrate the ability to integrate and evaluate that knowledge to create and implement appropriate business initiatives and responses.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 288 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average six/eight hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MBA5311 - Leadership 3: Influence and negotiations

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

MBA Program

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Anne Lytle

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • MBA Teaching Period 2 2018 (On-campus block of classes)

Prerequisites

MBA5211

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B6016.

Synopsis

Leaders and professionals in organisations face a broad spectrum of issues and problems that require an integrated analytical framework to negotiate more strategically and achieve more consistent outcomes. Negotiating to create a shared environment, trust and value becomes a critical skill of organisational leaders in complex and dynamic situations. Using interactive simulations, students will learn multiple tactics and gain practical evidence-based recommendations founded on empirical research.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify and appraise the theory and practice of preparing and implementing negotiations through value-creating and value-claiming techniques
  2. critically assess negotiation as an opportunity to create value for you, your organisation and your stakeholders
  3. develop awareness of the strengths and weaknesses of personal style in negotiations
  4. develop strategic flexibility in negotiation processes
  5. develop confidence and skill in successful preparation, implementation and evaluation of negotiation processes and outcomes.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MBA5312 - MBA 3

12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

MBA Program

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Patrick Butler

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • MBA Teaching Period 2 2018 (On-campus block of classes)

Prerequisites

MBA5212

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B6016.

Synopsis

Topic 1: Organisational transformation

External and internal environmental change can require organisations to respond with major adjustments to their structure, processes and identity. Organisational change management programs can be complex and difficult; when the situation calls for fundamental and rapid adaptation, the transformation agenda becomes high-level, strategic and immediate.

Understanding the systemic relationships between mission, values, strategy, technology, systems and culture requires a deep understanding of organisational behaviour and design. To lead a review and reinvention of an organisation facing critical challenges demands a thorough knowledge of transformation processes. This unit explores and integrates the political, leadership, strategy and integration processes and capabilities required for successful transformation.

Topic 2: Business analytics

Understanding the sources, uses and value of the flow of information through an organisation can give executives a competitive advantage and drive their innovation. Firms can leverage deep insights into business performance to enhance their value proposition and competitiveness. Business analytics focuses on providing students with a managerial knowledge of the tools, methods and practices used to understand the vast amounts of data available to businesses, and its use in forecasting and in making strategic and operational business decisions. Descriptive and predictive analytics are explored, data mining and data visualisation techniques are addressed, and a wide range of cases are used to demonstrate the application of models and techniques.

Topic 3: Global business strategy

In a globalising world, conducting business is increasingly complex. Organisation leaders require robust models to understand globalisation and the implications for 21st century firms. Companies must understand the political, economic and social environments in which they operate. To engage globally, executives need to address a range of critical issues relating to the internationalisation of their business. These include marketing internationally, choosing locations for key activities, new ways of organising international business, and processes for managing across borders.

The aim of the unit is to prepare students to manage effectively in a global, interconnected world. it examines the changing international environment for business, the dynamics of international competition, international relations and government-business interactions and the principles and practices of global business strategy. Further, the unit helps the student to develop the ethical and cross-cultural mindset and competence to succeed in global business. Cases and applications address models of global business and the management of innovation in multinational companies and settings; expert policy-makers and practitioners in the field will contribute to the unit.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

Topic 1: Organisational transformation

  1. critically evaluate the external and internal environmental forces that require organisational change
  2. identify and appraise organisational transformation processes
  3. integrate strategy, stakeholder interests and other imperatives in a transformation plan
  4. develop the strategic and political competencies to lead organisational transformation

    Topic 2: Business analytics

  5. explain the role of business analytics in driving business intelligence as a source of competitive advantage
  6. explore and apply the tools, techniques and methods utilised in business analytics
  7. develop a managerial overview of the multiple sources and value of data and how such data can be utilised for decision-making.

    Topic 3: Global business strategy

  8. critically evaluate the forces of globalisation and their implications for business
  9. identify strategies for SMEs and multinational organisations to operate in a global setting
  10. evaluate the impact different modes of foreign operations have on the internationalising organisation
  11. develop the personal, ethical and cross-cultural mindset and competencies required for success in a global business environment.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 288 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated reading, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average six/eight hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MBA5313 - MBA Labs: Technology and entrepreneurship project

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

MBA Program

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Patrick Butler

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • MBA Teaching Period 2 2018 (On-campus block of classes)

Prerequisites

MBA5213

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B6016.

Synopsis

The MBA Labs: Technology and entrepreneurship project reflects the innovative, applied and research-oriented ethos of Monash University. The MBA Labs will function as a business laboratory, in which ideas are tried and tested, critiqued and improved. The spirit of discovery, enterprise and progress will be evident in the process and the outcomes; the cycle of practice and reflection will exemplify the experience.

In the second MBA applied consulting project, students integrate their knowledge of Modules 1 and 2 to address the opportunities and/or challenges of host business organisations. Under the supervision of their professors, and with the support of a nominated project sponsor, student teams identify a significant innovation/entrepreneurship issue for their host organisation in a high-technology sector, and combine their accumulated knowledge of management theory and consulting practice to tackle the issue. The project may have a commercial or community purpose. As an alternative to working with a host, student teams may regard MBA Labs: Technology and entrepreneurship project as an incubator and propose their own venture. The output is a presentation and report for the sponsor.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate the ability to analyse and synthesise a complex business situation and develop appropriate analyses and recommendations
  2. demonstrate the ability to manage a consulting client relationship
  3. demonstrate the ability to deliver a professional presentation
  4. demonstrate the ability to provide and prepare a report that integrates academic learning and live business issues.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MBA5411 - Leadership 4: Personal and professional development

0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

MBA Program

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Jonathan Matheny

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • MBA Teaching Period 4 2018 (On-campus block of classes)

Prerequisites

MBA5311

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B6016.

Synopsis

In a highly-competitive job market, Monash MBA graduates must have a clear, strategic personal and professional development plan to challenge successfully for new career positions or promotions. Leveraging the lessons of the suite of Leadership units, and integrating the experiences and insights from the full range of MBA units and projects is a central purpose of this final Leadership unit. Building a successful and rewarding career demands the ability to reflect on the learning journey, engage with executives and potential employers with confidence, and communicate the value and impact one can bring to an organisation. A series of seminars, workshops, exercises and individual coaching meetings will provide students with the competencies to achieve their potential.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop life and career options and goals
  2. develop a well-informed understanding of a complex and changing career landscape
  3. translate acquired knowledge and competencies into professional employment skills
  4. demonstrate the ability to communicate the value and impact one can bring to an employer.

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 96 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study.

See also Unit timetable information


MBA5412 - MBA Seminars

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

MBA Program

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Patrick Butler

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • MBA Teaching Period 4 2018 (On-campus block of classes)

Prerequisites

MBA5312

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B6016.

Synopsis

In MBA Seminars, students will elect three MBA Seminars and develop a minor applied project report that combines their knowledge bases. A wide range of seminars will be offered, reflecting the specialist research and practice knowledge of faculty in Monash Business School and other faculties. Students will access cutting-edge research ideas by Monash and visiting professors; engage with leading practitioners and policy-makers; customise their program according to their intellectual and professional interests; and integrate new theory and contemporary practice for deeper insights.

The MBA Seminars will provide faculty with opportunities to work on their areas of specialist research interest with MBA students, practitioners in the field, and project host organisations. The applied project - or minor - will bring a critical, integrative practice dimension to the topic.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop a depth of knowledge in selected topics
  2. integrate theory and practice in specialist fields of interest
  3. integrate learning in applied projects.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MBA5413 - MBA Labs: International business project

12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

MBA Program

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Edward Buckingham

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • MBA Teaching Period 4 2018 (On-campus block of classes)

Prerequisites

MBA5312

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B6016.

Synopsis

The MBA Labs: International business project reflects the innovative, applied and research-oriented ethos of Monash University. The MBA Labs will function as a business laboratory, in which ideas are tried and tested, critiqued and improved. The spirit of discovery, enterprise and progress will be evident in the process and the outcomes; the cycle of practice and reflection will exemplify the experience.

In the third MBA applied consulting project, students integrate their knowledge of earlier modules to address the opportunities and/or challenges of host business organisations in an international marketplace. Under the supervision of their professors, and with the support of a nominated project sponsor, student teams identify a significant strategic issue for their host organisation in an international market. Desk and field research is undertaken in the domestic market before further work is conducted in the international market; students combine their accumulated knowledge of management theory and consulting practice to tackle the issues. As an alternative to working with a host organisation, student teams may regard MBA Labs: International business project as an incubator and propose an international project for their own venture. The output is a presentation and report for the sponsor.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate the ability to analyse and synthesise a complex business situation and develop appropriate analyses and recommendations
  2. demonstrate the ability to manage a consulting client relationship
  3. demonstrate the ability to deliver a professional presentation
  4. demonstrate the ability to provide and prepare a report that integrates academic learning and live business issues.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 288 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average six/eight hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MBA5415 - Strategy capstone

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

MBA Program

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Edward Buckingham

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • MBA Teaching Period 4 2018 (On-campus block of classes)

Prerequisites

MBA5312

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B6016.

Synopsis

The integration and consolidation of prior learning is the chief aim of the Strategy capstone unit. Taking an executive-level approach to developing the strategic capabilities required of general managers and business leaders, this unit focuses on building the competencies to leverage knowledge across a wide range of business disciplines and functions. Drawing on multiple disciplines including accounting, finance, marketing, HR, data analysis and project management - as well as on the experiences of students in their strategy, enterprise and international business projects - the unit enables students to synthesise their understanding and leverage their acquired skills in strategy analysis, development and execution. Cases, simulations, leaders' forums and engagement with industry experts and practitioners will form part of the pedagogy.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. integrate and consolidate learning from earlier units and projects
  2. examine the strategy analysis, planning and implementation process
  3. critically analyse the multifaceted nature of strategy process in business and other organisations
  4. synthesise the intelligence from the complex and dynamic environment of business for business and corporate strategy
  5. demonstrate the ability to strategise in a dynamic business environment.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MBA5721 - Experiential learning project

12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

MBA Program

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Christina Lee Kwai Choi (Malaysia)
Associate Professor Jonathan Matheny (Caulfield)

Coordinator(s)

Professor Christina Lee Kwai Choi (Malaysia)
Associate Professor Jonathan Matheny (Caulfield)

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • MBA Teaching Period 2 2018 (On-campus block of classes)

Prerequisites

Students must have completed the MBA integrating core units and fundamental core units as follows:

MBA5706,MBA5701, MBA5709, MBA5730, MBA5708/MBA5608, MBA5720/MBA5620, MBA5740/MBA5640, MBA5703/MBA5603, MBA5704/MBA5604, MBA5705/MBA5605, MBA5715/MBA5615, MBA5707/MBA5607

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B6016.

Synopsis

Students will partake in experiential learning project by working together on a group based project in an assigned organisation. Supervised by an academic member of staff and assisted by the organisation's representative, the group will be guided through the processes of: proposal preparation, data collection and analysis, project implementation, business planning and project reporting.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate an ability to apply a broad range of knowledge and understanding of key business theories, concepts, tools and techniques in a practical context
  2. demonstrate an ability to analyse, synthesise and evaluate a business situation and to develop appropriate recommendations in the form of a consulting report
  3. further enhance communication, interpersonal, problem solving and critical thinking capabilities
  4. develop capabilities to be future generators of sustainable economic, social and environmental value for business.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 288 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average six/eight hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MBA5722 - MBA study tour

12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

MBA Program

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Patrick Butler (Caulfield)
Dr Teh Chee Ghee (Malaysia)

Coordinator(s)

Professor Patrick Butler

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • MBA Teaching Period 1 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have completed the MBA integrating core units and fundamental core units as follows:

MBA5706,MBA5701, MBA5709, MBA5730, MBA5708/MBA5608,MBA5720/MBA5620, MBA5740/MBA5640, MBA5703/MBA5603, MBA5704/MBA5604, MBA5705/MBA5605, MBA5715/MBA5615, MBA5707/MBA5607

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B6016.

Synopsis

The MBA Study Tour integrates, in a practical manner, the material covered in the MBA program. Depending upon the destination/s chosen (which may vary from year to year), MBA students will partake in a combination of site visits to local organisations, companies and institutions in order to better understand the impact of that location's environment on business and its implications for management. At the end of the MBA Study Tour students are expected to have not only gained an insight into the business environment of the location visited but also be able to draw upon ideas from that environment to develop capabilities that may be able to be applied in other environments and organisational contexts.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine the nature of the forces in the environment (e.g. economic, social, legal and cultural) and their impact upon business and management in the location visited
  2. understand and critically analyse business and government relations in the location visited
  3. analyse basic theories and concepts relevant to business and examine how these can provide insight and understanding of how business is conducted in the location visited
  4. gain insights and ideas from the location visited in order to develop capabilities that can be future generators of sustainable economic, social and environmental value for business.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 288 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average six/eight hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGF5011 - Commercialisation

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Ian McLoughlin

Coordinator(s)

Professor Ian McLoughlin

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B6005.

Prohibitions

GSB5011, MGX5011.

Synopsis

Commercialisation examines the multiple pathways that lead from research and innovation domains, through developmental stages, to the creation of wealth in markets. The unit allows students to conceptualise roles in converting research to wealth at a personal, enterprise and economy wide level. Commercialisation develops students' knowledge of what commercialisation is and the resources and competencies necessary to develop and execute. The unit further develops students' collaboration and negotiation competencies and research skills.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse pathways of commercialisation
  2. distinguish commercialisation organisations, resources and roles
  3. select and apply appropriate theories to modern commercialisation environments
  4. predict ethical issues raised by commercialisation for local and international communities
  5. enhance and demonstrate collaboration and negotiation competencies and research skills.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGF5020 - Business ethics in a global environment

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Fahreen Alamgir

Coordinator(s)

Dr Fahreen Alamgir

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (Evening)
  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (Evening)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

MGX5020Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

This unit is designed to develop students moral reasoning about the conduct of business in the global context. They will achieve this by exploring theories of ethics and justice in business and in its relationships with society, across different cultural and religious traditions; and reflecting on their own moral development through analysis of ethical and unethical behaviours in business.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the relationship between ethics, morals and values in the workplace
  2. explore different perspectives on moral development
  3. examine ethical theories to explain how they contribute to ethical business practices
  4. analyse some of the competing demands on business when scrutinising the ethics of business activity
  5. discuss the relationship between business practice, ethics and religion across different traditions.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGF5030 - Corporate social responsibility

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Michelle Greenwood (First semester)
Dr Fahreen Alamgir (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Michelle Greenwood (First semester)
Dr Fahreen Alamgir (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have completed 24 credit points.

Prohibitions

MGX5030Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

This unit analyses corporate social responsibility (CSR) from a range of different perspectives. The course is designed within a framework of understanding, applying and managing corporate social responsibility in business; CSR is considered in the context of the marketplace, the workplace, in the community and the natural environment. Through the use of case studies of Australian and international companies, students will examine CSR challenges across a range of industry settings and develop strategies for responsible management.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. compare and contrast the strengths and limitations of a range of models of corporate social responsibility
  2. examine the range of external and internal factors that impact on an organisation's corporate social responsibility
  3. analyse the major corporate social responsibilities of business, in particular within the marketplace, the workplace, in the community and the natural environment in the context of globalisation
  4. identify the tensions between conflicting business and social responsibilities
  5. critique different managerial approaches to working with stakeholders to address issues of corporate social responsibility.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGF5130 - Managing diversity and inclusion

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Helen De Cieri

Coordinator(s)

Professor Helen De Cieri

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

MGX5130Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

This unit examines the social, legal and business dimensions of diversity and inclusion. It aims to provide both theoretical and practical application of contemporary ideas to promote workplace diversity and inclusion. Topics include theoretical perspectives on diversity and inclusion, forms of diversity and inclusion, the legal framework regulating discrimination and equal opportunity, strategic business and HRM issues, individual actions, and contemporary issues for diversity and inclusion in Australia and other countries.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the concepts of diversity and inclusion applied to the workplace
  2. evaluate the legal, social and business issues associated with diversity management in the contemporary workplace
  3. identify the strategic business and HRM issues associated with developing and implementing diversity and inclusion initiatives in the workplace
  4. understand contemporary issues related to the management of workplace diversity and inclusion issues
  5. analyse practical case studies of inclusion, diversity and discrimination in the workplace.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGF5181 - International business strategy

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Dean Xu

Coordinator(s)

Professor Dean Xu

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (Evening)

Prerequisites

MGF5966 or MGX9660 or MGX5966 or MGS5966 or MGM5966 or MGZ5966, and achieved 60 credit points.

Co-requisites

It is recommended that students take this unit in the final year of their course

Prohibitions

MGX5181, MGM5181, MGS5181 or MGZ5181

Synopsis

This unit looks at international business strategy theories and their application. Topics include the relationship between environmental scanning and strategic planning; methods of developing a strategic plan; corporate and business level strategy; choice of foreign operation and its implications in terms of risk and control; determinants of MNC activity; strategic issues that relate to international wholly owned subsidiaries, joint ventures, mergers and acquisitions and alliance modes; impact of multi-domestic, regional and global integration strategies; and international corporate governance.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the concepts and use the tools for competitive analysis and strategic planning in the international environment
  2. formulate and implement strategies for SMEs and multinational organisations in a global setting
  3. identify and analyse the opportunities and dangers involved in international strategic management
  4. evaluate the impact different types of foreign operations have on the internationalising organisation.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGF5220 - Managing work, family and life

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Susan Mayson

Coordinator(s)

Dr Susan Mayson

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

MGF5991 or MGF5992 or MGF5020 or MGF5030 or MGX5960 or MGX9600 or MGF5923.

Prohibitions

MGX5220

Synopsis

The purpose of this unit is to examine and debate the critical challenges facing individuals, families, and employers in managing work, family and life. It seeks to identify linkages between individuals, families, work environments, and society by studying the research that explores this interdependence. Implications of a number of radical changes (eg: increasing demographic and cultural diversity, greater emphasis on lifestyle balance by employed men and women, and changes in the way work is structured) on these linkages will be examined. Topics studied include work-family conflict, organisational work-life policies and programs, legal and business issues concerning work-life.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify and analyse the separation of work, family and personal life from a historical perspective
  2. identify the social and demographic changes of recent decades that have altered the once established dynamics of work, family and personal life
  3. analyse how gender, class, and culture affects work/life linkages
  4. identify the issues regarding the business and legal case for work-life initiatives
  5. identify and analyse workplace and government policy initiatives aimed at helping individuals manage work, family and life roles.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGF5261 - Human resource management issues

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Hannah Meacham

Coordinator(s)

Dr Peter Townsend (Off-campus)
Mr Brad Nash (Evening)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Second semester 2018 (Off-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (Evening)

Prerequisites

MGX5985 or MGX9850 or seek Chief Examiner's approval before undertaking this unit

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B4001, B5002, B6006, B6007, B6009, B6012 or B6016.

Prohibitions

MGX5261

Synopsis

The unit considers emerging technological, social, economic, political and legal changes having implications for the successful management of people within the Australian context. Topics covered will alter as current issues change. Representative issues include implications of social, technological and demographic changes for HRM; philosophical orientations and ethics in HRM; the role of HRM in the strategy, development, implementation, and use of emerging technologies; alternative delivery models for HRM activities; workplace violence and bullying.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the nature of changes to the organisation of work in Australia
  2. identify strategies for HR professionals to manage the challenges posed by changes in the organisation of work for both individuals and organisations
  3. analyse emerging HR issues and associated challenges
  4. review possible HR responses to current issues
  5. critically analyse and apply HRM theory and empirical research to current HR issues.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGF5300 - Governance

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Ken Coghill

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Ken Coghill

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus block of classes)
  • Second semester 2018 (Off-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B6006, B6007, B6009 or B6012, or be granted permission by the Chief Examiner to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions

MGX5300Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

This unit challenges students to think through the factors shaping how communities are governed in Australia and elsewhere as all societies grapple with the challenges of climate change, sustainability and the meaning of "progress". It develops knowledge and skills necessary for good governance applying United Nations Global Compact sustainability concepts. Students from Australian and other backgrounds share their experiences in various levels of government/intergovernmental, civil society (not for profit) and market (private business) sectors. It examines Integrated Governance i.e. the roles, relationships and networks of the levels and sectors in contemporary governance including how political systems work, democracy, the relationships between politicians and public servants, ethics, accountability, the importance of civil society and activity, and the role of the media.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the concept of Integrated Governance and governance issues affecting nations, international regions and the global community
  2. identify the roles and dynamic relationships of the public sector, private sector and civil society in good governance
  3. create and develop ideas for reform of governance to meet particular policy objectives.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGF5310 - International management

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Cherrie Zhu (First semester)
Associate Professor Ramanie Samaratunge (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Professor Cherrie Zhu (First semester)
Associate Professor Ramanie Samaratunge (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (Evening)

Prohibitions

MGX5310

Synopsis

International strategic management; ethics and social responsibility, communication and interpersonal relations; employee attitudes and motivation; cross-cultural leadership; control and conflict issues, international human resource management and comparative industrial relations.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. evaluate the changing nature of international management process
  2. relate management theory to varying and different cultures
  3. describe and explain the complex challenges facing business and managers in a cross-cultural setting
  4. critically compare and contrast a range of cross-cultural variables in the international business management environment and understand their impact on international management.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGF5370 - Policy analysis

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Deirdre O'Neill

Coordinator(s)

Dr Steve Perryman

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus block of classes)
  • First semester 2018 (Off-campus)

Prerequisites

Successful completion of 36 credit points or seek Chief Examiner's approval before undertaking this unit.

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B6006, B6007, B6009 or B6012.

Prohibitions

MGX5370Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

This unit assists students to understand the theory and practice of policy analysis, the role of evidence in decision making and how policy analysis contributes to better policy outcomes.

Outcomes

Our students will be able to:

  1. explain different theories and methods of policy analysis
  2. apply theories and methods of analysis to policy issues
  3. design strategies to address policy issues.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGF5551 - Strategic human resource management

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Laura Visser

Coordinator(s)

Dr Laura Visser

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (Off-campus)
  • First semester 2018 (Evening)

Prerequisites

MGX5985 or MGX9850 or seek Chief Examiner's approval before undertaking this unit.

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses: 0028, 0105, 0200, 0201, 0319, 1065, 1506, 1822, 2099, 2642, 2643, 2778, 3801, B6006, B6007, B6009, B6012

Prohibitions

MBA5708, MGF5702, MGX5551

Synopsis

The interaction of external environment, organisational factors and strategic human resource management (SHRM) is examined from multiple perspectives. Topics may include strategic choices facing the organisation in the areas of business planning, building SHRM capabilities, transforming the HR function, and SHRM program evaluation. The implications of SHRM for organisational performance are examined.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine the relationship between theories of strategic management and models of strategic HRM
  2. critically analyse the strategic planning and implementation considerations associated with key areas of HRM strategy
  3. critically analyse the potential for human resource management to enhance competitive advantage, organisational performance and sustainability
  4. identify and examine different perspectives and value systems in strategic human resource management
  5. critically analyse strategic HRM theories and practices and their applications to organisational realities.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGF5600 - Managing innovation

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Mathew Hayward

Coordinator(s)

Professor Mathew Hayward

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

MGX5600

Synopsis

This unit looks at innovation as a managerial process. It provides methodologies for setting up and managing innovation within teams, departments and organisation wide.

Topics cover: sources of innovation; collaboration and cooperation in innovation; types of innovation networks: social, sartorial, regional, national and global; the strategies and stages of creative innovation, translating knowledge into innovation; methods of selecting and rejecting innovation including the stage gate process; mapping technological change and opportunity; managing an innovative culture and the diffusion of innovation, exploiting intellectual property; the role of discontinuous innovation, and innovation for growth and sustainability in domestic and international markets.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop strategies for managing innovation and its commercialisation
  2. design an appropriate process for screening a new product service idea through to introduction
  3. define criteria for the sustainability of innovations
  4. describe the impact of networks and role of networking on managing the innovation process.

Assessment

Within semester sssessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGF5610 - People management and work in a global context

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Marjorie Jerrard

Coordinator(s)

Dr Marjorie Jerrard

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Second semester 2018 (Off-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (Evening)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B5002, B6006, B6007, B6009 or B6012.

Prohibitions

MGX5610

Synopsis

This unit analyses national differences in how people and work are managed in terms of the historical, economic, legal, political and cultural factors associated with national differences and similarities in the employment regulatory environment. Based on the premise that people are a source of competitive advantage for international organisations, employment and human resource management practices and strategies within multinational corporations are examined. Topics include; internationalisation and globalisation, divergence and convergence in national systems of employment relations in European, Anglophone and Asian countries, varieties of capitalism in these same regions, labour management practices in multinational corporations, corporate social responsibility and labour standards, regulatory and institutional differences governing the management of labour.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically analyse the globalisation of trade and production systems and the impact on employment relations and labour standards
  2. identify the implications of globalisation for the management of labour via human resources management in different national settings
  3. evaluate the work practices and labour standards in MNC's by applying ethnocentric and polycentric approaches
  4. examine institutions governing trade and labour standards, including international labour standards, trade agreements, and corporate codes of conduct
  5. critically assess the relationship between business, labour and government internationally.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGF5611 - Advanced supply chain management

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Amrik Sohal

Coordinator(s)

Professor Amrik Sohal

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Second semester 2018 (Evening)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of the following units: MKX9610, MGX9610, MGX5961 or MGF5961

Prohibitions

MGX5611

Synopsis

This unit is designed to expose students to contemporary thought and practice in logistics and supply chain management. The unit will elaborate on the extension of logistics management across organisational boundaries. How organisations are using logistics and supply chain management as a competitive tool will also be covered. Students will be able to gain appreciation through the critical study of contemporary research publications in the area. The practice of leading edge organisations will also be studied. Students will have the opportunity to apply new concepts in case studies and in their own organisations through assignment work.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain in detail the elements of integrated supply chain management
  2. critically evaluate contemporary literature in the field of logistics and supply chain management
  3. apply contemporary logistics and supply chain management concepts to an organisation
  4. formulate logistics and supply chain strategies.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGF5630 - Principles of negotiation

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Sandra Cockfield

Coordinator(s)

Dr Sandra Cockfield

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus block of classes)

Prohibitions

MGX5630Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

This unit provides an introduction to the principles of negotiation applied to various spheres of conflict and exchange, including work and employment relations, business and commercial conflicts, international trade and diplomacy. As well as providing an overview of key theoretical ideas, the unit draws on a wide range of bargaining exercises and simulations which allow students to place these concepts in practical negotiation situations. Topics include styles of conflict management and negotiation, negotiation strategies and situations, effective and ineffective negotiation tactics, understanding key processes and dynamics in negotiation, judgement and cognitive error in negotiations, multi-party negotiations, and the social context of negotiations.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically evaluate the common characteristics of conflict in a wide range of exchange relationships
  2. evaluate theoretical foundations for effective negotiation
  3. develop practical skills through application of concepts in negotiation exercises.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGF5640 - Cross-cultural management communication

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Audra Mockaitis

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Audra Mockaitis

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (Evening)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

MGG5810, MGX5640

Synopsis

The unit looks at the ways in which cultural values are expressed in social behaviour and the communication process including non-verbal cues, in different societies and contexts. The relevance of culture to management practices is analysed and illustrated in various national cultural settings. The unit then considers contemporary issues that affect the cross-cultural communication process (eg: ethics) before considering the international negotiation process. Objectives, methods of negotiation and ways of negotiating cross-culturally are considered. The unit seeks to impart to students the ability and an awareness of how to communicate effectively in a cross-cultural setting.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the concept of culture and its determinants
  2. develop an understanding of the principles of effective cross-cultural communication
  3. critically evaluate the role communication and negotiations play in international operations
  4. explain the negotiation process and identify and analyse impediments to effective negotiations
  5. assess the relevance of culture to management practises in different cultural settings
  6. identify and evaluate the links between culture, economic processes and organisations.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGF5670 - Leadership

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Herman Tse

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Herman Tse

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (Off-campus)
  • First semester 2018 (Evening)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B5002, B6006, B6007, B6009, B6012, or be granted permission by the Chief Examiner to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions

MGX5670

Synopsis

This unit will involve a comprehensive examination of executive leadership in Australia and internationally. Students will study individual, group and organisational issues, specifically in terms of current and traditional leadership models and paradigms; gender, ethical, and strategic issues; and the relationships between leadership and performance, group dynamics, and organisational culture.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define the purposes and scope of leadership theories and research outcomes, and identify their applications to real-life situations
  2. describe and evaluate the principles and practices of management, their differences and similarities to leadership, and their relationship to leadership in an organisational setting
  3. evaluate the multifaceted nature of leadership in Australia and internationally, and enhance students' own leadership skills in the process
  4. evaluate the trends in and implications of leadership and management research in organisations and their impact on work environments
  5. critically analyse the development of leadership in relation to research outcomes and practical applications.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGF5680 - Managerial problem solving and decision making

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Tui McKeown

Coordinator(s)

Dr Wendy Bell

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (Off-campus)
  • First semester 2018 (Evening)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B5002, B6006, B6007, B6009, B6012, or be granted permission by the Chief Examiner to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions

MGX5680

Synopsis

This unit focuses on enhancing students' understanding of problem solving and decision making processes in management practice, from a critical perspective on managerial thinking and action as an art of practical wisdom and sound judgment.

Through interactive group work, role play, case studies and situational exercises, students will apply analytical reasoning and adaptive-creative methods of decision making to successfully manage organisational problems. Specific tools and techniques will be used to illustrate the complexity of managers' roles in defining problems; generating, evaluating and implementing solutions; balancing rationality and intuition; and making group decisions.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. interpret organisational phenomena effectively, in order to define problems and identify decision-making situations
  2. analyse patterns and relationships in problem solving and decision making processes
  3. identify and evaluate problem contexts, explanations and alternative solutions
  4. recognise and avoid errors in reasoning and decision-making
  5. identify implicit assumptions, constraints and biases in problem solving and decision making, and develop strategies to effectively communicate these to stakeholders.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGF5690 - Services and operations management

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Dayna Simpson

Coordinator(s)

Dr Dayna Simpson

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Second semester 2018 (Off-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (Evening)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B5002, B6005, B6006, B6007, B6009 or B6012.

Prohibitions

MGX5690

Synopsis

This unit is an introduction to services and operations management concepts. The unit introduces operations management concepts in delivering value to customers, within and across organisations. Furthermore, the unit introduces and investigates service management in a variety of industry contexts, including discretionary and non-discretionary services. The services and operations concepts are synthesised through applied assessment.

Outcomes

The learning objectives associated with this unit are to:

  1. define and distinguish between services and operations management principles and practices
  2. outline and apply operations management concepts in delivering value to customers
  3. apply and analyse discretionary and non-discretionary service management concepts
  4. synthesise services and operations management concepts.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGF5691 - Sustainable operations and supply chain management

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Ananya Bhattacharya

Coordinator(s)

Dr Ananya Bhattacharya

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (Evening)
  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

MGX5691

Synopsis

This unit integrates concepts from both operations and supply chain management toward strategic goals of more sustainable production systems. By combining recent theory and practical examples, this unit provides students with tools that allow companies to reduce their overall resource use, manage their social and environmental risks at the extended enterprise level and design products and processes toward sustainable resource use. Specific topics include management systems for risk reduction and compliance, sustainable transport and distribution, closed-loop issues, mid-tier value chains, extended enterprise issues (e.g. certification and monitoring of suppliers), supplier development, technology protection and ethics. Topics are addressed from predominantly design and behavioural perspectives.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the environmental and social implications of global production and distribution
  2. recognise and implement more sustainable design in processes and products
  3. understand the implications of sustainability for organisational survival and the role that operations plays in facilitating sustainability
  4. understand the technological and behavioural dimensions of sustainable process and product innovation
  5. understand the application of these dimensions in local, regional and global supply chains.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGF5701 - Designing business processes

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Ananya Bhattacharya

Coordinator(s)

Dr Ananya Bhattacharya

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Second semester 2018 (Evening)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

MGX5700

Synopsis

The design of the business and its processes has become a key source of innovation and performance improvement. Innovative process design leads to the introduction of new business models, opening up new markets and new business opportunities. The redesign of existing processes leads to cost reductions and productivity improvements for the business. This unit introduces students to the use of design tools for innovation and improvement in business processes. It equips students to analyse and improve existing processes and to develop new business models and prototype new business processes.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the use of process design tools
  2. analyse process improvement opportunities
  3. evaluate and apply differing approaches to process innovation
  4. evaluate project methodologies for process innovation and improvement
  5. identify and develop new business models.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGF5702 - People management and strategy

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Fang Lee Cooke

Coordinator(s)

Professor Fang Lee Cooke

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

MGF5921. Students must have completed 24 credit points before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

MGF5551, MGX5551, MBA5708

Notes

It is strongly recommended that this unit be undertaken in the last semester of study for the Master of Business (Managing human capital specialisation).

Synopsis

Strategic human resource management and context; SHRM models; the HRM and organisational performance link; high performance work systems; managing the employment relationship; employee voice; ethics and social responsibility; international strategic HRM.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine the relationship between people management and strategy
  2. critically analyse the strategic planning and implementation considerations associated with key areas of HRM strategy
  3. critically analyse the potential for human resource management to enhance competitive advantage, organisational performance and sustainability
  4. identify and examine different perspectives and value systems in strategic people management
  5. critically analyse strategic HRM theories and practices and their applications to organisational realities
  6. apply theories of people management and strategy to a practical work environment.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGF5710 - Governance of market societies

6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Christopher Nyland

Coordinator(s)

Professor Christopher Nyland

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (Off-campus)
  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

MGX5710

Synopsis

In the contemporary world the political and economic leaders of capitalist and socialist societies have come to accept that effective governance requires both markets and regulation. But while this consensus exists there is substantial disagreement as regards what constitutes the optimal mix of markets and regulation. In this subject we introduce students to both the system of regulatory capitalism that prevails in the OECD and to the regulatory socialist form of governance that is being created in China. In so doing we explain why the concurrent existence of these two systems of governance have become a source of global tension.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. provide students with a sound grasp of why the governance of contemporary societies requires robust markets and regulations
  2. enable students to understand how regulatory capitalism and regulatory socialism work and why there are similarities and differences
  3. assist students to grasp prevailing ideas for making the two systems work better
  4. provide understanding of why it is that the concurrent existence of different systems of governance is a source of tension across states.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 65% + Examination: 35%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGF5722 - Emerging economies in a globalising world

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Jagjit Plahe

Coordinator(s)

Dr Jagjit Plahe

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (Off-campus)
  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Synopsis

This unit will provide students with insights into the role of emerging economies in a globalising world. Using a political economy approach, the unit will provide a comparative perspective on Brazil, Russia, China, India and South Africa also known as the BRICS. Over the past ten years the geo-political and economic importance of the BRICS has been increasing. While they have been advocating for a stronger voice in major international institutions such as the WTO, the World Bank and the IMF, the BRICS do not have a common identity and their influence and power at the global level is uneven. This unit covers the history of the BRICS as well as the political, economic, security and foreign policy trends in these countries. It provides different perspectives on the power of the BRICS in an international context and focuses on the challenges they face. Particular attention is given to the thematic areas of international trade, international finance, the environment, global health and food security.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the different theoretical perspectives on the rise of the BRICS
  2. explain the history of the BRICS covering domestic and foreign policy perspectives
  3. critically evaluate the influence of the BRICS in a globalising world.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGF5730 - International trade policy

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Jagjit Plahe

Coordinator(s)

Dr Jagjit Plahe

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (Off-campus)
  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

MGX5730Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

The unit will provide students with key insights regarding how trade policy is formulated, negotiated and implemented; the economic, social and cultural implications of international trade rules; the pattern of relationships that exists between trade policy and prosperity; and the implications of the global financial crisis for international trade policy. The unit focuses on the GATT/WTO System and Bilateral and Regional Trade Agreements.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. assess the advantages and limitations of the multilateral trading system in terms of its decision making processes and its agreements (agriculture, services, intellectual property, etc.)
  2. explain the recent surge of bilateralism and regionalism and assess the implications of this surge for the multilateral trading system
  3. evaluate the opportunities and the limitations of formally linking human rights and environmental issues to the global trading system
  4. judge whether the current global trading system treats trade liberalisation as a means to an end (the end being sustainable and equitable development) or an end in itself
  5. evaluate the implications of the global financial crisis for the global trading system.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGF5760 - International institutions and organisations

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Jagjit Plahe

Coordinator(s)

Dr Jagjit Plahe

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Second semester 2018 (Off-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

MGX5760

Synopsis

This unit provides a detailed examination of the role played by international institutions and organisations in the process of global governance. The unit focuses on the intergovernmental sector (including regional institutions), the non-governmental sector and the multinational corporate sector. The unit is informed by the research traditions of international relations, international law, international political economy, global governance, global civil society studies, and international business. In examining the process of global governance the unit will cover the thematic areas of global trade and finance, global peace and security, human rights and the environment.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. acquire an understanding of the theory and processes of global governance
  2. acquire an understanding of the purpose, motivations and strategies of the United Nations System, regional organisations, civil society and multinational corporations
  3. assess the roles of the intergovernmental, non-governmental and corporate sectors in shaping and influencing global governance
  4. analyse key issues and themes relating to international institutions and organisations.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGF5911 - Diplomacy and statecraft

6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Christopher Nyland

Coordinator(s)

Professor Christopher Nyland

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (Off-campus)
  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

MGX9110

Synopsis

Foreign policy involves relationships with other governments over which little control is directly exercised. Diplomacy as the art of persuasion is therefore an integral part of foreign policy. Just as democracy has transformed the domestic political environment of many countries since the eighteenth century, self-determination has transformed the international political environment in the twentieth century. The two traditions in statecraft -- one moral and universalist, one pragmatic and promoting the 'national interest' -- are tested in the context of bilateral, regional and multilateral modern diplomacy. Case studies in the Asia-Pacific and the challenges facing foreign policy.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. acquire the principles and practices of diplomacy, statecraft and international relations
  2. reason in an informed way regarding diplomacy and statecraft
  3. analyse and report on the international political and security environment
  4. read critically and construct a sophisticated argument in relation to questions of diplomacy and statecraft.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 65% + Examination: 35%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGF5920 - Work and employment relations

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Marjorie Jerrard

Coordinator(s)

Dr Marjorie Jerrard

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Second semester 2018 (Off-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (Evening)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B5002, B6006, B6007, B6009 or B6012.

Prohibitions

MGX9220, MGX5920.

Synopsis

This unit provides an introduction to the study of work and employment relations in a changing and dynamic environment. The unit aims to provide students with an understanding of the conceptual foundations of employment relations, the key elements of an industrial relations system, and the dynamics of employment relations in the Australian context. Topics covered include: the individual and the employment relationship, the structure and dynamic of labour markets, the management of employment relations in different industry and workplace contexts, the organisation of work, bargaining and conflict, the role of unions, institutions and the relation of employment relations, and the economic and social consequences of different national systems of employment relations.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine the conceptual foundations of work and employment relations
  2. apply these concepts to developments within the Australian system of employment relations in comparative context
  3. describe the main institutional features and key developments in the Australian industrial and workplace relations system
  4. identify the implications of these developments for labour management practices, employee voice and participation in the workplace and representative organisations of employers and employees
  5. understand the potential effects of institutions governing work and employment relations using workplace and industry case studies.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%


MGF5921 - Foundations in human resource management

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Susan Mayson

Coordinator(s)

Dr Susan Mayson

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

MGX9850, MGX5985, MGX9221, MGF5985

Synopsis

Introduction to the field of human resource management for students without managerial or supervisory experience or work experience. Topics include the purpose of HRM and its contribution to meeting organisational and employee needs; the strategic role of human resource management and the contribution of HRM to competitive advantage; HRM challenges faced by organisations in a global and competitive environment including attracting and retaining skilled staff, issues relating to diverse workforces, safety and wellbeing, performance and reward management in developing employee capabilities.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define HRM and understand the purpose and the range of activities associated with the area of Human Resource Management (HRM)
  2. understand and differentiate between basic models of HRM
  3. understand and analyse the strategic contribution of the HR function and HR managers
  4. understand the global context and its effects on HRM
  5. examine a range of HR challenges faced by organisations and explain how the activities normally associated with HRM can address such issues
  6. critically engage with and apply HRM theory and empirical research published in current academic literature individually and in groups.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGF5923 - Public policy

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Deirdre O'Neill

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Deirdre O'Neill

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus block of classes)
  • First semester 2018 (Off-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B5002, B6006, B6007, B6009 or B6012.

Prohibitions

MGX9230

Synopsis

This unit assists students to understand how the public policy process operates and the role of stakeholders in policy development. Public policy process theory is discussed in the light of specific cases, and related to a broad range of practitioner experience. Case studies in Australian public policy will be analysed within this course.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define a range of models and theories that help explain how public policy is made
  2. analyse the role of government institutions and processes in policy making
  3. analyse how governments engage with stakeholders in public policy processes.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGF5927 - Public management

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Deirdre O'Neill

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Deirdre O'Neill

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus block of classes)
  • First semester 2018 (Off-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B5002, B6006, B6007, B6009 or B6012.

Prohibitions

MGX9270

Synopsis

This unit examines management in the public sector in Australia and internationally and the impact of public sector reform. It considers theoretical explanations of reform and implementation in practice. The focus is on identifying and analysing practical issues facing public managers. Australia is considered an international leader in public sector reform and practical illustrations are drawn from Australian and international experience.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify and explain the theoretical foundations of public sector reforms
  2. evaluate the effectiveness of public sector reforms in practice
  3. identify and analyse the knowledge, skills and abilities required by contemporary public managers.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGF5928 - Leadership theory and practice

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Mulyadi Robin (First semester)
Dr Jess Co (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Mulyadi Robin (First semester)
Dr Jess Co (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

MGX9280

Synopsis

This unit is an introductory overview of organisational leadership, with the aim of developing knowledge, skills and understanding of the multifaceted nature of organisational leadership in relation to work-relevant factors. Concepts and issues examined during the course of tuition include the nature of leadership; from management to leadership; traits, behaviours and relationships; contingency approaches; leadership vision and strategic direction; leadership communication; shaping culture and values; leading a learning organisation; motivation and empowerment; leading teams; leadership and multiculturalism; and leading change.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. acquire an insight into and understanding of the differences between management and leadership in order to enhance leadership and research skills
  2. develop a better capacity to analyse and report on domestic and international issues directly related to organisational leadership both generically as well as within real-life workplaces
  3. acquire an overview of the voluminous research literature on leadership in order to better promote leadership development
  4. develop an awareness of the various constructs of leadership and their relevance to organisational effectiveness, change, and sustainability.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGF5960 - Managing people and organisations

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Mary Anderson

Coordinator(s)

Dr Mary Anderson

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (Off-campus)
  • First semester 2018 (Evening)
  • Second semester 2018 (Evening)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B5002, B6006, B6007, B6009, B6012, or be granted permission from the Chief Examiner to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions

MGX5960

Synopsis

This unit provides an introduction to human behaviour in organisations. Behaviour is examined from the individual, group and organisational levels. The study of individual behaviour moves from consideration of personality and perception to values and attitudes and motivation. Group behaviour examines topics such as group structure and properties, group and team behaviour and leadership. These two areas of behaviour are then brought together to provide insight into the complex areas of organisational analysis (including structure and design and culture) as well as organisational processes. This multi-level organisational perspective develops student understanding and appreciation of current debates surrounding topics such as ethics and corporate social responsibility, power and influence and stress management.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define the purpose and the range of activities associated with the effective management of people in organisations
  2. evaluate the importance of the individual, the team and the organisation's contribution to the effective performance of work
  3. analyse the relationship between the development of theory, behaviour in organisations and management practice
  4. assess the role of ethics and social responsibility in determining the culture of an organisation in the overall conduct of its business
  5. critically analyse and apply current management theory and research to current organisational issues.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGF5961 - Supply chain management

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Alka Nand (First semester)
Mr Constantin Alba (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Alka Nand (First semester)
Mr Constantin Alba (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (Evening)
  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

MGX9610, MGX5961

Synopsis

This unit integrates different concepts related to supply chain management. By combining theory and case studies, this unit provides students with frameworks that allow companies to manage different supply chain functions (e.g., procurement, transport, distribution, inventory management), balance different stakeholders' expectations and run the business to improve profit potential.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the strategic and operational perspectives of logistics
  2. describe the elements of the logistics mix and explain the trade offs between these elements
  3. discuss the mechanisms and issues involved in supply chain integration
  4. analyse the performance of logistics and the supply chain management in an organisation
  5. apply the concept of integrated logistics and supply chain management to solve an organisational problem.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGF5962 - Principles of management

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Javed Anwar

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B4001, B5001, B6005 or B6013.

Prohibitions

MGX5962, MGX9600, MGX5960, MGG9600, MGG5960, MGX9602 and students enrolled in course 0105, 2099, 2778, 1065 or 0028.

Synopsis

The overall aim of this unit is to introduce pre-experience students to the range of activities associated with the management of individuals, groups and the organisation. In order to achieve this aim the content will cover several key areas of management. For example, the current challenges facing managers in a turbulent environment, the role of the individual, the importance of teamwork, managing conflict and effective decision making. Finally the role of corporate culture and ethics. Students undertaking this unit should expect to experience a variety of activities in order to challenge the content as prescribed above. These activities will include interactive case studies and application of the theory to 'real' world examples through group presentations.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse and apply current management theory and research to current organisational issues
  2. understand the personal challenges involved in becoming a new manager in an organisation in today's world
  3. understand the importance of the individual, the team and the organisation's contribution to the effective performance of work
  4. assess the role of ethics and social responsibility in determining the culture of an organisation
  5. identify techniques for improving decision making in today's turbulent environment.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGF5966 - International business theory and practice

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Sharif Rasel

Coordinator(s)

Mr Sharif Rasel

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (Evening)

Prohibitions

MGM5966, MGS5966, MGX9660, MGZ5966, MGX5966

Synopsis

Management implications of major internationalisation theories; the planning requirements in going international and management issues that arise in an international setting.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define the concept of international business from a multi-disciplinary perspective
  2. explain the diversity and complexity of the international business environment
  3. provide a historical overview of the evolution of the international business phenomenon
  4. discuss the economics and politics of international business transactions
  5. analyse the concept of globalisation and its impact on businesses worldwide
  6. describe the firm internationalisation process
  7. examine the economic, social and political implications of multinational corporate activities
  8. extend awareness of global issues based on current affairs and their implications for international business.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGF5972 - Managing organisational change

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Tui McKeown

Coordinator(s)

Dr Tui McKeown

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Second semester 2018 (Off-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (Evening)

Prerequisites

MGX9600, MGX5960, MGG5960, MGG9600 or MGG9370 or seek Chief Examiner approval before undertaking this unit.

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B5002, B6006, B6007, B6009 or B6012.

Prohibitions

MGX5972

Synopsis

Examines change management from both theoretical and practical perspectives. Theory relating to employee responses to change and promoting readiness for change. Organisation Development -- characteristics of OD, process models, role of the practitioner, interventions; Organisational transformation -- nature and characteristics, models, strategic change leadership and capability.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. recognise the challenges and issues arising out of organisational change initiatives
  2. recall various change models and frameworks, their foundations and relative strengths and weaknesses
  3. apply change models and concepts to real-life organisational change
  4. identify the skills and abilities required to be an effective change agent
  5. develop reflective and evaluative skills as a change agent.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGF5976 - Strategic management

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Pitosh Heyden

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Pitosh Heyden

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (Off-campus)
  • First semester 2018 (Evening)

Prerequisites

MGX9600, MGX5960 or seek Chief Examiner approval before undertaking this unit.

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B5002, B6006, B6007, B6009 or B6012.

Prohibitions

MGG9371, MGG9761, MGX9761, MGX5976.

Synopsis

Identification and evaluation of the firm's competitive position, its markets, government policies, social issues, emerging trends and key factors which are critical for success in its environment. The crafting of an appropriate strategy supported by structure, controls and rewards.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the dynamic nature of business and the strategic management processes employed by businesses to gain sustainable competitive advantage
  2. develop analytical skills to plan the future of an organisation in its competitive environment from the viewpoint of the chief executive
  3. identify the necessary skills for developing and implementing strategies that will enable the organisation to achieve competitive advantage and sustainability
  4. critically analyse the strategic management theories and practices to apply to organisational realities
  5. develop management skills and knowledge to examine strategic management challenges from strategy, change and learning perspective.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGF5985 - Human resource management

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Peter Holland (First semester)
Dr Hannah Meacham (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Peter Holland

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (Off-campus)
  • First semester 2018 (Evening)
  • Second semester 2018 (Off-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (Evening)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B5002, B6006, B6007, B6009 or B6012.

Prohibitions

MGX9221, MGF5921, MGX9850, MGX5985

Synopsis

Introduction to the field of human resource management. Topics include the strategic role of human resource management, the contribution of HRM to competitive advantage, job design, staffing, performance management, strategic compensation and reward systems, developing employee capabilities and assessment of HRM strategies and practices.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define the purpose and the range of activities associated with the area of Human Resource Management (HRM)
  2. differentiate between models of Personnel and HRM
  3. analyse and evaluate the strategic contribution that can be made by the HR function
  4. analyse and explain each of the activities normally associated with HRM
  5. evaluate the strategic impact of each of the HRM activity areas
  6. critically analyse and apply HRM theory and empirical research.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGF5991 - Professional development - career dynamics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Kohyar Kiazad

Coordinator(s)

Dr Kohyar Kiazad

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (Evening)
  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (Evening)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

MBA9053, GSB9001, MGX9001, MGX5991

Synopsis

Professional Development for Career Dynamics is designed to build students' capacity (knowledge, skills, and abilities) to achieve their career goals and aspirations. The unit helps students to (a) identify their professional skills and values, (b) develop capability to perform effectively on-the-job, and (c) prepare and evaluate opportunities for career transition. Professional Development for Career Dynamics more specifically develops students' ability to market themselves, communicate and collaborate effectively at work, develop profitable professional networks, and create career plans. The unit will enhance the value of students to potential employers, help them become successful employees or leaders, and assist with their long-term career goals and aspirations.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. evaluate the status of your current skills and values
  2. develop capabilities for enhancing your career
  3. develop capabilities for successful career change.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGF5992 - Professional development - Self and relationships

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Herman Tse (First semester)
Dr Zen Goh (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Herman Tse (First semester)
Dr Zen Goh (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (Evening)
  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (Evening)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

MGX9940, GSB9002, MGX9002 and MGX5992.

Synopsis

This unit draws strongly on the expanding fields of positive psychology and positive organisational scholarship, to provide students with a sound practical, theoretical and empirical grounding for developing enhanced self knowledge, self esteem and efficacy, resilience, well being, effective relationships and a high quality of life.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop skills in self-awareness, acceptance and effective goal setting
  2. enhance skills in identifying and developing personal strengths; efficacy, positive thinking and self-talk, change; optimism and resiliency
  3. enhance skills in understanding and developing effective, mutually beneficial relationships
  4. develop skill in applying all concepts (above) to achieve enhanced individual, team, organisational and community success.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 70% + Examination: 30%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGM5181 - International business strategy

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Chew Yin Teng

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Chew Yin Teng

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (Evening)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of the following; MGF5966, MGM5966, MGS5966, MGX9660, MGX5966, MGZ5966, and achieved 60 credit points.

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in the 2098 or B6007 Master of International Business to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions

MGX5181, MGS5181, MGZ5181

Synopsis

This unit looks at international business strategy theories and their application. Topics include the relationship between environmental scanning and strategic planning; methods of developing a strategic plan; corporate and business level strategy; choice of foreign operation and its implications in terms of risk and control; determinants of multi-national corporations (MNC) activity; strategic issues that relate to international wholly owned subsidiaries, joint ventures, mergers and acquisitions and alliance modes; impact of multi-domestic, regional and global integration strategies; and international corporate governance. Asian regional context will be central to the teaching pedagogy.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the concepts and use the tools for competitive analysis and strategic planning in the international environment
  2. formulate and implement strategies for small medium enterprises (SMEs) and multinational organisations in a global setting, with increasing focus on the emerging economies
  3. identify and analyse the opportunities and dangers involved in international strategic management
  4. evaluate the impact different types of foreign operations have on the internationalising organisation.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGM5310 - International management

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Teh Pei Lee

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Teh Pei Lee

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (Evening)

Prohibitions

MGX5310 and MGS5310

Synopsis

International strategic management; ethics and social responsibility, communication and interpersonal relations; employee attitudes and motivation; cross-cultural leadership; control and conflict issues, international human resource management and comparative industrial relations.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. evaluate the changing nature of international management process
  2. relate management theory to varying and different cultures
  3. describe and explain the complex challenges facing business and managers in a cross-cultural setting
  4. critically compare and contrast a range of cross-cultural variables in the international business management environment and understand their impact on international management.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGM5640 - Cross-cultural management communication

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Tee Keng Kok

Coordinator(s)

Dr Tee Keng Kok

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (Evening)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

MGG5810, MGX5640, MGS5640, MGZ5640

Synopsis

The unit looks at ways in which cultural values are expressed in social behaviour and the communication process including non-verbal cues, in different societies and contexts. The relevance of culture to management practices is analysed and illustrated in various national cultural settings. The unit then considers contemporary issues that affect the cross-cultural communication process (e.g. ethics) before considering the international negotiation process. Objectives, methods of negotiation and ways of negotiating cross-culturally are considered. The unit seeks to impart to students the ability and an awareness of how to communicate effectively in a cross-cultural setting.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the concept of culture and its determinants
  2. develop an understanding of the principles of effective cross-cultural communication
  3. critically evaluate the role communication and negotiations play in international operations
  4. explain the negotiation process and identify and analyse impediments to effective negotiations
  5. assess the relevance of culture to management practises in different cultural settings
  6. identify and evaluate the links between culture, economic processes and organisations.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGM5966 - International business theory and practice

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Manjit Singh Sandhu

Coordinator(s)

Dr Manjit Singh Sandhu

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (Evening)

Prohibitions

MGX9660, MGS5966, MGX5966, MGZ5966

Synopsis

An understanding of major internationalisation theories and its practical implications on international firms; the planning requirements in going international and management issues that arise in an international setting.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define the concept of international business from a multi-disciplinary perspective
  2. explain the diversity and complexity of the international business environment
  3. provide a historical overview of the evolution of the international business phenomenon
  4. discuss the economics and politics of international business transactions
  5. analyse the concept of globalisation and its impact on businesses worldwide
  6. describe the firm internationalisation process
  7. examine the economic, social and political implications of multinational corporate activities
  8. extend awareness of global issues based on current affairs and their implications for international business.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGS5000 - Introductory management research methods

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Ilse Niemann-Struweg (Term 1)
Professor HB Klopper (Term 3)

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Ilse Niemann-Struweg (Term 1)
Professor HB Klopper (Term 3)

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • Term 1 2018 (On-campus block of classes)
  • Term 3 2018 (On-campus block of classes)

Prohibitions

BEW4000, MGX5000

Synopsis

Basic introduction to research design in management; types of research designs; qualitative and quantitative data collection and measurement techniques; coding data; reliability and validity; qualitative and quantitative methods of analysis; interpreting and discussing results; structuring and writing the research report; integrating individual research into overall management literature.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically analyse and interpret basic research designs in the management discipline
  2. construct research questions grounded in a theoretical and conceptual framework
  3. assess the appropriateness, types, and use of qualitative and quantitative data collection and analysis techniques as a means of investigating and answering research questions in the management discipline
  4. identify, search for, and locate secondary data and knowledge relevant to management research, as well as understanding the process of generating or collecting primary data
  5. develop academic writing skills appropriate to the discipline for reporting on business management research projects.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGS5181 - International business strategy

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Ernst Neuland (Term 1)
Dr Natasha Mwila (Term 3)

Coordinator(s)

Professor Ernst Neuland (Term 1)
Dr Natasha Mwila (Term 3)

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • Term 1 2018 (On-campus block of classes)
  • Term 3 2018 (On-campus block of classes)

Prerequisites

MGF5966, MGM5966 or MGS5966 or MGX5966 or MGX9660 or MGZ5966, and achieved 60 credit points.

Prohibitions

MGX5181, MGM5181, MGZ5181

Synopsis

This unit looks at international business strategy theories and their application. Topics include the relationship between environmental scanning and strategic planning; methods of developing a strategic plan; corporate and business level strategy; choice of foreign operation and its implications in terms of risk and control; determinants of MNC activity; strategic issues that relate to international wholly owned subsidiaries, joint ventures, mergers and acquisitions and alliance modes; impact of multi-domestic, regional and global integration strategies; and international corporate governance.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the concepts and use the tools for competitive analysis and strategic planning in the international environment
  2. formulate and implement strategies for SMEs and multinational organisations in a global setting, with increasing focus on the emerging economies
  3. identify and analyse the opportunities and dangers involved in international strategic management
  4. evaluate the impact different types of foreign operations have on the internationalising organisation.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGS5310 - International management

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Ernst Neuland (Term 2)
Dr Natasha Mwila (Trimester 3)

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • Term 2 2018 (On-campus block of classes)
  • Trimester 3 2018 (On-campus block of classes)

Prohibitions

MGX5310 and MGM5310

Synopsis

International strategic management; ethics and social responsibility, communication and interpersonal relations; employee attitudes and motivation; cross-cultural leadership; control and conflict issues, international human resource management and comparative industrial relations.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. evaluate the changing nature of international management processes
  2. relate management theory to varying and different cultures in the Southern African context
  3. describe and explain the complex challenges facing business and managers in a cross-cultural setting
  4. critically compare and contrast a range of cross-cultural variables in the international business management environment and explain their impact on international management.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGS5640 - Cross-cultural management communication

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Mrs Marlene Bogaards

Coordinator(s)

Mrs Marlene Bogaards

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • Trimester 1 2018 (On-campus block of classes)
  • Term 3 2018 (On-campus block of classes)

Prohibitions

MGX5640, MGZ5640, MGM5640

Synopsis

The unit looks at the ways in which cultural values are expressed in social behaviour and the communication process including non-verbal cues, in different societies and contexts. The relevance of culture to management practices is analysed and illustrated in various national cultural settings in the Southern African region. The unit then considers contemporary issues that affect the cross-cultural communication process (eg: ethics) before considering the international negotiation process. Objectives, methods of negotiation and ways of negotiating cross-culturally are considered. The unit seeks to impart to students the ability and an awareness of how to communicate effectively in a cross-cultural setting.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the concept of culture and its determinants
  2. develop an understanding of the principles of effective cross-cultural communication
  3. critically evaluate the role communication and negotiations play in international operations
  4. explain the negotiation process and identify and analyse impediments to effective negotiations
  5. assess the relevance of culture to management practises in different cultural settings
  6. identify and evaluate the links between culture, economic processes and organisations.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGS5900 - Research report

12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Professor HB Klopper

Coordinator(s)

Professor HB Klopper

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • Term 2 2018 (On-campus block of classes)
  • Term 4 2018 (On-campus block of classes)

Prerequisites

Students need to have achieved a minimum grade of 70% in MGS5000 and be granted permission before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

MGX5900

Synopsis

Students conduct an original research project on a significant issue in management. The project can be purely theoretical; e.g.: a literature review leading to development of a new model and/or propositions for future research; an empirical examination such as a test of hypotheses based on primary survey data and/or interviews; a test of hypotheses based on secondary data sources, exploratory or explanatory case study work, experimental or simulation work, or the development of a methodology contributing to the solution of a significant organisational problem.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. conduct a research project on a significant issue in the field management
  2. critically evaluate the extant literature based on the relevant research topic
  3. design and execute a research plan, identifying appropriate methodology contributing to the overall analysis
  4. critically analyse the findings in a major analytical report on the project.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGS5901 - Research report: An introduction

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Professor HB Klopper

Coordinator(s)

Professor HB Klopper

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • Term 1 2018 (On-campus block of classes)
  • Term 3 2018 (On-campus block of classes)

Prerequisites

Students need to be granted permission before undertaking this unit and to have completed MGS5000 with a minimum grade of 70%, and 24 credit points of course work with an average grade of 70%.

Prohibitions

MGX5901

Synopsis

Students conduct an original research project on a significant issue in management. The project can be purely theoretical; e.g.: a literature review leading to development of a new model and/or propositions for future research; an empirical examination such as a test of hypotheses based on primary survey data and/or interviews; a test of hypotheses based on secondary data sources, exploratory or explanatory case study work, experimental or simulation work, or the development of a methodology contributing to the solution of a significant organisational problem.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically analyse and interpret basic research designs in the management discipline
  2. construct research questions grounded in a theoretical and conceptual framework
  3. assess the appropriateness, types, and use of qualitative and quantitative data collection and analysis techniques as a means of investigating and answering research questions in the management discipline
  4. identify, search for, and locate secondary data and knowledge relevant to management research, as well as understanding the process of generating or collecting primary data
  5. develop academic writing skills appropriate to the discipline for reporting on business management research projects.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGS5966 - International business theory and practice

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Natasha Mwila

Coordinator(s)

Mr Henry Berrien

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • Term 1 2018 (On-campus block of classes)
  • Term 3 2018 (On-campus block of classes)

Prohibitions

MGM5966, MGX5966, MGZ5966, MGX9660

Synopsis

This unit looks at management implications of major internationalisation theories; the planning requirements in going international and management issues that arise in an international setting.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define the concept of international business from a multi-disciplinary perspective
  2. explain the diversity and complexity of the international business environment
  3. provide a historical overview of the evolution of the international business phenomenon
  4. discuss the economics and politics of international business transactions
  5. analyse the concept of globalisation and its impact on businesses worldwide
  6. describe the firm internationalisation process
  7. examine the economic, social and political implications of multinational corporate activities
  8. extend awareness of global issues based on current affairs and their implications for international business.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGX5000 - Introductory management research methods

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Ross Donohue

Coordinator(s)

Dr Ross Donohue (Caulfield)
Associate Professor Jane Tong (Malaysia, First semester)
Associate Professor Teh Pei Lee (Malaysia, Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (Evening)

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (Evening)

Prohibitions

BEW4000 and MGX4000

Synopsis

Basic introduction to research design in management; types of research designs; qualitative and quantitative data collection and measurement techniques; coding data; reliability and validity; qualitative and quantitative methods of analysis; interpreting and discussing results; structuring and writing the research report; integrating individual research into overall management literature.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically analyse and interpret basic research designs in the management discipline
  2. construct research questions grounded in a theoretical and conceptual framework
  3. assess the appropriateness, types, and use of qualitative and quantitative data collection and analysis techniques as a means of investigating and answering research questions in the management discipline
  4. identify, search for, and locate secondary data and knowledge relevant to management research, as well as understanding the process of generating or collecting primary data
  5. develop academic writing skills appropriate to the discipline for reporting on business management research projects.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGX5020 - Business ethics in a global environment

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Cristina Neesham

Coordinator(s)

Dr Cristina Neesham

Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

This unit is designed to develop students moral reasoning about the conduct of business in the global context. They will achieve this by exploring theories of ethics and justice in business and in its relationships with society, across different cultural and religious traditions; and reflecting on their own moral development through analysis of ethical and unethical behaviours in business.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the relationship between ethics, morals and values in the workplace
  2. explore different perspectives on moral development
  3. examine ethical theories to explain how they contribute to ethical business practices
  4. analyse some of the competing demands on business when scrutinising the ethics of business activity
  5. discuss the relationship between business practice, ethics and religion across different traditions.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGX5030 - Corporate social responsibility

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Michelle Greenwood (First semester)
Dr Susan Mayson (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Michelle Greenwood (First semester)
Dr Susan Mayson (Second semester)

Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

This unit analyses corporate social responsibility (CSR) from a range of different perspectives. The course is designed within a framework of understanding, applying and managing corporate social responsibility in business; CSR is considered in the context of the marketplace, the workplace, in the community and the natural environment. Through the use of case studies of Australian and international companies, students will examine CSR challenges across a range of industry settings and develop strategies for responsible management.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. compare and contrast the strengths and limitations of a range of models of corporate social responsibility
  2. examine the range of external and internal factors that impact on an organisation's corporate social responsibility
  3. analyse the major corporate social responsibilities of business, in particular within the marketplace, the workplace, in the community and the natural environment in the context of globalisation
  4. identify the tensions between conflicting business and social responsibilities
  5. critique different managerial approaches to working with stakeholders to address issues of corporate social responsibility.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGX5120 - Contemporary Asia

6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Wendy Smith

Coordinator(s)

Dr Wendy Smith

Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

The unit offers a general introduction to contemporary Asia, to regional problems and interactions and the relevant political, economic and other relationships, by identifying and discussing the major issues of the day and their illustration of significant regional themes. Discussion includes an analysis of relevant countries' history and culture as these affect issues and relationships.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify and critically evaluate the key events and trends in socio-political, socio-economic and socio-cultural affairs in the separate nation states of contemporary Asia
  2. assess the impact on Australia of selected contemporary events in Asia
  3. investigate the nature of regional interactions and conflicts, based on a comparative analysis of the history, politics, economy and culture of individual countries
  4. examine Australia's role in the region through a focus on her bilateral and multilateral relationships in Asia
  5. select a disciplinary area of interest and conduct an individual research project on one aspect of contemporary affairs in a chosen Asian country.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGX5130 - Managing diversity and inclusion

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Marjorie Jerrard

Coordinator(s)

Dr Marjorie Jerrard

Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

This unit examines the social, economic and legal dimensions of diversity and inclusion. It aims to provide both theoretical and practical application of contemporary ideas to promote workplace diversity and inclusion. Topics include theoretical perspectives on diversity and inclusion, forms of diversity and inclusion, the legal dimensions of discrimination, the legal framework regulating diversity, inclusion, discrimination and EEO, the strategic business, HRM and employment relations issues associated with promoting diversity and inclusion, the state of workplace diversity in the Australian context, contemporary public policy issues and diversity and inclusion in a comparative context.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the concepts of diversity and inclusion applied to the workplace
  2. evaluate the legal, ethical, and professional issues associated with diversity management in the contemporary workplace
  3. identify the strategic business, HRM and employment relations issues associated with developing and implementing diversity and inclusion initiatives in the workplace
  4. understand the legal framework regulating the management of workplace diversity and inclusion issues
  5. analyse practical case studies of inclusion, diversity and discrimination in the workplace.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGX5300 - Governance

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Ken Coghill

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Ken Coghill

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses: 0105, 0319, 2099, 2778, 1065, 3801, 1506, 2643, 2642, 0200, 0201, 0028 or 1822 or seek Chief Examiner's approval before undertaking this unit.

Synopsis

This unit challenges students to think through the factors shaping how communities are governed in Australia and elsewhere as all societies grapple with the challenges of climate change, sustainability and the meaning of "progress". It develops knowledge and skills necessary for good governance applying United Nations Global Compact sustainability concepts. Students from Australian and other backgrounds share their experiences in various levels of government/intergovernmental, civil society (not for profit) and market (private business) sectors. It examines Integrated Governance i.e. the roles, relationships and networks of the levels and sectors in contemporary governance including how political systems work, democracy, the relationships between politicians and public servants, ethics, accountability, the importance of civil society and activity, and the role of the media.

Outcomes

Our students will be able to:

  1. explain the concept of Integrated Governance and governance issues affecting nations, international regions and the global community
  2. identify the roles and dynamic relationships of the public sector, private sector and civil society in good governance
  3. create and develop ideas for reform of governance to meet particular policy objectives.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGX5340 - International public policy and management

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Ramanie Samaratunge

Coordinator(s)

Dr Ramanie Samaratunge

Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

The unit provides a comparative overview of international issues affecting public sector policy and management. Topics include the concept and impact of globalisation on international public policy and management; policy analysis and implementation in a changing world; management issues in international public administration and in developing countries; notions of development; and different strategies for development. Policy formulation and management practices in selected Asian countries are examined.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the similarities and differences between public management, public policy and governance
  2. analyse the relationship between the public/intergovernmental, non-profit/community and corporate sectors at the international level
  3. explore the international and global dimensions of public policy, governance and management
  4. explain the similarities and differences between public policy, governance and management regimes in developed world and developing world settings
  5. analyse issues and problems in international public policy and management by means of Continental/regional and national case studies.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGX5360 - Strategic management in the public sector

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Linda McGuire

Coordinator(s)

Dr Linda McGuire

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses: 0105, 0319, 2099, 2778, 1065, 3801, 1506, 2643, 2642, 0200, 0201, 0028 or 1822 and must have passed MGF5927, MGX9270, MPA5901 or MPA9001 or seek Chief Examiner's approval before undertaking this unit.

Synopsis

This unit focuses on the practical application of strategic management concepts, theories and analytical techniques in the public sector. Public value, public accountability and public policy processes are fundamental differences that have practical implications for strategic management. Learning is structured around cases. The emphasis is on understanding the nature and complexity of strategy problems, the role of strategic analysis, and the application of frameworks and techniques to identify issues and evaluate options.

Outcomes

Our students will be able to:

  1. Identify and analyse the factors that influence strategy in public sector contexts
  2. Select and apply appropriate frameworks and analytical techniques for strategic analysis in public sector contexts
  3. Research and evaluate evidence for strategic analysis in public sector contexts
  4. Evaluate strategic issues in a case and design appropriate recommendations for action.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGX5370 - Policy analysis

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Deirdre O'Neill

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Deirdre O'Neill

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses: 0105, 0319, 2099, 2778, 1065, 3801, 1506, 2643, 2642, 0028, 0200, 0201 or 1822 or seek Chief Examiner's approval before undertaking this unit.

Synopsis

This unit assists students to understand the theory and practice of policy analysis, the role of evidence in decision making and how policy analysis contributes to better policy outcomes.

Outcomes

Our students will be able to:

  1. explain different theories and methods of policy analysis
  2. apply theories and methods of analysis to policy issues
  3. design strategies to address policy issues.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGX5440 - Public sector financial management

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Ken Coghill

Coordinator(s)

Sourin Chakravorty

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses: 0105, 0319, 2099, 2778, 1065, 3801, 1506, 2643, 2642, 0200, 0201, 0028 or 1822 and must have passed MGF5927, MGX9270, MPA5901 or MPA9001 or seek Chief Examiner's approval before undertaking this unit.

Synopsis

This unit studies financial resource allocation and management within the public sector. The focus is on the theory and practice of an integrated cycle of resource management used extensively in public sector planning, budgeting and resource allocation, performance management and reporting. The unit demonstrates the importance of integrating finance into an overall planning structure.

Outcomes

Our student will be able to:

  1. analyse the key elements of a 'performance-based' public sector financial management framework
  2. analyse key issues and trends in public sector financial management
  3. apply public sector financial management theory to evaluate current policies and practices
  4. evaluate the financial implications of policy objectives and competing priorities.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGX5461 - Contemporary issues in globalisation

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Eduard Bomhoff

Coordinator(s)

Professor Eduard Bomhoff

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (Evening)

Synopsis

Students examine globalisation and assess its implications for the governance of the business enterprise, nation states, and relations between business and government. The unit also examines the difficulties that globalisation creates for nations and multinational enterprises in both the emerging and developed world, the open markets, and the policy responses proposed to balance economic, social and political costs.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify major political, economic and regulatory forces that underpin the globalisation process
  2. critically analyse how international political and economic developments are shaping the structure of global institutions
  3. evaluate how the globalisation of rules can become a source of competitive advantage for firms, governments and non profit organisations
  4. identify solutions that would enhance the sovereignty of ordinary citizens over the globalisation process.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGX5470 - International manufacturing

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Daniel Prajogo

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Daniel Prajogo

Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

Selected international studies covering issues of strategy and best practices in manufacturing and operations management. Students analyse the relevance of specific issues presented in the Australian context.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop understanding on the basic concepts of operations strategies and operations management techniques of manufacturing companies in the global competition
  2. analyse the applications of operations management techniques in various situations
  3. develop problems solving skills for handling key operational issues from managerial perspectives.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGX5630 - Principles of negotiation

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Sandra Cockfield

Coordinator(s)

Dr Sandra Cockfield

Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

This unit provides an introduction to the principles of negotiation applied to various spheres of conflict and exchange, including work and employment relations, business and commercial conflicts, international trade and diplomacy. As well as providing an overview of key theoretical ideas, the unit draws on a wide range of bargaining exercises and simulations which allow students to place these concepts in practical negotiation situations. Topics include styles of conflict management and negotiation, negotiation strategies and situations, effective and ineffective negotiation tactics, understanding key processes and dynamics in negotiation, judgement and cognitive error in negotiations, multi-party negotiations, and the social context of negotiations.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically evaluate the common characteristics of conflict in a wide range of exchange relationships

  2. evaluate theoretical foundations for effective negotiation
  3. develop practical skills through application of concepts in negotiation exercises.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGX5730 - International trade policy

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Jagjit Plahe

Coordinator(s)

Dr Jagjit Plahe

Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

The unit will provide students with key insights regarding how trade policy is formulated, negotiated and implemented; the economic, social and cultural implications of international trade rules; the pattern of relationships that exists between trade policy and prosperity; and the implications of the global financial crisis for international trade policy. The unit focuses on the GATT/WTO System and Bilateral and Regional Trade Agreements.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. assess the advantages and limitations of the multilateral trading system in terms of its decision making processes and its agreements (agriculture, services, intellectual property, etc.)
  2. explain the recent surge of bilateralism and regionalism and assess the implications of this surge for the multilateral trading system
  3. evaluate the opportunities and the limitations of formally linking human rights and environmental issues to the global trading system
  4. judge whether the current global trading system treats trade liberalisation as a means to an end (the end being sustainable and equitable development) or an end in itself
  5. evaluate the implications of the global financial crisis for the global trading system.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGX5890 - International study program in international business

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Manjit Singh Sandhu

Coordinator(s)

Dr Manjit Singh Sandhu

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • Summer semester B 2018 (On-campus)

Synopsis

This program aims to provide an opportunity for students to experience the diversity of contexts for doing business in Asia. The program will focus on the influence of diverse cultures, politics, institutions and local practices, and their impact on business decisions and managerial behaviour in Asia. The two-week program comprises on- and off- campus seminars and company visits in two or more Asian countries. The program will take students to meet with business and government leaders, conduct company visits and discuss business practices.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine the cultural, political, and institutional issues that influence the business activities in the selected countries
  2. critically analyse the impact of the cultural, political and other institutional influence on company's strategic decisions as well as other management practices
  3. apply the basic theories and concepts in managing multinational firms in the international companies we tour and analyse both congruency and discrepancy between theories and real practices.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGX5900 - Research report

12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Ross Donohue (First semester)
Dr Jun Gu (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Ross Donohue (Caulfield, First semester)
Dr Jun Gu (Caulfield, Second semester)
Dr Erhan Atay (Malaysia)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (Off-campus)
  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (Off-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students need to have achieved a minimum grade of 70% in MGX5901 and be granted permission before undertaking this unit.

Synopsis

Students conduct an original research project on a significant issue in management. The project can be purely theoretical; eg: a literature review leading to development of a new model and/or propositions for future research; an empirical examination such as a test of hypotheses based on primary survey data and/or interviews; a test of hypotheses based on secondary data sources, exploratory or explanatory case study work, experimental or simulation work, or the development of a methodology contributing to the solution of a significant organisational problem.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. conduct a research project on a significant issue in the field management
  2. critically evaluate the extant literature based on the relevant research topic
  3. design and execute a research plan, identifying appropriate methodology contributing to the overall analysis
  4. critically analyse the findings in a major analytical report on the project.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 288 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average six/eight hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGX5901 - Research report (introduction)

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Ross Donohue (First semester)
Dr Jun Gu (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Ross Donohue (Caulfield, First semester)
Dr Jun Gu (Caulfield, Second semester)
Dr Erhan Atay (Malaysia)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (Off-campus)
  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (Off-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students need to be granted permission before undertaking this unit and to have completed MGX5000 with a minimum grade of 70%, and 24 credit points of course work with an average grade of 70%.

Synopsis

Students conduct an original research project on a significant issue in management. The project can be purely theoretical; eg: a literature review leading to development of a new model and/or propositions for future research; an empirical examination such as a test of hypotheses based on primary survey data and/or interviews; a test of hypotheses based on secondary data sources, exploratory or explanatory case study work, experimental or simulation work, or the development of a methodology contributing to the solution of a significant organisational problem.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify a research project on a significant issue in the field management
  2. identify and critically evaluate relevant literature on the research topic
  3. identify and critically evaluate an appropriate methodology for the research project.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGZ5181 - International business strategy and cases

12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Dan Wang

Coordinator(s)

Dr Dan Wang

Unit guides

Offered

Suzhou

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

MGF5966, MGM5966 or MGS5966 or MGX5966 or MGX9660 or MGZ5966, and achieved 60 credit points.

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 4435, 2098, 4411 or B6008 to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions

MGX5181, MGS5181, MGM5181

Synopsis

This unit looks at international business strategy theories and their application. Topics include the relationship between environmental scanning and strategic planning; methods of developing a strategic plan; corporate and business level strategy; choice of foreign operation and its implications in terms of risk and control; determinants of multi-national corporation (MNC) activity; strategic issues that relate to international wholly owned subsidiaries, joint ventures, mergers and acquisitions and alliance modes; impact of multi-domestic, regional and global integration strategies; and international corporate governance.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the concepts and use the tools for assessing country attractiveness and strategic planning in the international environment
  2. formulate and implement strategies for various modes of operations in an international setting
  3. identify and analyse the opportunities and risks involved in international business strategy
  4. evaluate the impact different foreign operations have on the internationalising organisation.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 288 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average six/eight hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGZ5640 - Cross-cultural management communication

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Dan Wang

Coordinator(s)

Dr Dan Wang

Unit guides

Offered

Suzhou

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 4435, 2098, 4411 or B6008 to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions

MGX5640, MGS5640, MGM5640

Synopsis

The unit looks at the ways in which cultural values are expressed in social behaviour and the communication process including non-verbal cues, in different societies and contexts. The relevance of culture to management practices is analysed and illustrated in various national cultural settings. The unit then considers contemporary issues that affect the cross-cultural communication process (e.g.: ethics) before considering the international negotiation process. Objectives, methods of negotiation and ways of negotiating cross-culturally are considered. The unit seeks to impart to students the ability and an awareness of how to communicate effectively in a cross-cultural setting.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the concept of culture and its determinants
  2. develop an understanding of the principles of effective cross-cultural communication
  3. critically evaluate the role communication and negotiations play in international operations
  4. explain the negotiation process and identify and analyse impediments to effective negotiations
  5. assess the relevance of culture to management practises in different cultural settings
  6. identify and evaluate the links between culture, economic processes and organisations.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGZ5750 - The governance of international trade

12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Mingqiong Mike Zhang

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Mingqiong Mike Zhang

Unit guides

Offered

Suzhou

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 4435, 2098, 4411 or B6008 to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions

MGX5730Not offered in 2018, MGF5730, MGX5760, MGF5760

Synopsis

The unit will provide students with key insights regarding how trade policy is formulated, negotiated and implemented; the economic, social and cultural implications of international trade rules; the pattern of relationships that exists between trade policy and prosperity; and the implications of the global financial crisis for international trade policy. The unit focuses on the GATT/WTO System and Bilateral and Regional Trade Agreements.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. assess the advantages and limitations of the multilateral trading system in terms of its decision making processes and its agreements (agriculture, services, intellectual property, etc.)
  2. explain the recent surge of bilateralism and regionalism and assess the implications of this surge for the multilateral trading system
  3. evaluate the opportunities and the limitations of formally linking human rights and environmental issues to the global trading system
  4. judge whether the current global trading system treats trade liberalisation as a means to an end (the end being sustainable and equitable development) or an end in itself
  5. evaluate the implications of the global financial crisis for the global trading system.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 288 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average six/eight hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGZ5966 - International business theory and practice

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Mingqiong Mike Zhang

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Mingqiong Mike Zhang

Unit guides

Offered

Suzhou

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 4435, 2098, 4411 or B6008 to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions

MGX9660, MGX5966, MGS5966, MGM5966

Synopsis

Management implications of major internationalisation theories; the planning requirements in going international and management issues that arise in an international setting.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define the concept of international business from a multi-disciplinary perspective
  2. explain the diversity and complexity of the international business environment
  3. provide a historical overview of the evolution of the international business phenomenon
  4. discuss the economics and politics of international business transactions
  5. analyse the concept of globalisation and its impact on businesses worldwide
  6. describe the firm internationalisation process
  7. examine the economic, social and political implications of multinational corporate activities
  8. extend awareness of global issues based on current affairs and their implications for international business.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKF5150 - Major project

12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Sophie Feng

Coordinator(s)

Dr Sophie Feng

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

Prerequisites

Permission required

Synopsis

Do you want to apply what you have learnt from the units in your Master's program? Do you have a good idea from your work or even an assignment which you would like to further explore? Why not consider the major project unit. This unit is designed for students who wish to undertake an application-oriented research project. The project may be related to the students' current workplace or a special area of interest. An academic staff member will supervise the major project.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify a major practical issue in a marketing-related area of interest
  2. use marketing principles and frameworks to investigate and analyse the issue
  3. provide suitable practical solutions or advice on the issue
  4. effectively communicate the major project in a written report.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 288 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average six-eight hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of supervisor directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKF5200 - Assessing marketing performance

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Stephen Saunders

Coordinator(s)

Ms Jo McGregor

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of the following units MKX5461, MKX9160, MKX9550 OR MBA9006 before undertaking this unit.

Synopsis

Evaluation of a marketing program is a critical ingredient of the marketing director's role. This unit examines various means of diagnosing, assessing, tracking and evaluating performance and modifying actions to improve marketing operations.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. conduct a comprehensive marketing productivity analysis using marketing audit models
  2. determine the adequacy of the existing organisational information systems and marketing effectiveness measures
  3. complete a strategic marketing policy review and design information systems to improve control and modify analysis procedures
  4. present the audit approach (philosophy); key information issues, control and modification procedures to class
  5. develop and adopt marketing audit model to suit circumstances.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 70% + Examination: 30%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKF5231 - Strategic brand management

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Colin Jevons

Coordinator(s)

Assoc Professor Colin Jevons (with special guest presenter Professor Leslie de Chernatony)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus split block of classes)
  • Second semester 2018 (Off-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have completed one of the following units: MKF5917, MKX9160 or MKF5916Not offered in 2018, or be enrolled in course B6010 or 4431

Synopsis

This unit will cover customer-based brand equity; brand vision, positioning and values; components of a brand, services branding; planning brand marketing programmes; points of parity and points of difference; implementing and resourcing brand marketing programmes; measuring and evaluating brand equity, its sources and outcomes; building a consistent integrated brand strategy and brand extensions; branding of new products; international brand management; reinforcing, revitalising, and retiring brands; and overall strategic brand management.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine the brand and the various functions of brand management
  2. understand the various components of a brand and how they interact
  3. analyse branding techniques and apply them to a variety of different issues
  4. generalise and hypothesise from branding theory into branding practice.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKF5241 - Sport marketing and sponsorship

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Srinivas Sridharan

Coordinator(s)

Mr Kevin Argus

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of the following before undertaking this unit: MBA9006, MBA5906, MKX5461, MKF5461, MKX9160, MKF5916Not offered in 2018, MKX5955 or MKX9550.

Prohibitions

MKX5241

Synopsis

The unit introduces the omnipresence of sport in Australian society, the interconnectedness of sport and business, particularly marketing, and those factors that differentiate sport marketing from mainstream marketing. The unit will draw on the rapidly expanding body of literature on sport marketing and sponsorship. Students will also be introduced to the most current marketing concepts and their relevance to sport marketing and sponsorship. Students will develop an appreciation of sport sponsorship as a co-marketing alliance.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. discriminate between the marketing of sport properties, and the marketing through sport properties in the form of sponsorship and the implications for strategy development
  2. critically assess the relevance of the contingency marketing planning framework for sport marketing
  3. develop a fan profile based on level of team identification as an indication of fan loyalty
  4. determine the role of sponsorship in marketing and in particular in marketing communication and branding strategy
  5. critically analyse effective methods for evaluating sponsorship.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKF5251 - Case studies in marketing strategy

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Stephen Saunders

Coordinator(s)

Mr Bill Pickett

Not offered in 2018

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 2276 or 4431 and have completed 48 credit points

Prohibitions

MKF5351

Synopsis

Using the case study method this unit provides an analytical framework from which students can explore how marketing strategy is applied to a variety of organisations within the context of contemporary and emerging issues. Students will be taught how to analyse, evaluate and implement marketing strategy. As this is the capstone unit in the Master of Marketing degree course, a theoretical grounding in the earlier core marketing units is essential for students undertaking this unit.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. integrate the theoretical and functional aspects of marketing (and other business disciplines) into a practical problem-solving framework
  2. analyse information supplied from a case and identify the core marketing problem
  3. design, evaluate and recommend marketing strategies that solve the identified core marketing problem
  4. develop personal communication and discussion skills.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKF5260 - International marketing

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Yongfu He

Coordinator(s)

Dr Yongfu He

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Second semester 2018 (Evening)

Prerequisites

MBA5715, MKF5917 or MKX5955.

Prohibitions

MKX5260

Synopsis

Competition in the global arena is increasingly dynamic. It is critical for businesses to achieve and sustain competitive advantage through maintaining effective and efficient global marketing operations. This unit aims to assist students in acquiring a deeper understanding of market opportunities and techniques to identify, develop, monitor and manage global marketing strategies in the international marketing environment. Students will be exposed to contemporary international marketing literature and internet based national/regional and global market information to build their analytical skills for marketing decision making.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop an understanding of the strategies, operations, and performance of leading local and global companies
  2. examine the key trends driving the nature and direction of change in the local and global markets
  3. apply marketing concepts and models in formulating global marketing plans
  4. develop and evaluate cohesive marketing strategies for organisations involved in global marketing.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKF5280 - Sustainable marketing

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Mauricio Palmeira

Coordinator(s)

Ms Joanne McGregor

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

Students must have passed six graduate units or 36 credit points including one of the following units: MKX5461, MKX9160, MKX9550, MBA9006 or MBA5906 or be enrolled in course 3783 before undertaking this unit.

Synopsis

This unit prepares students to work in a new marketing environment where new products and services that tackle environmental degradation and social inequity are endowing firms with enduring competitive advantage. It examines the core principles of sustainability from both micro-marketing (consumer, firm) and macro-marketing (society, economy) perspectives and equips students with thinking tools to develop sustainable marketing strategies for private and public firms.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand key concepts of environmental sustainability from the standpoint of businesses (e.g. triple bottom line)
  2. understand how the concepts of marketing and sustainability inter-relate (e.g. sustainable products, pricing for sustainability)
  3. demonstrate and apply key sustainable marketing concepts, and build skills to do so in the longer term in organisations (e.g. life cycle analysis)
  4. make connections of sustainable marketing with other disciplines and everyday life (e.g. biodegradable product packaging)
  5. reflect on one's personal learning, and crystallise personal sustainability attitudes and behaviours.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKF5301 - Minor thesis

12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Sophie Feng

Coordinator(s)

Dr Sophie Feng

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (Off-campus Day)
  • Second semester 2018 (Off-campus Day)
  • Full year 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 to First semester 2019 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Permission required

Synopsis

Have you ever wondered what academic research means? Do you have some special interests in an academic area in marketing? Why not consider the minor thesis unit. This unit is designed for students who wish to undertake independent research that advances academic marketing knowledge. An academic staff member will supervise the minor thesis.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify a research problem in marketing
  2. critically evaluate the literature relevant to the selected area of interest
  3. formulate and conduct independent marketing research
  4. effectively communicate the research in a minor thesis.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 288 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average six-eight hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of supervisor directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKF5351 - Marketing strategy masterclass

12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Sudha Mani

Coordinator(s)

Dr Sudha Mani

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Trimester 2 2018 (Off-campus)
  • Trimester 2 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in course B6010 or 2276 and completed 24 credit points

Prohibitions

MKF5251Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

This is the capstone unit of the Master of Marketing degree program. The overarching goal of the degree is to prepare competent and responsible entrants to the marketing profession. Accordingly, this integrative, end-of-program capstone unit will help in translating knowledge gleaned from all other degree units (i.e. the academic discipline of marketing) toward the professional discipline of marketing. This will be achieved in the form of "direct decision making scenarios" (case studies), "experiential learning episodes" (simulation), "competitive situations" (mid-term case completion), "learning from academic and industry leaders" (research day, marketing masterclass, marketing breakfasts), and "immersive learning events" (industry visits).

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically evaluate competitive marketing decision situations and craft innovative and systematic solutions for which personal responsibility is taken
  2. exhibit a keen sense of personal learning from professionals (academic and practitioner), competitive and immersive situations and decision scenarios
  3. develop a perspective of socially responsible and culturally sensitive global marketing practitioners.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload equals 288 hours per semester.

See also Unit timetable information


MKF5371 - Business to business marketing

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Samir Gupta

Coordinator(s)

Dr Samir Gupta

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (Evening)
  • Second semester 2018 (Off-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B6010, 2276 or 4431 or by permission of the Chief Examiner to undertake this unit

Prohibitions

MKX5371

Synopsis

Marketing of business goods and services poses some unique challenges for business-to-business marketing practitioners. This unit provides an integrated marketing and strategic management approach into understanding and applying business-to-business marketing theory. In so doing, the unit places business goods and services issues within a broader marketing context. The unit addresses the need for business-to-business marketers to not only understand buyer-seller relationships and behaviours but also how to use these insights to develop business marketing strategies in dynamic markets.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the core concepts and theories of business-to-business marketing
  2. use business-to-business literature to critique current business practice
  3. use the understanding of buyer-seller relationships and behaviour to develop marketing strategies for dynamic business markets
  4. research and apply business-to-business marketing theories to practice.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKF5391 - Sales management

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Kimble Montagu

Coordinator(s)

Mr Kimble Montagu

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of the following: MKX9160, MKF5916Not offered in 2018 or MKX5955, OR be enrolled in course B6010 or 4431 before undertaking this unit.

Synopsis

Topics include the nature, role and scope of sales management; the sales organisation; the selection, recruitment, training and development of sales people; the motivation, compensation and evaluation of sales people; the sales process; sales forecasting and estimating market potential; sales budgeting and profitability; planning sales territories; determining sales quotas and the optimum allocation of sales effort and resources.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. evaluate different selling situations and select appropriate selling approaches to implement
  2. demonstrate an ability to communicate in a persuasive and professional manner to a group or to an individual whether during a formal presentation or otherwise
  3. apply appropriate writing skills to produce quality business reports
  4. recall the key elements of sales management, personal and selling, specific to business relationships.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKF5403 - Advanced business research methods

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Yelena Tsarenko

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Yelena Tsarenko

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus split block of classes)

Prerequisites

MKF9120 or MKF5912 or be enrolled in course 4431.

Synopsis

An in-depth introduction to the critical thinking and planning required in the initial stages of a thesis or research project. Development of a literature review, research model and research proposal.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop an understanding of how to formulate a theoretical framework for a marketing problem/opportunity
  2. provide an understanding and appreciation of qualitative and quantitative research techniques
  3. provide an understanding of how to conduct data analysis
  4. develop a comprehensive case study and a comprehensive research report
  5. develop a capability of communicating research findings.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKF5461 - Contemporary issues in marketing

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Dominic Thomas

Coordinator(s)

Dr Dominic Thomas

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (Evening)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B6010.

Prohibitions

MKX4461

Synopsis

This unit provides students with an in-depth exposure to contemporary issues in marketing and in particular to the relationship between observed marketing practice and extant marketing theory. Taught in seminar format, the unit requires significant interaction between students and presenters.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. recognise and evaluate some of the contemporary issues facing organisations and particularly marketers and marketing in today's dynamic marketplace
  2. examine how traditional marketing theory, structures, concepts, techniques and practices may become emerging issues, transformed by new knowledge or impacted by alternative perspectives
  3. explain a number of contemporary issues and their impact in detail
  4. analyse existing literature to gain insight into selected current and future issues that will impact business and marketing in particular
  5. recommend and compose responses to existing or potential marketing issues.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKF5463 - Advanced buyer behaviour

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Harmen Oppewal

Coordinator(s)

Professor Harmen Oppewal

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus split block of classes)

Prerequisites

MKF5911 or MKF5917 or be enrolled in course 4431.

Prohibitions

BEX5463

Synopsis

This unit allows you to engage deeply with questions about consumers and consumption. How do consumers make purchase decisions? What makes them satisfied with their consumption experience? And what role does consumption play in consumers' lives? We will also address the question how to best obtain useful knowledge about consumers and consumption. The unit aims to develop your ability to critically examine key concepts and theories in consumer behaviour and to explore how they could be successfully applied in marketing.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe, identify and critically assess the role and contribution of main paradigms in the social and behavioural disciplines to the field of buyer/consumer behaviour and marketing decision making
  2. analyse and critically assess the nature of explanation from a range of perspectives
  3. analyse selected topics from the current consumer behaviour literature from different and multidisciplinary perspectives and critically compare and evaluate these perspectives
  4. apply selected concepts and theories from the consumer behaviour literature to marketing problems
  5. critically evaluate the usefulness of some of the core concepts in the consumer behaviour literature for marketing practice.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKF5500 - Survey data analysis

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Felix Mavondo

Coordinator(s)

Professor Felix Mavondo

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

ETX2121Not offered in 2018, ETX2111 or MBA9007

Prohibitions

ETC3500, ETF3500, MKC3500, MKF3500Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

This unit adopts a very practical approach to introducing multivariate statistical techniques that are currently popular in the analysis of business and marketing survey data. The main topics covered are: a review of statistical tools, factor analysis, structural equation modelling, cluster analysis, discriminant analysis, correspondence analysis and multivariate analysis of variance. SPSS software will be used for problem solving. The emphasis will be on understanding, interpreting and reporting results of the analysis and on the proper use of techniques. Case studies and exercises will be drawn from diverse areas of the business world.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. introduce exploratory factor analysis and structural equation modelling
  2. show how multiple regression and multivariate analysis of covariance can be used to analyse survey data
  3. provide exposure to logistic regression in discrete-choice modelling studies
  4. demonstrate the role of cluster analysis and multidimensional scaling and correspondence analysis in understanding multivariate data
  5. provide an opportunity to become competent in the use of a statistical package (SPSS).

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKF5505 - Marketing for healthcare managers

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Erica Brady

Unit guides

Offered

Monash Online

  • Teaching Period 6 2018 (Online)

Synopsis

This unit will examine marketing activities undertaken by organisations with a special emphasis on the healthcare industry. It provides an introduction of marketing concepts and techniques covering aspects like value exchange, development of corporate and marketing strategic plans, product and service development, the use of marketing decision making tools and fundamentals of consumer behaviour.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine the concepts and theories of marketing and apply them to health administration and healthcare
  2. apply key techniques and tools of marketing management to healthcare environment
  3. examine the scope and role of the marketing function and its relationship to organisational strategies and critically evaluate how functional marketing plans can be developed and implemented in the healthcare context
  4. assess the marketing challenges facing firms in a more competitive global market place.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKF5601 - Social media marketing

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Luke Greenacre

Coordinator(s)

Dr Luke Greenacre

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Second semester 2018 (Evening)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B6010, 2276 or 4431 or seek Chief Examiner approval before undertaking this unit.

Synopsis

This unit will extend understanding of digital marketing, in particular the role of new media. The social media landscape will be investigated, in terms of the tools and technologies, as well as consumers and communities. Approaches to understanding customers and stakeholders through the use of social media will be explored, and various strategies to engage with these stakeholders will be developed. Particular emphasis will be placed on understanding trends and changes in consumer behaviour as a result of social media, including examining why and how certain ideas spread and how businesses can meet the needs and wants of consumers through the social media landscape.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse and critically review the social media landscape
  2. advise and authenticate how organisations can utilise social media to build an in-depth understanding of customers and stakeholders
  3. evaluate and justify social media strategies to engage customers and stakeholders
  4. debate and critically reflect how ideas spread through social media and devise strategies to meet consumers' needs and wants.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKF5630 - Services marketing

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Tracey Danaher

Coordinator(s)

Professor Tracey Dagger

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in one of the following courses: 2276, 4431, B6010, B6005 or seek Chief Examiner approval

Synopsis

An in-depth analysis of the marketing techniques that apply to service organisations and industries including service design and delivery, customer service, service quality measurement and internal marketing.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. gain an appreciation of the unique challenges inherent in marketing and managing services and developing and delivering quality services
  2. integrate the strategies, tools and approaches for addressing the unique challenges associated with the marketing of services
  3. apply a knowledge of service quality to an actual business context
  4. become a more successful and effective manager and consumer through the understanding of the design, delivery and communication of the service offer
  5. explain the inter-functional coordination necessary to deliver a quality service.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKF5641 - Advanced marketing communication

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Peter Danaher

Coordinator(s)

Professor Peter Danaher

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

Students must have completed MKF5926 or MKF5917, OR be enrolled in course 4431 to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions

MKX5641

Synopsis

The aim of this unit is to extend knowledge and understanding beyond that covered in introductory marketing communication theory, and to develop improved skills to apply this understanding to practical and challenging communication scenarios. In particular emphasis will be placed on critical analysis and insights gained from exposure to the literature and professional practice in marketing communication.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. investigate and evaluate contemporary thinking, theory advances and practices in marketing communication and its constituent parts, including advertising, digital communication and so on, and their integration
  2. construct media management strategies through the analysis of media consumption and engagement behaviours
  3. compare metrics that are used to measure marketing communication strategies and elements
  4. devise structures and processes to ensure the creation of effective and efficient marketing communication.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKF5660 - Relationship marketing

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Margaret Matanda

Coordinator(s)

Mr Ves Bogdanovich

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of the following before undertaking this unit: MBA9006, MBA5906, MKX5461, MKF5461, MKX9160, MKF5916Not offered in 2018, MKX5955 or MKX9550.

Prohibitions

MKX5660

Synopsis

The relationship marketing model; 'internal marketing' and collaborative work practices; processes for closing the 'service quality gap' including problem solving and opportunity seeking on an on-going basis.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define the purposes and scope of the general principles of relationship marketing
  2. critically evaluate the techniques used in relationship marketing and to evaluate how these may be applied in organisations
  3. analyse the opportunities and challenges that are inherent in implementing relationship marketing
  4. discriminate between situations where relationship marketing might be appropriate and where it might not.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKF5741 - Marketing performance and decision analysis

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Peter Danaher (First semester)
Dr Nukhet Gur (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Professor Peter Danaher (First semester)
Dr Nukhet Gur (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus split block of classes)
  • Second semester 2018 (Online)

Prerequisites

MKF5917 or MKX9160 or MKF5916Not offered in 2018 or MKF5461

Prohibitions

MKX5741

Synopsis

The ability to evaluate and anticipate the marketing department's contribution within the organisation is of growing importance. Increasingly, organisation boards are requiring marketing to provide greater rigour and accountability. This unit explores the use of marketing models and metrics as a means of analysing performance and demonstrating the expected return on marketing investment, thereby enabling effective decision making.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the concept of the value chain that provides a framework for linking business issues, marketing activity and consumer response to financial performance
  2. develop skills to view marketing processes and relationships systematically and analytically
  3. apply marketing metrics and models that relate to specific business issues
  4. analyse and interpret the output of a range of marketing models in order to improve marketing decision making
  5. have the ability to create a framework for developing a marketing dashboard.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKF5760 - Marketing leadership in society

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Angela Cruz (First Semester)
Associate Professor Jan Brace-Govan (Second Semester)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Angela Cruz (First Semester)
Associate Professor Jan Brace-Govan (Second Semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (Off-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus split block of classes)

Prerequisites

MKF5917 or MKF5916Not offered in 2018 or MKF5461

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in course 2276, B6010, 4431 or with Chief Examiner's approval.

Synopsis

Contemporary marketing leaders have to engage with diverse and compelling social issues. This is regardless of the sector in which marketing leaders operate - private, public, or civil society. Hence, awareness of contemporary social issues and the role of marketing in addressing these is a critical part of the modern marketing toolkit. The approach will define the marketer's contribution as responsible and effective global leaders. In this unit you will explore various marketing concepts, frameworks and techniques ranging from social marketing to macromarketing and transformative consumer research, which can help develop such awareness and facilitate informed decision making. A high level of understanding of marketing concepts will be assumed.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify and assess the challenges the broader society presents to the marketplace
  2. critically evaluate complex, contradictory social phenomena from a marketing perspective
  3. demonstrate sensitive, innovative solutions utilising a modern marketing toolkit.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKF5761 - Managing supply networks

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Shanfei Feng

Coordinator(s)

Dr Shanfei Feng

Not offered in 2018

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses: 2276, 4431, B6010 or seek Chief Examiner approval

Synopsis

This unit is designed to provide an integrated approach to understanding strategic supply chain and marketing channel management issues. Managing channels of distribution is a critical strategic activity that can ensure effective market coverage and competitive advantage. In today's global high-tech market environment, with vastly shifting customer needs and shifts in balances of power, it is vital to develop sound knowledge and skills in in the design and management of marketing distribution channels and networks. The unit will address issues in both business-to-business (B2B) and business-to-consumer (B2C) markets.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate knowledge of key supply chain and distribution channel management theories, tools and techniques from a marketing perspective
  2. critically analyse the holistic relationship between supply chain and distribution channel management
  3. apply current supply chain and distribution channel management theory to marketing and distribution channel management strategies
  4. work effectively in teams, leadership, inter-personal, communication, and critical thinking capabilities.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKF5801 - Customer focused innovation

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Samir Gupta

Coordinator(s)

Dr Samir Gupta

Not offered in 2018

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B6010, 2276 or 4431 or seek Chief Examiner approval to undertake this unit.

Synopsis

The ability to bring a steady stream of innovations to the marketplace is the underpinning of business success. Doing so with a firm focus on customers and emphasis on building strong, memorable brands underlines a marketing perspective on innovation. Such market-oriented innovation has to be pervasive and consistent in an organisation. This unit focuses on how innovation and new product development adds continuous value to organisations for it to be competitive in the dynamic markets. It will discuss the nuances of innovation from a marketing perspective and will provide tools and frameworks to tackle market-based innovation challenges. Students will have the opportunity to gain practical, real world experience through a project. Finally, the unit will enhance your ability to communicate (written and verbal) ideas and solutions in business market environment.

Outcomes

The learning outcomes of this unit are to:

  1. explain the theoretical concepts and processes of innovation
  2. assess the impact of networks in the innovation process
  3. apply the concept of value co-creation for new products/services
  4. develop a marketing plan for a new product/service based on co-creation concepts.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKF5911 - Theory and process of buyer behaviour

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Dominic Thomas (First semester)
Dr Yimin Cheng (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Dominic Thomas (First semester)
Dr Yimin Cheng (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (Off-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (Evening)

Co-requisites

MKX9160, MKF5916Not offered in 2018, MKX5955

Prohibitions

MKF5917. Students enrolled in course B6010 or 4431 are prohibited from taking this unit.

Synopsis

Essential concepts in psychology and sociology relevant to consumer and organisational behaviour; essential frameworks, models and concepts; fundamental processes of motivation, perception and learning in individual behaviour; nature and influence of individual predispositions, including personality characteristics, attitude formation and change; the social influences of culture, class reference groups and family; consumer decision processes; diffusions of innovations and fads; links to and organisation/aspects of industrial buying, organisational decision making processes and influences, links and relevance between individual and organisational buying behaviour.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine the origins and nature of buyer behaviour and explain the role of marketing in satisfying buyer's needs and wants
  2. explain the importance to marketing of having a good understanding of buyer behaviour and its influence on marketing strategy
  3. discuss the basic theories and concepts relevant to buyer behaviour in both consumer and organisational contexts
  4. analyse how these theories and concepts can provide insight into and help explain buyer behaviour in contemporary environments
  5. analyse and research buyer behaviour in a range of contexts and from a variety of perspectives.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKF5912 - Marketing research

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Stanislav Stakhovych (First semester)
Dr Dominic Thomas (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Stanislav Stakhovych (First semester)
Dr Dominic Thomas (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (Evening)
  • Second semester 2018 (Off-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B6005 or B6010.

Prohibitions

Students enrolled in course 4431 are prohibited from this unit.

Synopsis

Making decisions without a true understanding is like walking in the dark. One way to acquire reliable and relevant information is through conducting rigorous marketing research. In this unit, you will learn a systematic and objective process for generating information to aid in making marketing decisions. You will not only learn how to formulate a marketing research problem and write a research brief from a managerial perspective, but also how to choose an appropriate research design and produce a research proposal from a researcher perspective. Finally, you will learn how to collect and analyse data, and how findings from a research report can be used to guide better managerial decisions.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify key concepts and methods for conducting marketing research
  2. formulate marketing research problems and/or opportunities
  3. develop skills on how to formulate appropriate research design
  4. conduct data analysis and interpret results from a marketing perspective
  5. develop and present a research proposal
  6. interpret marketing research findings to assist managerial decision making.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKF5916 - Foundations of marketing

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Margaret Matanda (First semester)
Professor Hean Tat Keh (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Margaret Matanda (First semester)
Professor Hean Tat Keh (Second semester)

Not offered in 2018

Prohibitions

MKX9550, MKX5955, MKX9160

Synopsis

Marketing activities undertaken by business and non-business organisations; value exchange concepts and processes; the marketing concept from a strategic and applied perspective; development of corporate and marketing strategic plans; analysis of an organisation's SBUs, product strategies and product development; use of marketing decision making tools at both an applied and strategic level; distribution, pricing and communication mix strategies; services marketing, individual and organisational buyer behaviour, marketing research and market analysis; marketing management, implementation and control processes and procedures.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine the role and influence of marketing in the context of the modern business
  2. explain the key concepts, models and theories upon which the practice of marketing is based
  3. apply key concepts, models and theories in the development of marketing plans and marketing planning
  4. assess the marketing challenges facing firms in a more competitive global market place.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKF5917 - Understanding marketing and consumers

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Peter Thompson

Coordinator(s)

Dr Peter Thompson

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in course B6010 or A6005

Prohibitions

MKX9160, MKF5916Not offered in 2018, MKX5955, MKF5911, MKF9110

Synopsis

This unit is designed to give marketing practitioners an understanding of the fundamental marketing principles and theories that underlie practice. Students will develop conceptual frameworks that can be applied in the range of contexts they are likely to encounter through their career. They will also be given insight into how these fundamental principles and theories contribute to the development of successful marketing strategies and tactics. Students will study the theories and implications of consumer behaviour and will gain a strong understanding of the role of the brand in delivering value to the customer and value to the organisation. These insights will help students develop an understanding of the role and value of the marketing function within an organisation. The unit will also provide students with a perspective that shows the usefulness of basic marketing conceptual models in their further study and their future careers.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. comprehend and be able to apply the basic theories and principles of marketing that are relevant to the marketing practitioner
  2. comprehend consumer behaviour theory and be able to apply that knowledge to the analysis of business problems
  3. evaluate the role of marketing and the importance of understanding consumer behaviour in the creation of value for the consumer
  4. analyse, evaluate and synthesise the role of marketing management in the achievement of commercial and other objectives of organisations.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKF5926 - Integrated marketing communication

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Davide Orazi (First semester)
Ms Bora Min (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Davide Orazi (First semester)
Ms Bora Min (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (Off-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (Evening)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B6005 or B6010.

Prohibitions

Students enrolled in course 4431 are prohibited from this unit.

Synopsis

"You cannot not communicate." This statement is at the heart of why integrated marketing communications (IMC) plays such a critical role within an organisation. Drawing on theoretical and industry based perspectives, in this unit you will gain an understanding of how IMC allows organisations to connect with and influence their consumers to achieve specific marketing and promotional objectives. Along the way, you will also gain insight into the marketing communications industry (including advertising, digital and media) and how it interacts with society.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. use industry accepted and theoretically sound frameworks and processes to prepare an integrated marketing communications plan
  2. construct realistic integrated marketing communication objectives and demonstrate the use of individual and integrated strategies to achieve these objectives
  3. recommend and justify relevant strategies and tactics relating to marketing communications, message and media decisions
  4. evaluate the influences affecting the efficient achievement of integrated marketing communication objectives including budget, resource allocation, project management and environmental pressures
  5. assess broader marketing communication industry issues, offering insight and analysis based on research.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKF5970 - Direct marketing

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Margaret Matanda

Coordinator(s)

Mr Frank Chamberlin

Not offered in 2018

Prohibitions

MKX9701

Synopsis

This unit covers the history, current practice and potential of direct marketing. The primary aim of this unit is to explore direct marketing in all its guises and to demonstrate the integration of direct marketing in the total marketing communications mix. There is a strong focus on the customer, interactivity, the database, targeting, segmentation, media channels and creativity (and how to evaluate creativity). Essential for students who want to have a comprehensive grasp of marketing communications.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the integration of direct marketing in the total communication mix in both consumer and business to business environments
  2. analyse lifetime value using targeting, segmentation and database methodologies
  3. apply the economics of direct marketing
  4. evaluate channel variables and the impact of creative.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKF5979 - Marketing financial services

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Steve Worthington

Coordinator(s)

Professor Steve Worthington

Not offered in 2018

Prohibitions

MKF9790

Synopsis

Characteristics of services, market research for financial services, service quality measurement and management, internal marketing, buyer behaviour and the financial services customer, pricing and promoting financial services, trust and word of mouth advocacy, relationship marketing, and the internationalisation of the Australian financial services sector and the consequences for marketing.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. enable discrimination amongst the general principles of financial services marketing
  2. provide an ability to evaluate the opportunities and challenges that are inherent in the marketing of banking and other financial services
  3. enable critical evaluation of the tools and techniques used in the marketing of services generally and to judge to what extent these can be used in the marketing of banking and financial services.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKF5981 - Retailing

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Dominic Thomas

Coordinator(s)

Mrs Karen Lurati

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in one of the following courses: 2276, 4431, B6010, B6005 or seek Chief Examiner approval

Synopsis

The management of retail organisations, the application of technology in retail organisations and the application of retail strategic and financial planning. Issues, problems and practices involved in managing a retail operation; the role of the retailing industry in distribution, its structure and its dynamics; retail merchandise planning, buying and control; retail store location, layout, presentation and management; current theories and techniques used in the formulation and implementation of retail business strategy.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define retailing and its strategic development
  2. demonstrate an awareness of the issues, problems, opportunities and practices involved in managing a retail operation
  3. describe the principles of retail merchandising, retail formats, retail branding, retail technology, retail experience
  4. provide some insights into the management of human resources within a retail business.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKM5211 - Applied business project

12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Christina Lee Kwai Choi

Coordinator(s)

Professor Christina Lee Kwai Choi

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • Summer semester A 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must be enrolled in course 2098 and have completed 24 credit points.

Synopsis

This is a practical based business project unit for the students of the Master of International Business (MIB) program. The business project may originate from large corporations, non-profit and government agencies, small businesses, or entrepreneurs in the area of marketing, competitive strategy, corporate finance, human resource or new venture development. The students will select the area of project based on a disciplinary area that they are familiar with (marketing, management, finance, international business or international management) and work closely with an academic staff member and a company staff member. They will be guided through the processes of proposal preparation, data collection and analysis, project implementation, business planning and project reporting. The focus of the unit will be on practical application of the knowledge acquired in other units of the MIB program. Students work in teams of two to three people on a significant business project related to a real business problem.

Outcomes

The learning objectives associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate an ability to apply a broad range of knowledge and understanding of key business theories, concepts, tools and techniques in a practical business context
  2. demonstrate an ability to analyse, synthesise and evaluate a business situation and to develop appropriate recommendations in the form of a project report
  3. further enhance communication, inter-personal, problem solving and critical thinking capabilities.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 288 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average six/eight hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKM5260 - International marketing

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Md Yunus Ali

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Md Yunus Ali

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (Evening)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses: 2276, 4431, B6010, B6005, B6007 or seek Chief Examiner approval.

Prohibitions

MKF5260, MKX5260

Synopsis

This unit aims to assist students in acquiring a deeper understanding of market opportunities and techniques to identify, develop, implement, monitor and manage international marketing strategies in a volatile market environment. Students will be exposed to contemporary international marketing literature, cases and internet based national/regional and global market information to build their analytical skills for international marketing operations.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse the economic, political-legal, socio-cultural and other environmental factors to understand foreign markets for international marketing operation
  2. identify, evaluate and select attractive international markets for international marketing operations
  3. apply marketing and management concepts, tools and models in formulating and implementing international marketing plans
  4. critically assess and select strategic approaches for international marketing operation of a company
  5. develop and recommend implementation of international marketing programs for the company.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKM5955 - Marketing and the international consumer

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Vicki Janine Little (First semester)
Associate Professor Md Yunus Ali (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Vicki Janine Little (First semester)
Associate Professor Md Yunus Ali (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (Evening)

Prohibitions

MKX9550, MKX5955, MKS5955, MKZ5955

Synopsis

Marketing is a means by which organisations create value for their stakeholders within pre-determined objectives. Marketing is widely accepted as a means for delivering greater levels of customer satisfaction, profitability, and sustainability within both a tactical and strategic framework. This unit will prepare graduates for the development, implementation and control processes and procedures of strategic marketing management plans for products and services of an organisation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. facilitate understanding of the conceptual framework of marketing in value creation and its many applications in decision making under various environmental constraints and with an Asia Pacific focus
  2. evaluate market based information, using it to plan and develop marketing strategies
  3. understand the behaviour of consumers and their role in value creation
  4. understand how value is created using elements of the marketing mix strategies
  5. understand the role of brands in value creation
  6. apply strategic planning tools in developing a marketing mindset.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKS5955 - Marketing and the international consumer

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Gustav Puth (Term 2)
Professor HB Klopper (Trimester 3)

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • Term 2 2018 (On-campus block of classes)
  • Trimester 3 2018 (On-campus block of classes)

Prohibitions

MKF5916Not offered in 2018, MKX5955, MKX9160, MKX9550, MKZ5955, MKM5955

Synopsis

Marketing activities undertaken by organisations; value exchange concepts and processes; the marketing concept from a strategic and applied perspective; development of corporate and marketing strategic plans; analysis of an organisation's SBUs, product strategies and product development; use of marketing decision making tools at an applied and strategic level; distribution, pricing and communication mix strategies; services marketing, individual and organisational buyer behaviour, marketing research and market analysis; marketing management, implementation and control processes and procedures with emphasis on international aspects of marketing and consumer behaviour.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. evaluate market based information, using it to plan and develop marketing strategies
  2. understanding the behaviour of consumers and their role in value creation
  3. explain how value is created using elements of the marketing mix strategies
  4. discuss the role of brand strategies and customer relationship management in value creation
  5. discuss the application of strategic planning tools in developing a marketing mindset, using marketing metrics.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKX4900 - Honours research thesis

24 points, SCA Band 3, 0.500 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Junzhao Ma

Coordinator(s)

Dr Junzhao Ma

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B3701.

Synopsis

A major research project applying the procedures and techniques learned in MKF4030. Students prepare and write a report in such a way to pave the way for a higher academic degree in marketing or management or a career in business.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify a marketing or business issue in the research literature which has either not been adequately researched previously or which requires replication
  2. critically review relevant academic and business research which relates to this issue
  3. develop a model or conceptualisation of the proposed research and an appreciation of the relevance of such studies to the business community
  4. develop a set of hypotheses to be tested, propose research into these hypotheses, by means of a specific research proposal
  5. conduct, analyse and report findings of the research so that all main issues are identified, limitations of the research are identified and the research findings are linked back to earlier studies in the literature.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload equals 576 hours per semester

See also Unit timetable information


MKX5123 - Entrepreneurial innovation

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Davide Orazi

Coordinator(s)

Dr Davide Orazi

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester A 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B6005 or B6010.

Synopsis

This unit is designed for entrepreneurial aspirants. It will help build skills to develop innovative strategies for new entrepreneurial ventures. The unit will focus on the entrepreneurial innovation process, and will provide students with the opportunity to develop and present an imaginative and creative entrepreneurial business plan.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. recognise, identify and reflect on possible entrepreneurial opportunities and ideas
  2. employ innovative strategies for new entrepreneurial ventures
  3. develop and present an imaginative and creative entrepreneurial business plan
  4. analyse the evolution of entrepreneurial innovations.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKX5521 - Global study programs in marketing

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Mr David Toleman

Coordinator(s)

Mr David Toleman

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Summer semester A 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester 2 2018 (On-campus)

Shanghai

  • Trimester 2 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Permission required

Synopsis

This unit is designed to expose students to the thinking of some of the world's leading marketers. Building on previous knowledge gained in earlier marketing units students will analyse the critical factors associated with marketing in a global arena. Students gain a practical understanding of these issues in a global context through the visitation program which forms an integral part of this unit.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. appraise global marketing and the forces impacting marketing at a global level
  2. evaluate basic theories and concepts relevant to global marketing and analyse how these theories and concepts can provide insight into and an understanding of marketing in a global context
  3. compare and analyse a number of senior marketing manager's perspectives and marketing strategies
  4. evaluate the importance of cross cultural issues on marketing and their impact on global marketing strategy
  5. develop excellent oral and written communication skills to be able to interact in a professional environment with senior managers.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKX5931 - International dimensions of electronic business

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Paul Yeow

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Paul Yeow

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (Evening)

Prohibitions

MKX9310

Synopsis

The aim of this unit is to provide international business students with basic knowledge and understanding of electronic business. This includes mechanism, infrastructure and tools of electronic business, retailing in electronic business, electronic learning, collaborative commerce, business to business electronic procurement, mobile electronic business, social commerce, marketing and advertising in electronic business, electronic business security and fraud protection, electronic business payment systems, electronic business strategies and globalization, and electronic business regulatory, ethical and social environments. Students are to analyse electronic business needs of consumers and businesses across the globe, and use the knowledge acquired in this unit to develop innovative e-business models to improve international business effectiveness and/or increase efficiency. In particular, emphasis will be placed on critical analysis and insights gained from electronic business literature, case studies, project works to solve the strategic problems of leveraging electronic business in international environment.

Outcomes

The learning goals to be achieved in this unit are to:

  1. identify and describe the relevant electronic business technologies for international business including electronic business mechanisms, infrastructure, tools, payment systems and security and fraud protection systems
  2. identify, analyse and critically assess the suitability of various e-business models for international business including e-retailing, e-banking, e-marketing and advertisements, e-procurement, e-learning, collaborative commerce, mobile commerce, social commerce, etc
  3. describe and apply electronic business strategy development process and identify the strategic and developmental issues in international business environment
  4. formulate an electronic business strategy for an international business to improve effectiveness and increase efficiency
  5. identify and describe the relevant electronic business regulatory, ethical and social environments in international business.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKX5955 - Marketing and the international consumer

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Dominic Thomas (First semester, Summer semester B)
Dr Jeff Wang (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Dominic Thomas (First semester, Summer semester B)
Dr Jeff Wang (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (Evening)
  • Second semester 2018 (Evening)
  • Summer semester B 2018 (On-campus block of classes)

Prohibitions

Students enrolled in course B6010, 4431 or 2276 are prohibited from this unit.

Synopsis

Marketing activities undertaken by organisations; value exchange concepts and processes; the marketing concept from a strategic and applied perspective; development of corporate and marketing strategic plans; analysis of an organisation's SBUs, product strategies and product development; use of marketing decision making tools at an applied and strategic level; distribution, pricing and communication mix strategies; services marketing, individual and organisational buyer behaviour, marketing research and market analysis; marketing management, implementation and control processes and procedures with emphasis on international aspects of marketing and consumer behaviour.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine the concepts and theories of marketing and apply them to an international context
  2. analyse, evaluate, and interpret complex and sometimes contradictory marketing phenomena in international context
  3. apply the basic techniques and tools of marketing management to local and international environments
  4. examine the scope and role of the marketing function and its relationship to organisational strategies and critically evaluate how functional marketing plans can be developed and implemented
  5. compare and contrast various marketing theories and practices and develop recommendations for strategic action.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKZ5955 - Marketing and the international consumer

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Hean Tat Keh

Coordinator(s)

Professor Hean Tat Keh

Unit guides

Offered

Suzhou

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

MKX9160, MKF5916Not offered in 2018, MKX9550, MKX5955, MKS5955, MKM5955

Synopsis

Marketing activities undertaken by organisations; value exchange concepts and processes; the marketing concept from a strategic and applied perspective; development of corporate and marketing strategic plans; analysis of an organisation's SBUs, product strategies and product development; use of marketing decision making tools at an applied and strategic level; distribution, pricing and communication mix strategies; services marketing, individual and organisational buyer behaviour, marketing research and market analysis; marketing management, implementation and control processes and procedures with emphasis on international aspects of marketing and consumer behaviour.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine the concepts and theories of marketing and apply them to an international context
  2. analyse, evaluate, and interpret complex and sometimes contradictory marketing phenomena in an international context
  3. apply the basic techniques and tools of marketing management to local and international environments
  4. examine the scope and role of the marketing function and its relationship to organisational strategies and critically evaluate how functional marketing plans can be developed and implemented
  5. compare and contrast various marketing theories and practices and develop recommendations for strategic action.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information